Siemens 6Ra70 Users Manual Ch 0 Cover Contentswopix

6RA70 to the manual ce03091a-16d5-418a-a642-83c481f2eb5a

: Siemens Siemens-6Ra70-Users-Manual-410333 siemens-6ra70-users-manual-410333 siemens pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 232

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

SIMOREG DC Master
6RA70 Series Base Drive Instructions
Microprocessor-based converters from 15A to 1680A
for variable speed DC drives
Rev6.0
6RA70 Base Drives

dc drives
dc drives instructions • 2004

Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
3333 Old Milton Parkway
Alpharetta, GA 30005
1-800-964-4114
seainfo@sea.siemens.com
www.sea.siemens.com/drives
© 2004 Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
The Siemens logo and SIMOREG are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. Product names mentioned may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Order Number DCOM-80011-1500-0804SSS Printed in USA.

Global network of innovation

Converter software version:
As these Operating Instructions went to print, SIMOREG 6RA70 DC Master converters were being delivered
from the factory with software version 2.2 installed.
These Operating Instructions also apply to other software versions.
Earlier software versions: Some parameters described in this document might not be available in the software
(i.e. the corresponding functionality is not available on the converter) or some
parameters will have a restricted setting range. SIMOREG 6RA70 Base Drive Panel
series requires software version 1.8 or later.
Later software versions:

Additional parameters might be available on the SIMOREG DC Master (i.e. extra
functions might be available which are not described in these Operating Instructions)
or some parameters might have an extended setting range. In this case, leave the
relevant parameters at their factory setting, or do not set any parameter values which
are not described in these Instructions !

The latest software version of the SIMOREG DC Master can be read in parameters r060 and r065.
The latest software version is available at the following Internet site:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/en/8467834

The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or contents is
not permitted without express written authority. All rights, including
rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design,
are reserved.
We have checked that the contents of this publication agree with the
hardware and software described herein. Nonetheless, differences
might exist and therefore we cannot guarantee that they are completely
identical. The information given in this publication is reviewed at regular
intervals and any corrections that might be necessary are made in the
subsequent printings. Suggestions for improvement are welcome at all
times.

© Siemens Energy & Automation 2006 All rights reserved

SIMOREG ® is a registered trademark of Siemens

0

Contents
Page

1

Safety information

2

Introduction

3

1-1

2.1 Base Drive Panel Description

2-1

2.2 General Information

2-1

2.3 Rated DC Current

2-2

2.4 Card Rack Assembly

2-2

Parts and Service
3.1 Base Drive Panel model numbers

3-1

3.2 Service

3-2

3.3 Option part numbers

3-3

3.4 Spare Parts

3-4

3.5 Standard Terms & Conditions

3-10

4

Receiving and Unpacking

4-1

5

Technical Data

6

7

5.1 15 to 100 ADC Base Drive Panels

5-1

5.2 140 to 850 ADC Base Drive Panels

5-2

5.3 1180 to 1680 ADC Base Drive Panels

5-3

5.4 Applicable Standards

5-5

Installation and Dimensions
6.1 Installation Information

6-1

6.2 Base Drive Panel Outlines

6-2

Base Drive Panel Connections
7.1 Base Drive Panel Schematics

7-2

7.2 Control Connections CUD1

7-16

7.3 Control Connections CUD2

7-18

7.4 Description of Power/Control Terminals

7-20

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

0-1

8

9

10

0-2

Start-up
8.1 General safety information

8-1

8.2 Operator control panels

8-2

8.3 Parameterization procedure

8-4

8.4 Typical connection diagrams

8-6

8.5 Reset to factory default values

8-8

8.6 Start-up procedure

8-9

Faults and Alarms
9.1 Fault messages

9-1

9.2 Alarm messages

9-28

Abbreviated Parameter List
Overview

10-1

Overview of Abbreviations

10-3

10.1 Operating Status Display

10-5

10.2 General Visualization Parameters

10-7

10.3 Access Authorization Levels

10-11

10.4 Definition of SIMOREG Converter

10-13

10.5 Setting Values for Converter Control

10-17

10.6 Definition of Motor

10-22

10.7 Definition of Speed Sensing Pulse Encoder

10-27

10.8 Armature Current Control, Reversing, Gating

10-30

10.9 Current/Torque Limitation

10-32

10.10 Auto-reserving stage. Armature gating unit

10-34

10.11 Speed Controller

10-34

10.12 Field Current Control, Gating

10-36

10.13 Closed Loop EMF Control

10-38

10.14 Ramp Function Generator

10-39

10.15 Setpoint Processing

10-41

10.16 Ramp Function generator

10-42

10.17 Monitoring Functions and Limits

10-42

10.18 Limit-Value Monitors

10-43

10.19 Settable fixed values

10-45

10.20 Fixed control bits

10-46

10.21 Digital Setpoint Inputs

10-46

10.22 Position sensing with pulse encoder

10-48

10.23 Connector selector switches

10-49
Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

11

10.24 Motorized potentiometer

10-49

10.25 Oscillation

10-51

10.26 definition of Motor Interface

10-52

10.27 Torque Shell Input

10-53

10.28 Speed limiting controller

10-54

10.29 Friction compensation

10-54

10.30 Compensation of moment of inertia(dv/dt injection)

10-55

10.31 Speed controller

10-57

10.32 Field reversal

10-59

10.33 Input Quantities for Signals

10-59

10.34 Configuring of Closed-Loop Control

10-60

10.35 Control and Status Word

10-68

10.36 Further Configuring Measures

10-71

10.37 Analog Inputs

10-72

10.38 Analog Outputs

10-76

10.39 Binary Outputs

10-78

10.40 Configuration of Serial Interfaces

10-79

10.41 Deactivation of Monitoring Functions

10-89

10.42 Compensation values

10-89

10.43 Thyristor Diagnostics

10-90

10.44 Parameters for DriveMonitor and OP1S

10-90

10.45 Profile Parameters

10-90

10.46 Fault memory

10-91

10.47 Visualization parameters: Alarms

10-92

10.48 Device identification

10-93

10.49 Visualization parameters: Control and status word

10-93

10.50 Resetting and Storing Parameters

10-93

Simplified Block Diagrams

11-1

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

0-3

1

Safety information
WARNING
Hazardous voltages and rotating parts are present in this electrical equipment during
operation. Non-observance of the safety instructions can result in death, severe
personal injury or substantial property damage.
Only qualified personnel should work on or around the equipment after first becoming
thoroughly familiar with all warning and safety notices and maintenance procedures contained
herein. The successful and safe operation of this equipment is dependent on proper handling,
installation, operation and maintenance.

Definitions:
• QUALIFIED PERSONNEL
For the purpose of this Instruction Manual and product labels, a "Qualified Person" is someone who
is familiar with the installation, construction and operation of the equipment and the hazards
involved. He or she must have the following qualifications:
1. Trained and authorized to energize, de-energize, clear, ground and tag circuits and equipment in
accordance with established safety procedures.
2. Trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment in accordance with established
safety procedures.
3. Trained in providing first aid.
• DANGER
For the purpose of this Instruction Manual and product labels, "Danger" indicates that death,
severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper precautions are not
taken.
• WARNING
For the purpose of this Instruction Manual and product labels, "Warning" indicates that death,
severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper precautions are not
taken.
• CAUTION
For the purpose of this Instruction Manual and product labels, "Caution" indicates that minor
personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
• NOTE
For the purpose of this Instruction Manual, "Note" indicates information about the product or the
respective part of the Instruction Manual which requires particular attention.

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

1-1

NOTE
These operating instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, nor to
provide for every possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation or
maintenance.
Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered
sufficiently for the purchaser's purposes, the matter should be referred to the local Siemens
Sales Office.
The contents of these operating instructions shall not become part or modify any prior or existing
agreement, commitment or relationship. The Sales Contract contains the entire obligations of
Siemens. The warranty contained in the contract between the parties is the sole warranty of
Siemens. Any statements contained herein do not create new warranties or modify the existing
warranty.

DANGER
Converters contain hazardous electrical voltages, Death, severe bodily injury or significant
material damage can occur if the safety measures are not followed.
1. Only qualified personnel, who are knowledgeable about the converters and the provided
information, can install, start up, operate, troubleshoot or repair the converters.
2. The converters must be installed in accordance with all relevant safety regulations (e.g.
NEC, DIN, VDE) as well as all other national or local regulations. Operational safety and
reliability must be ensured by correct grounding, cable sizing and appropriate short-circuit
protection.
3. All panels and doors must be kept closed during normal operation.
4. Before carrying out visual checks and maintenance work, ensure that the AC power supply
is disconnected and locked out. Before the AC supply is disconnected, both converters and
motors have hazardous voltage levels. Even when the converter contactor is open,
hazardous voltages are still present.
5. When making measurements with the power supply switched on, electrical connections
must not be touched under any circumstances. Remove all jewelry from wrists and fingers.
Ensure that the test equipment is in good conditions and operationally safe.
6. When working on units that are switched on, stand on an insulating surface, i.e. ensure that
you are not grounded.
7. Carefully follow the relevant instructions and observe all danger, warning and cautionary
instructions.
8. This does not represent a full listing of all the measures necessary for safe operation of the
equipment. If you require other information or if certain problems occur which are not
handled in enough detail in the information provided in the Instruction Manual, please
contact your local Siemens office.

1-2

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

CAUTION
Electro-statically sensitive devices
The converter contains electro-statically sensitive devices. These can easily be destroyed if they are not
handled correctly. If, however, it is absolutely essential for you to work on electronic modules, please pay
careful attention to the following instructions:
• Electronic modules (PCBs) should not be touched unless work has to be carried out on them.
• Before touching a PCB, the person carrying out the work must himself be electro-statically discharged.
The simplest way of doing this is to touch an electrically conductive ground object, e.g. socket outlet
ground contact.
• PCBs must not be allowed to come into contact with electrically insulating materials − plastic foil,
insulating table tops or clothing made of synthetic fibers −
• PCBs may only be set down or stored on electrically conducting surfaces.
• When carrying out soldering jobs on PCBs, make sure that the soldering tip has been grounded.
• PCBs and electronic components should generally be packed in electrically conducting containers
(such as metallized-plastic boxes or metal cans) before being stored or shipped.
• If the use of non-conducting packing containers cannot be avoided, PCBs must be wrapped in a
conducting material before being put in them. Examples of such materials include electrically
conducting foam rubber or household aluminum foil.
For easy reference, the protective measures necessary when dealing with sensitive electronic components
are illustrated in the sketches below.
a

=

Conductive flooring

d

=

Anti-static overall

b

=

Anti-static table

e

=

Anti-static chain

c

=

Anti-static footwear

f

=

Grounding connections of cabinets

d

d

b

e

e

f
a

Seated workstation

d

b

f

f
c

a

Standing workstation

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

f

f
c

a

Standing/seated workstation

1-3

NOTES:

1-4

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

2

Description

2.1

Base Drive Panel Description
Series 6RA70 SIMOREG DC MASTER Base Drive Panels are complete drive assemblies ready to be
installed and operated. They include a 3-phase armature converter, single-phase field converter, main
contactor, protective semiconductor fuses, control power transformer, and power / control terminals.
Base Drive Panels are fully digital, compact units which supply the armature and field of variablespeed DC drives with rated armature currents from 15A to 1680A. The motor field circuit can be
supplied with DC currents of up to 85A (current levels depend on the armature rated current).

2.2

General Information
Series 6RA70 SIMOREG DC MASTER converters are characterized by their compact, space-saving
construction. Their compact design makes them particularly easy to service and maintain since
individual components are readily accessible. The electronics box contains the basic electronic
circuitry as well as any supplementary option boards.
All SIMOREG DC MASTER units are equipped with a PMU simple operator panel mounted in the
converter door. The panel consists of a five-digit, seven-segment display, three LED’s as status
indicators and three parameterization keys. The PMU also features connector X300 with an USS
interface in accordance with the RS232 or RS485 standard. The panel provides all the facilities for
making adjustments or settings and displaying measured values required to start-up the converter.
The OP1S optional converter operator panel can be mounted directly in the converter door or
externally, e.g., in the cubicle door. When mounted remotely, the OP1S can be connected to the
converter with cables up to 5 meters (15 feet) length. Cable up to 50 meter (164 feet) in length can be
used if a separate 5 VDC power supply is available. The OP1S connects to the SIMOREG through
connector X300 using the RS485 interface. The OP1S can be installed as an economic alternative to
conventional door mounted metering devices (i.e., voltmeters, ammeters, and speed indicator).
The OP1S features a liquid crystal display with 4 x 16 characters for displaying parameter names in
plain text. English, German, French, Spanish and Italian can be selected as the display languages. In
addition the OP1S can store parameter sets for easy downloading to other drives.
The converter can also be parameterized on a standard PC with appropriate software connected to the
serial interface on the basic unit. This PC interface is used during start-up, for maintenance during
shutdown and for diagnosis in operation. Furthermore, converter software upgrades can be loaded
through this interface for storage in flash memory.
On single-quadrant converters, a fully controlled three-phase bridge supplies the armature. On fourquadrant converters, two fully controlled three-phase bridges are connected in an inverse-parallel
connection to allow both positive and negative armature current. For the field converter, a singlephase, half-controlled 2-pulse bridge supplies the motor shunt field.
The armature and field converters can operate with AC line frequencies from 45 to 65 Hz. If required
for a specific application, the frequency of the armature and field AC supplies can be different. The
armature converter 3 phase AC supply is phase insensitive however on base drives rated 1180, 1660
and 1680 amperes, the 3 phase cooling fan must be connected to get the proper direction of rotation.
The power section cooling system is monitored by means of temperature sensors.

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

2-1

The power section for the armature and field converters is constructed of isolated thyristor modules for
converters rated from 15A to 850A at 460VAC-line voltage. The heat sink in this case is electrically
isolated and at ground potential. On converters rated 1180, 1660 and 1680 amperes at 460 VAC, the
power section for the armature circuit is constructed using disk thyristors and the heat sinks are at line
voltage potential. The housing and terminal covers on power connections provide protection against
accidental contact for operators working in the vicinity. All connecting terminals are accessible from the
front.
All open and closed-loop drive control and communication functions are performed by two powerful
microprocessors. Drive control functions are implemented in the software as program modules that can
be "wired up" and changed by parameters.

2.3

Rated DC Current:
The rating plate of the 6RA70 power module has 2 rated currents listed on it. The first output rating is a
IEC class I ratings and has no bearing on the base drive panel rating. The second rating is the US
(NEMA) rating which the Base Drive Panel rating is derived from.
The US (NEMA) rated current allows operation at this rated current followed by an overload of 150%
for 60 seconds in a 45°C ambient. The overload can be applied no sooner than every 10 minutes.
Base Drive Panels are designed using the US rating which means that fuses, contactors, and terminal
blocks are sized for the rated US (NEMA) current.
The IEC class I rating is the maximum current the power module can supply continuously with no
overload. Because an overload is not possible the class I rated current is higher than the US rating.
The IEC class I rating cannot be used with Base Drive Panels because the Base Drive Panel fuses,
contactors, and terminal blocks will be overloaded.
The microprocessor calculates the current I2t value of the power section cyclically to ensure that the
thyristors are not damaged in overload operation.

2.4

Card Rack Assembly
One of the many features of the 6RA70 is its ability to expand its functionality modularly through the
use of adding additional option cards inserted in the internal card rack of the power module. A
complete list of the option cards can be found in 6RA70 catalog available from your local Siemens
Sales office.
The card rack assembly contains the CUD1 microprocessor board and two additional slots for two full
size option cards or four half-size option cards. The back plane of the card rack assembly contains an
EEPROM allowing the CUD1 to be replaced without reprogramming of the parameters. Since
additional information specific to the individual unit is programmed into the back plane of the
card rack assembly (model #, serial #, PIN code, etc..) the card rack assembly should never be
interchanged with another unit. If ordering an additional back plane (part # 6RY1703-0GA01)
the model and serial number of the power module will be required.

2-2

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

3

Parts and Service

3.1

Base Drive Panel Catalog Numbers
US RATING

1-QUAD TYPE

4-QUAD TYPE

Horsepower
1

Horsepower

(Amps DC)

(Catalog No.)

(Catalog No.)

(240V DC )

(500V DC)

15

6RA7013-2FS22-0

6RA7013-2FV62-0

3HP

7.5HP

30

6RA7018-2FS22-0

6RA7018-2FV62-0

7.5HP

15HP

60

6RA7025-2FS22-0

6RA7025-2FV62-0

15HP

30HP

100

6RA7030-2FS22-0

6RA7030-2FV62-0

25HP

60HP

140

6RA7072-2FS22-0

6RA7072-2FV62-0

40HP

75HP

210

6RA7075-2FS22-0

6RA7075-2FV62-0

60HP

125HP

255

6RA7077-2FS22-0

6RA7077-2FV62-0

75HP

150HP

430

6RA7082-2FS22-0

6RA7082-2FV62-0

125HP

250HP

510

6RA7083-2FS22-0

6RA7083-2FV62-0

150HP

300HP

850

6RA7087-2FS22-0

6RA7087-2FV62-0

250HP

500HP

1180(2)

6RA7091-2FS22-0

6RA7091-2FV62-0

350HP

700HP

1660(2)

6RA7094-2FS22-0

6RA7094-2FV62-0

500HP

1000HP

1680(2)

6RA7094-2FS22-085

6RA7094-2FV62-085

500HP

1000HP

1) Standard voltage configuration
as shipped is 460V AC.
See Technical application note
for 230V AC connection.

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

2) Standard voltage configuration
as shipped is 460V AC.
See Technical application note
for 575V AC connection on 1180
1660 & 1680A Base drives

3-1

3.2

Service

Spare Parts
An excellent stock of drive products spare parts is maintained at the Alpharetta, Georgia factory. Same
day delivery and after hour shipments can be serviced from this stock, including on weekends and
holidays. To contact Customer Service, simply call our Customer Service Group general phone number:
1-800-333-PIC1 (7421)

Technical Assistance
Should you need technical assistance (other than ordering a part), a reliable answering service ensures
that your request is relayed immediately to one of our technical support engineers 24 hours a day. To
contact the Technical Support and Field Service groups simply call:

1-800-333-PIC1 (7421)

3-2

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

3.3

Option Part Numbers

Options

Order No.

Terminal expansion card (CUD2)

6RX1700-0AK00

User-friendly operator control panel (OP1S)

6SE7090-0XX84-2FK0

AOP1 adapter for mounting OP1A in cubicle door, including
5 m connecting cable

6SX7010-0AA00

PMU-OP1S connecting cable, 3m

6SX7010-0AB03

PMU-OP1S connecting cable, 5m

6SX7010-0AB05

LBA

6SE7090-0XX84-4HA0

Local bus adapter for the electronics box
Note: LBA is needed to install any boards listed below

ADB Adapter board
Note: ADB is always needed to install CBC, CBP2, CBD,
EB1, EB2, SBP and SLB boards
SBP Pulse encoder evaluation board

6SE7090-0XX84-0KA0

1) 2)

6SX7010-0FA00

EB1

Terminal expansion board

2)

6SX7010-0KB00

EB2

Terminal expansion board

2)

6SX7010-0KC00

SLB

SIMOLINK board

2)

CBP2 Communications board interface for PROFIBUS
CBC Communications board interface for CAN protocol

6SX7010-0FJ00
2)

6SX7010-0FF05

2)

6SX7010-0FG00

CBD Communications board interface for DeviceNet protocol

2)

6SX7010-0FK00

T400 Technology board with SPW 420 Axial winder software

2)

6DD1-842-0AA0

T400 Technology board with SPW 440 Angular Synchr. Software

2)

6DD1-842-0ABO

1) A pulse encoder evaluation circuit is a standard component of the basic SIMOREG converter. The SBP only
needs to be ordered in configurations requiring evaluation of a second pulse encoder.
2) The LBA local bus adapter and ADB adapter board must be ordered as additional components for installing
supplementary boards in the SIMOREG converter.

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

3-3

3.4

Spare Parts
Printed Circuit Boards
DESCRIPTION
Microprocessor board CUD1

WHERE USED
US Rating 460V

PART
NUMBER

RECOM
SPARE

All Ratings

6RY1703-0AA00

1

All 1Q Ratings

6RY1703-0DA01

1

All 4Q Ratings

6RY1703-0DA02

1

PMU Operator Panel (C98 043-A7005-L1)

All Ratings

6RY1704-0AA00

-

Field Supply board

(C98 043-A7014-L1)

30 to 100 Amp

6RY1703-0CA03

1

Field Supply board

(C98 043-A7014-L2)

140 to 510 Amp

6RY1703-0CA01

1

Field Supply board

(C98 043-A7004-L1)

850 to 1660 Amp

6RY1703-0EA01

1

Field Supply board

(C98 043-A7004-L3)

1680 Amp

6RY1703-0EA03

1

Snubber board

(C98 043-A7007-L4)

60 to 100 Amp

6RY1703-0FA04

Snubber board

(C98 043-A7007-L6)

30, 140 & 210 Amp

6RY1703-0FA11

-

Snubber board

(C98 043-A7011-L6)

255 & 430 Amp

6RY1703-0FA10

-

Snubber boards

(C98 043-A7011-L1) 510 & 850 Amp

6RY1703-0FA06

-

15 Amp (1Q, 4Q)

6RY1703-0CA04

1

15 – 1680 Amp

6RY1702-0BA00

2

(C98 043-A7001-L1)
Power Interface board 1Q (85 to 575 VAC)
(C98 043-A7002-L1)
Power Interface board 4Q (85 to 575 VAC)
(C98 043-A7002-L4)

Main Power Section Connector board
(C98 043-A7010-L2)
Fuse for Power Supply, 1 amp F1, F2
Mounted on Power Interface board

Cables
DESCRIPTION

3-4

WHERE USED
US Rating 460V

PART
NUMBER

RECOM
SPARE

Ribbon Cable 20 pole X102

15 amp

6RY1707-0AA00

Ribbon Cable 64 pole X101

15 to 430 amp

6RY1707-0AA01

-

Ribbon Cable 20 pole X102

30 to 210 amp

6RY1707-0AA02

-

Ribbon Cable 20 pole X102

255 & 430 amp

6RY1707-0AA03

-

Ribbon Cable 20 pole X102

510 amp

6RY1707-0AA12

-

Ribbon Cable 64 pole X101

510 amp

6RY1707-0AA05

-

Ribbon Cable 20 pole X102

850 to 1680 amp

6RY1707-0AA06

-

Ribbon Cable 64 pole X101

850 to 1680 amp

6RY1707-0AA07

-

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

Fans/Blowers
DESCRIPTION

FAN, 24 VDC

WHERE USED
US Rating 460V

PART NUMBER

RECOM
SPARE

140 & 210 amp

6RY1701-0AA07

2

255, 430 & 510
amp

6RY1701-0AA11

1

850 amp

6RY1701-0AA12

1

1180, 1660
&1680 amp

6RY1701-0AA04

1

(C98130-A1256-C553)
FAN, 230 VAC, 1 Phase
(C98130-A7004-B130)
FAN, 230 VAC, 1 Phase
(C98130-A7004-B330)
FAN, 460 VAC, 3 Phase
(C98 247-S1002-C25)

Thyristors & Diodes
Armature Converter Thyristor Modules, (for 1-Quad Drives)
DESCRIPTION

WHERE USED
US Rating 460V

PART NUMBER

RECOM
SPARE

Dual Thyristor Module

15 amp

1Q

6RY1700-0AA16

3

Dual Thyristor Module

30 amp

1Q

6RY1700-0AA17

3

Dual Thyristor Module

60 amp

1Q

6RY1700-0AA18

3

Dual Thyristor Module

100 amp

1Q

6RY1700-0AA11

3

Dual Thyristor Module

140 amp

1Q

6RY1700-0AA14

3

Dual Thyristor Module

210 amp

1Q

6SY7010-0AA02

3

Dual Thyristor Module

255 amp

1Q

6RY1700-0AA15

3

Dual Thyristor Module

430 amp

1Q

6SY7010-0AA05

3

Dual Thyristor Module

510 amp

1Q

6SY7010-0AA04

3

Dual Thyristor Module

850 amp

1Q

6RY1700-0AA04

3

Thyristor/Heatsink Assembly, Front

1180 amp

1Q

6RY1702-0CA15

2

1180 amp

1Q

6RY1702-0CA16

2

1660 amp

1Q

6RY1702-0CA17

2

1660 amp

1Q

6RY1702-0CA18

2

Thyristor/Heatsink Assembly, Front

1680 amp

1Q

6RY1702-0CA30

2

Thyristor/Heatsink Assembly, Back

1680 amp

1Q

6RY1702-0CA31

2

(C98 130-A1255-B510)
Thyristor/Heatsink Assembly, Back
(C98 130-A1255-B511)
Thyristor/Heatsink Assembly, Front
(C98 130-A1255-B520)
Thyristor/Heatsink Assembly, Back
(C98 130-A1255-B521)

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

3-5

Armature Converter Thyristor Modules, (for 4-Quad Drives)
DESCRIPTION

WHERE USED
US Rating 460V

PART NUMBER

RECOM
SPARE

Dual Thyristor Module

15 amp

4Q

6RY1700-0AA16

3

Dual Thyristor Module

30 amp

4Q

6RY1700-0AA17

3

Dual Thyristor Module

60 & 100 amp

4Q

6RY1700-0AA11

3

Dual Thyristor Module

140 amp

4Q

6RY1700-0AA14

3

Dual Thyristor Module

210 amp

4Q

6SY7010-0AA02

3

Dual Thyristor Module

255 amp

4Q

6RY1700-0AA15

3

Dual Thyristor Module

430 amp

4Q

6SY7010-0AA05

3

Dual Thyristor Module

510 to 850 amp 4Q

6SY7010-0AA04

3

Thyristor/Heatsink Assembly

1180 amp

4Q

6RY1702-0CA02

2

1660 amp

4Q

6RY1702-0CA03

2

1680 amp

4Q

6RY1702-0CA34

2

C98 130-A1256-B510
Thyristor/Heatsink Assembly
C98 130-A1256-B520
Thyristor/Heatsink Assembly

Field Converter Thyristor Modules
DESCRIPTION

WHERE USED
US Rating 460V

PART NUMBER

RECOM
SPARE

Dual Thyristor Module

15 to 430 amp

6RY1700-0AA12

1

Dual Thyristor Module

510 to 1660 amp

6RY1700-0AA17

1

Dual Thyristor Module

1680 amp

6RY1700-0AA05

1

PART NUMBER

RECOM

Field Converter Diode Modules
DESCRIPTION

3-6

WHERE USED
US Rating 460V

SPARE

Dual Diode Module

15 to 430 amp

6RY1700-0BA04

1

Dual Diode Module

510 to 1660 amp

6RY1700-0BA01

1

Dual Diode Module

1680 AMP

6RY1700-0BA05

1

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

Power Fuses
Armature Converter AC Line Fuses, (1PFU - 3 PFU)
DESCRIPTION

WHERE USED
US Rating 460V

PART NUMBER

RECOM

25 amp, 700 volt

15 amp

A1-FUF-END-C25

3

50 amp, 700 volt

30 amp

A1-FUF-END-CDN

3

70 amp, 500 volt

60 amp

A1-FUF-00D-014

3

125 amp, 500 volt

100 amp

A1-FUF-00D-018

3

150 amp, 500 volt

140 amp

A1-FUF-00D-019

3

200 amp, 500 volt

210 amp

A1-FUF-00D-021

3

250 amp, 500 volt

255 amp

A1-FUF-00D-023

3

400 amp, 500 volt

430 amp

A1-FUF-00D-028

3

500 amp, 500 volt

510 amp

A1-FUF-00D-030

3

800 amp, 800 volt (Leg Fuse)

850 amp

3NE3338-8

3

1000 amp, 660 volt (Leg Fuse)

1180 amp

6RY1702-0BA02

3

1250 amp, 660 volt (Leg Fuse)

1660 amp

6RY1702-0BA01

3

1500 amp, 660 volt (Leg Fuse)

1680 amp

6RY1702-0BA05

3

SPARE

Armature Converter DC Fuses, 4-Quad Only, (4PFU)
DESCRIPTION

WHERE USED
US Rating 460V

PART NUMBER

25 amp, 700 volt

15 amp

A1-FUF-END-C25

2

50 amp, 700 volt

30 amp

A1-FUF-END-CDN

2

90 amp, 700 volt

60 amp

A1-FUF-00E-016

2

150 amp, 700 volt

100 amp

A1-FUF-00E-019

2

175 amp, 700 volt

140 amp

A1-FUF-00E-020

2

250 amp, 700 volt

210 amp

A1-FUF-00E-023

2

300 amp, 700 volt

255 amp

A1-FUF-00E-025

2

500 amp, 700 volt

430 amp

A1-FUF-00E-030

2

600 amp, 700 volt

510 amp

A1-FUF-00E-031

2

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

RECOM
SPARE

3-7

Field Converter AC Line Fuses (1 & 2FSFU)
DESCRIPTION

WHERE USED
US Rating 460V

PART NUMBER

RECOM
SPARE

20 amp, 700 volt

60 to 210 amp

A1-FUF-END-C20

2

40 amp, 700 volt

255 to 850 amp

A1-FUF-END-C40

2

50 amp, 700 volt

1180 to 1660 amp A1-FUF-END-C50

2

125 amp, 600 volt

1680 amp

A1-FUF-HHA-024

2

PART NUMBER

RECOM

Control Transformer Primary Fuses (1CFU, 2CFU)
DESCRIPTION

WHERE USED
US Rating 460V

SPARE

1.25 amp, 600 volt, Class "CC"

15 to 100 amp

A1-FUF-AFA-006

2

2.5 amp, 600 volt, Class "CC"

140 & 210 amp

A1-FUF-AFA-011

2

A1-FUF-AFA-014

2

A1-FUF-AFA-016

4

PART NUMBER

RECOM

1180, 1660 &
1680 amp
3.5 amp, 600 volt, Class "CC"

255 to 510 amp
850 amp, (460
volt input only)

5 amp, 600 volt, Class "CC"

1180, 1660 &
1680 amp
(4CFU, 5CFU,
6CFU, 7CFU)

Control Transformer Secondary Fuse (3CFU)
DESCRIPTION

WHERE USED
US Rating 460V

SPARE

0.75 amp, 250 volt, Type MDL

15 to 100 amp

A1-FUF-DKA-GBF

2

1.5 amp, 250 volt, Type MDL

140 & 210 amp

A1-FUF-DKA-GBP

2

1180,1660 &
1680 amp

3-8

2 amp, 250 volt, Type MDL

255 to 510 amp

A1-FUF-DKA-GBV

2

6.25 amp, 250 volt, Type MDL

850 amp

A1-FUF-DKA-GCM

2

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

Control Transformer (1CTR, 2CTR, 3CTR)
DESCRIPTION
460 VAC Primary

WHERE USED
US Rating 460V

PART NUMBER

RECOM
SPARE

115 VA, 230 VAC secondary

15 to 100 amp

A1-TRC-Q0C-285

-

250 VA, 230 VAC secondary

140 & 210 amp

A1-TRC-Q0C-286

-

1180, 1660 &
1680 amp
350 VA, 230 VAC secondary

255 to 510 amp

A1-TRC-Q0C-287

-

1000 VA, 230 VAC secondary

850 amp

A1-TRC-Q0C-288

-

750 VA, 460 VAC secondary

1180,1660 &
1680 amp

A1-TRC-Q0C-289

-

Main Contactor (M)
DESCRIPTION

WHERE USED
US Rating 460V

PART NUMBER

RECOM
SPARE

3 Pole AC contactor, 240 VAC coil

15 amp

3RT1016-1AP61

-

3 Pole AC contactor, 240 VAC coil

30 amp

3RT1025-1AP60

-

3 Pole AC contactor, 240 VAC coil

60 amp

3RT1035-1AP60

-

3 Pole AC contactor, 240 VAC coil

100 amp

3RT1044-1AP60

-

3 Pole AC contactor, 240 VAC coil

140 amp

3RT1045-1AP60

-

3 Pole AC contactor, 240 VAC coil

210 amp

3RT1456-6AP36

-

3 Pole AC contactor, 240 VAC coil

255 amp

3RT1456-6AP36

-

1 Pole DC contactor, 250 VDC coil

430 to 1680 amp

A1-CRD-CAC-010

-

Contactor Coil Suppressor (1SP, ENSP)
DESCRIPTION

Suppressor, varistor type 127 – 240 V

WHERE USED
US Rating 460V
15 amp

PART NUMBER

RECOM
SPARE

3RT1916-1BD00

-

3RT1926-1BD00

-

WHERE USED
US Rating 460V

PART NUMBER

RECOM

Relay, 2-NO, 2-NC, 230 VAC coil

430 to 1680 amp

3RH1122-1AP60

-

Rectifier Bridge, 1 Phase, 5A, 800 V

430 to 1680 amp

A1-116-002-001

-

430 to 1680 amp
Suppressor, varistor type 127 – 240 V

30 to 140 amp

Auxiliary Relay, (EN), and Rectifier Bridge, (MREC)
DESCRIPTION

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

SPARE

3-9

3.5

Standard Terms and Conditions of Sale
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. ("Seller")

1.

WARRANTY - Seller warrants that on the date of shipment the goods are of the kind and quality described herein and are free of nonconformities in workmanship and material. This warranty does not apply to goods delivered by Seller but manufactured by others.
(b) Buyer's exclusive remedy for a nonconformity in any item of the goods shall be the repair or the replacement (at Seller's option) of
the item and any affected part of the goods. Seller's obligation to repair or replace shall be in effect for a period of one (1) year from
initial operation of the goods but not more than eighteen (18) months from Seller's shipment of the goods, provided Buyer has sent
written notice within that period of time to Seller that the goods do not conform to the above warranty. Repaired and replacement parts
shall be warranted for the remainder of the original period of notification set forth above, but in no event less than 12 months from repair
or replacement. At its expense, Buyer shall remove and ship to Seller any such nonconforming items and shall reinstall the repaired or
replaced parts. Buyer shall grant Seller access to the goods at all reasonable times in order for Seller to determine any nonconformity in
the goods. Seller shall have the right of disposal of items replaced by it. If Seller is unable or unwilling to repair or replace, or if repair or
replacement does not remedy the nonconformity, Seller and Buyer shall negotiate an equitable adjustment in the contract price, which
may include a full refund of the contract price for the nonconforming goods.
(c) SELLER HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, EXCEPT THAT OF TITLE. SPECIFICALLY,
IT DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, COURSE OF
DEALING AND USAGE OF TRADE.
(d) Buyer and successors of Buyer are limited to the remedies specified in this article and shall have no others for a nonconformity in
the goods. Buyer agrees that these remedies provide Buyer and its successors with a minimum adequate remedy and are their
exclusive remedies, whether Buyer's or its successors' remedies are based on contract, warranty, tort (including negligence), strict
liability, indemnity, or any other legal theory, and whether arising out of warranties, representations, instructions, installations, or nonconformities from any cause.
Note: This article 1 does not apply to any software which may be furnished by Company. In such cases, the attached Software License
Addendum applies.
2. PATENTS - Seller shall pay costs and damages finally awarded in any suit against Buyer or its vendees to the extent based upon a
finding that the design or construction of the goods as furnished infringes a United States patent (except infringement occurring as a
result of incorporating a design or modification at Buyer's request), provided that Buyer promptly notifies Seller of any charge of
infringement, and Seller is given the right at its expense to settle such charge and to defend or control the defense of any suit based
upon such charge. Seller shall have no obligation hereunder with respect to claims, suits or proceedings, resulting from or related to, in
whole or in part, (i) the use of software or software documentation, (ii) compliance with Buyer's specifications, (iii) the combination with,
or modification of, the goods after delivery by Seller, or (iv) the use of the goods, or any part thereof, in the practice of a process. THIS
ARTICLE SETS FORTH SELLER'S ENTIRE LIABILITY WITH RESPECT TO PATENTS.
3. PERFORMANCE; DELAYS - TTimely performance by Seller is contingent upon Buyer's supplying to Seller, when needed, all
required technical information and data, including drawing approvals, and all required commercial documentation. If Seller suffers delay
in performance due to any cause beyond its reasonable control, the time of performance shall be extended a period of time equal to the
period of the delay and its consequences. Seller will give to Buyer notice within a reasonable time after Seller becomes aware of any
such delay.
4. SHIPMENT, TITLE AND RISK OF LOSS - (a) The term "shipment" means delivery to the initial carrier in accordance with the delivery
terms of this contract. Seller may make partial shipments. Seller shall select method of transportation and route, unless terms are f.o.b
point of shipment and Buyer specifies the method and route and is to pay the freight costs in addition to the price. When terms are f.o.b.
destination or freight allowed to destination, "destination" means common carrier delivery point (within the United States, excluding
Alaska and Hawaii) nearest the destination.
(b) Title to the goods and risk of loss or damage shall pass to Buyer at the f.o.b. point. Seller shall not be responsible for damage to the
goods after having received "in good order" receipts from the carrier.
5. TAXES - Any applicable duties or sales, use, excise, value-added or similar taxes will be added to the price and invoiced separately
(unless an acceptable exemption certificate is furnished).
6. TERMS OF PAYMENT - (a) Unless otherwise stated, all payments shall be in United States dollars, and a pro rata payment shall
become due as each shipment is made. If shipment is delayed by Buyer, date of notice of readiness for shipment shall be deemed to be
date of shipment for payment purposes.
(b) On late payments, the contract price shall, without prejudice to Seller's right to immediate payment, be increased by 1 1/2% per
month on the unpaid balance, but not to exceed the maximum permitted by law.
(c) If any time in Seller's judgment Buyer is unable or unwilling to meet the terms specified, Seller may require satisfactory assurance or
full or partial payment as a condition to commencing or continuing manufacture or making shipment, and may, if shipment has been
made, recover the goods from the carrier, pending receipt of such assurances.

3-10

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

7. NONCANCELLATION - Buyer may not cancel or terminate for convenience, or direct suspension of manufacture, except with Seller's
written consent and then only upon terms that will compensate Seller for its engineering, fabrication and purchasing charges and any other
costs relating to such cancellation, termination or uspension, plus a reasonable amount for profit.
8. NUCLEAR - Buyer represents and warrants that the goods covered by this contract shall not be used in or in connection with a nuclear
facility or application. If Buyer is unable to make such representation and warranty, then Buyer agrees to indemnify and hold harmless Seller
and to waive and require its insurers to waive all right of recovery against Seller for any damage, loss, destruction, injury or death resulting
from a "nuclear incident", as that term is defined in the Atomic Energy Act of 1954, as amended, whether or not due to Seller's negligence.
9. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY - Neither Seller, nor its suppliers shall be liable, whether in contract, warranty, failure of a remedy to achieve
its intended or essential purposes, tort (including negligence), strict liability, indemnity or any other legal theory, for loss of use, revenue or
profit, or for costs of capital or of substitute use or performance, or for indirect, special, liquidated, incidental or consequential damages, or for
any other loss or cost of a similar type, or for claims by Buyer for damages of Buyer's customers. Seller's maximum liability under this
contract shall be the contract price. Buyer and Seller agree that the exclusions and limitations set forth in this article are separate and
independent from any remedies which Buyer may have hereunder and shall be given full force and effect whether or not any or all such
remedies shall be deemed to have failed of their essential purpose.
10. GOVERNING LAW AND ASSIGNMENT - The laws of the State of Georgia shall govern the validity, interpretation and enforcement of
this contract, without regard to its conflicts of law principles. The application of the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods shall be excluded. Assignment may be made only with written consent of both parties; provided, however, Seller
may assign to its affiliate without Buyer's consent.
11. ATTORNEY FEES - Buyer shall be liable to Seller for any attorney fees and costs incurred by Seller in enforcing any of its rights
hereunder.
12. DISPUTES - Either party may give the other party written notice of any dispute arising out of or relating to this contract and not resolved
in the normal course of business. The parties shall attempt in good faith to resolve such dispute promptly by negotiations between executives
who have authority to settle the dispute. If the matter has not been resolved within 60 days of the notice, either party may initiate non-binding
mediation of the dispute.
13. STATUTE OF LIMITATIONS - To the extent permitted by applicable law, any lawsuit for breach of contract, including breach of warranty,
arising out of the transactions covered by this contract, must be commenced not later than twelve (12) months from the date the cause of
action accrued.
14. PRICES - In the event of a price increase or decrease, the price of goods on order will be adjusted to reflect such increase or decrease.
This does not apply to a shipment held by request of Buyer. Goods already shipped are not subject to price increase or decrease. Orders on
a bid or contract basis are not subject to this article. Orders amounting to less than $100.00 net will be invoiced at $100.00 plus
transportation charges for goods covered by discount schedules. Seller's prices include the costs of standard domestic packing only. Any
deviation from this standard packing (domestic or export), including U.S. Government sealed packing, will result in extra charges. To
determine such extra charges, consult Seller's sales offices.
15. ADDITIONAL TERMS OF PAYMENT - (a) Invoice payment terms are as shown on latest discount sheets as issued from time to time.
Cash discounts are not applicable to notes or trade acceptances, to prepaid transportation charges when added to Seller's invoices or to
discountable items if there are undisputed past due items on the account. Portions of an invoice in dispute should be deducted and the
balance remitted with a detailed explanation of the deduction. Cash discounts will only be allowed on that portion of the invoice paid within
the normal discount period.
(b) Freight will be allowed to any common-carrier free-delivery point within the United States, excluding Alaska and Hawaii, on shipments
exceeding $1,000 net or more providing Seller selects the carrier. On shipments to Alaska and Hawaii, freight will be allowed to dockside at
the listed port of debarkation nearest the destination point on shipments of $1,000 net or more. Buyer shall pay all special costs such as
cartage, stevedoring and insurance. Special freight allowances are as shown on latest discount sheets as issued from time to time.
Cataloged weights are estimated, not guaranteed. Seller assumes no responsibility for tariff classifications on carriers.
16. CHANGES IN LAWS AND REGULATIONS - Seller's prices and timely performance are based on all applicable laws, rules, regulations,
orders, codes, standards or requirements of governmental authorities effective on the date of Seller's proposal. Any change to any law, rule,
regulation, order, code, standard or requirement which requires any change hereunder shall entitle Seller to an equitable adjustment in the
prices and any time of performance.

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

3-11

NOTES:

3-12

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

4

Receiving, unpacking
SIMOREG Base Drive Panels are packed at the manufacturing plant in protective containers suitable
for shipping. Avoid dropping and shocks during unloading and moving the SIMOREG during receiving.
Observe the instructions on the package for transport, storage, and correct handling.
If you discover that the Base Drive Panel has been damaged during shipment, please inform your
shipping agent immediately.

WARNING
If a SIMOREG Base Drive Panel was damaged during transport, it must not be connected up
without first being repaired and tested by a qualified repair person.
Non-observance of the safety instructions can result in death, severe personal injury or
substantial property damage.
Only qualified personnel should work on or around the equipment after first becoming
thoroughly familiar with all warning and safety notices and maintenance procedures contained
herein. The successful and safe operation of this equipment is dependent on proper handling,
installation, operation and maintenance.

Procedure for Shipping Damage
SIMOREG Base Drive Panels are normally shipped FOB factory making it the buyers responsibility to
make sure the equipment is received undamaged. Carefully examine the equipment before accepting
the shipment from the transport carrier. If you do not notify the carrier immediately of any damage you
may lose your right to file a damage claim. If required you can request support from the local Siemens
office.

•
•

When received, examine the shipment to ensure that it is complete and not damaged.

•

Immediately notify the transport company in writing of any damage or missing items

Damaged or missing items that are obviously visible should be specified in the shipping papers
and must be countersigned by personnel from the transport company.

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

4-1

NOTES:

4-2

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

5

Technical data:

5.1 15ADC to 100ADC Base Drive Panels, 3AC 460V, 1 & 4Q
V

Rated supply voltage
armature

3 Phase
460 (+10% / – 5%)

1)

A

Rated input current
armature + field

17.3

34.6

59.2

92

2)

Rated supply voltage field

V

Rated frequency

Hz 45 to 65 Hz self adapting (armature
and field are independent)

Rated DC voltage

V

3)

Rated DC armature current
Overload capability 60s

1 Phase 460 (+10%)

A

500
15

30

60

100

150% of rated DC current

7)

Rated output @ 500 VDC

Hp

7½

15

30

60

Rated output @ 240 VDC

Hp

3

7½

15

25

Power loss at rated DC current
(approximate)

W

150

200

360

510

Rated DC voltage field

V

Rated DC field current

A

Operational ambient
temperature

°C

0 to 45 at Irated
self-cooled 4)

Storage and transport
temperature

°C

– 25 to +70

300
5

10

≤ 1000 m at rated DC current

Installation altitude above sea

5)

level
∆n = 0.006% of the rated motor
speed, valid for pulse encoder
operation and digital setpoint
∆n = 0.1% of the rated motor
speed, valid for analog tachometer
or analog setpoint 6)

Control stability

Degree of protection

Open Chassis (IP00)

Dimensions

See dimension drawings in Section 6

Weights (approx.)
x) Explanation

Lbs.

35

55

60

70

at end of list of tables

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

5-1

5.2 140ADC to 850ADC Base Drive Panels, 3AC 460V, 1 & 4Q
V

Rated supply voltage
armature

3 Phase
460 (+10% / – 5%)

1)

Rated input current
armature + field

A

129.8

187.2

V

Internal 24VDC

234.1

377.6

448.2

727

2)

Fan type

1 Phase
230V

Air flow rate

ft3/min

100

570

1300

dBA

40

76

85

Fan noise level
Rated supply voltage field

V

Rated frequency

Hz 45 to 65 Hz self adapting (armature and field are
independent)

Rated DC voltage

V

3)

Rated DC armature current
Overload capability 60s

1 Phase 460 (+10%)

A

500
140

210

255

430

510

850

150% of rated DC current

7)

Rated output @ 500 VDC

Hp

75

125

150

250

300

500

Rated output @ 240 VDC

Hp

40

60

75

125

150

250

Power loss at rated DC current
(approximately)

W

740

1000

1300

1915

2180

3850

Rated DC voltage field

V

Rated DC field current

A

Operational ambient
temperature

°C

0 to 45 at Irated
fan-cooled 4)

Storage and transport
temperature

°C

– 25 to +70

300
15

25

30

≤ 1000 m at rated DC current

Installation altitude above sea

5)

level
∆n = 0.006% of the rated motor speed, valid for pulse
encoder operation and digital setpoint
∆n = 0.1% of the rated motor speed, valid for analog
tachometer or analog setpoint 6)

Control stability

Degree of protection

Open Chassis (IP00)

Dimensions
Weights (approx.)

5-2

Refer to dimension drawings in Section 6
Lbs.

90

95

145

160

210

400

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

5.3 1180ADC, 1660ADC & 1680ADC Base Drive Panels, 3AC 460V, 1 & 4Q
Rated supply voltage armature
1)

V

3 Phase
460 (+10% / – 5%)

Rated input current armature

A

Fan type

V

2)

1000

1401

1455

3 Phase
460V

ft3/min

824

dBA

88

Rated supply voltage field

V

1 Phase 460 (+10%)

Rated frequency

Hz 45 to 65 Hz self adapting (armature and field are
independent)

Air flow rate
Fan noise level

Rated DC voltage

V

2)

Rated DC armature current
Overload capability 60s

A

500
1180

1660

1680

150% of rated DC current

7)

Rated output @ 500 VDC

Hp

700

1000

1000

Rated output @ 240 VDC

Hp

350

500

500

Power loss at rated DC current
(approximately)

W

5540

7590

7280

Rated DC voltage field

V

Rated DC field current

A

Operational ambient
temperature

°C

0 to 45 at Irated
fan-cooled 4)

Storage and transport
temperature

°C

– 25 to +70

300
40

≤ 1000 m at rated DC current

Installation altitude above sea level

5)

∆n = 0.006% of the rated motor speed, valid for pulse
encoder operation and digital setpoint
∆n = 0.1% of the rated motor speed, valid for analog
tachometer or analog setpoint 6)

Control stability

Degree of protection

Open Chassis (IP00)

Dimensions
Weights (approx.)

85

Refer to dimension drawings in Section 6
Lbs.

725

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

755

760

5-3

Notes:
1) Operation with reduced input voltage will result in reduced maximum output voltage accordingly.
2) Values apply for rated DC output current on both the armature and field circuits.
3) The specified output DC voltage can be guaranteed up to an undervoltage of 5% of rated line voltage.
4) The table below gives load values, (DC current), as a function of ambient temperature surrounding the
Base Drive Panel, (refer to P077). Note, Important: When Base Drive Panels are installed into
enclosures, make sure the temperature inside does not exceed 45oC, otherwise derate the DC current
rating per the table below.
Ambient temperature

% reduction in base drive dc ampere rating
Self-cooled converters

Fan-cooled converters

(15, 30, 60, 100 ADC)

a)

(140 - 1660 ADC)

+40ºC

–0 %

–0 %

+45ºC

–0 %

–0 %

+50ºC

–6 %

–5 %

a)

+55ºC

– 11 %

–5 %

a)

+60ºC

– 18 %

–5 %

a)

Operation of fan cooled units at ambients above 50oC is not permitted
because of limitations on the allowable fan operating temperature.

5) Load values, (DC current), as a function of installation altitude (refer to P077)
b1
Percentage
load "b"

%
100
80
67%

60
40
20
0
1000

2000

3000

4000

5000 m

Installation altitude

Curve b1: Reduction factor of load values, (DC current),
at installation altitudes above 1000 m.
No derating of the supply voltages to any circuits is required
up to an installation altitude of 5000 m for basic insulation.

5-4

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

6)

Requirements to achieve control stability:
The control stability (closed-loop PI control) is referred to the rated motor speed and applies
when the SIMOREG converter is warm. The following conditions are applicable:
•
•
•
•
•

7)

Temperature changes of ±10 °C.
Line voltage changes corresponding to +10% / – 5% of the rated input voltage.
Temperature coefficient of temperature-compensated tachometer 0.15‰ per 10 °K,
(applies only to analog tachometer).
Constant setpoint (14-bit resolution).
Motor, load, and encoder are correctly aligned and the load is balanced.

Details of overload capability:
Following operation at rated load, base drive panels are capable of carrying 150% of rated load
for 1 minute, followed by a period of light load operation of such duration that the rms load does
not exceed rated continuous current. Base Drive Panels are designed for operation with
heatsink air inlet temperatures up to 45°C.

5.4

Applicable standards
UL508A
National Electrical Code 1999

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

5-5

NOTES:

5-6

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

6

Installation and Dimensions

6.1

Installation Information
SIMOREG Base Drive Panels are designed as chassis units intended to be mounted inside a protective
enclosure or inside a control room. The units are to be mounted vertically in cubicles usually with the power
connections at the top and the control connections at the bottom. A minimum 100-mm (4-inch) clearance must
be kept above and below the converter in order to ensure unrestricted cooling airflow. The minimum
enclosure size to be used is 23.6 by 23.6 by 86.6 inch high. The open chassis units are designed to operate in
a 45°C ambient. When enclosed in a cubicle the ambient temperature outside the cubicle should not exceed
40°C, which then allows for a 5°C-temperature rise inside the cubicle. Care must be taken in the selection of
the cubicle so that the internal temperature rise does not exceed 5°C. Refer to section 5 for approximate
power loss data.
Note, Important: This equipment is designed and package-protected to handle the normal shock and
vibration typically encountered in shipment. Do not install these Base Drive Panels on equipment subject
to shock or vibration. Select a reasonably clean location for installation, free from corrosive or
conductive materials or fumes.

CAUTION
Failure to lift the Base Drive Panel in the correct manner can result in bodily injury and/or
property damage.
The Base Drive Panel must be lifted using suitable equipment and under the instruction of
appropriately qualified personnel.
The user is responsible for installing the Base Drive Panel, motor, transformer as well as other
equipment according to safety regulations (e.g. NEC), as well as all other relevant national or
local regulations regarding cable sizing and protection, grounding, disconnects, overcurrent
protection, etc.
The Base Drive Panels must be installed in accordance with the relevant safety regulations
(e.g. NEC), as well as all other relevant national and local regulations. It must be ensured that
the grounding, cable sizing and appropriate short-circuit protection have been implemented to
guarantee operational safety and reliability.
Note, Important: Base Drive Panels have high-speed semiconductor fuses installed for
protection of the thyristors in the event high fault currents are encountered. These fuses are
“special purpose” fuses, and do not meet the requirements of the NEC for short-circuit
protection in motor branch circuits. It is necessary to provide other devices for short-circuit
protection. Typically molded case circuit breakers or NEC style fuses are used for this purpose.
Refer to applicable sections of the NEC for additional information.

NOTE
The fundamental principles of EMC in Section 6.1 of SIMOREG 6RA70 DC Master operating
instructions (Order # 6RX1700-0AD76) must be adhered to when installing any unit.

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

6-1

6.2

Base Drive Panel Outlines:

Dimensions are mm (inches)

TERMINALS 80 - 92
POWER TERMINALS
L1, L2, L3, A1, A2, GND

MOUNTING HOLES FOR M8,
(.312"), SCREWS, 4-PLACES

FUSE NOT
SUPPLIED ON
1-QUAD UNITS

638
(2 5 .1 )

SIEMENS

6RA70

613
(24.1)

P

(1 5 A m p )
2 6 5 (1 0 .4 )
(3 0 A m p )
3 3 9 ( 1 3 .4 )

9
(0 .4 )

15
(0 .6 )

X300

2 3 8 (9 .4 )
2 6 8 (1 0 .6 )

NOTE, IMPORTANT: ALLOW AT LEAST 100 MILLIMETERS, (4"), OF CLEARANCE ABOVE AND BELOW THE UNIT
TO ENSURE UNRESTRICTED AIR FLOW. ADDITIONAL CLEARANCE MAY BE REQUIRED TO ALLOW FOR WIRE
OR CABLE ENTRY/EXIT AND BENDING. REFER TO APPLICABLE CODES FOR FURTHER INFORMATION.

15 - 30 AMP BASE DRIVE PANELS, (1 & 4Q)

6-2

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

Dimensions are mm (inches)

TERMINALS 80 - 92
POWER TERMINALS
L1, L2, L3, A1, A2, GND

MOUNTING HOLES FOR M8,
(.312"), SCREWS, 4-PLACES

FUSE NOT
SUPPLIED ON
1-QUAD UNITS

734
(2 8 .9 )

709
(27.9)

SIEMENS

P

3 3 9 (1 3 .4 )

9
(0 .4 )

15
(0 .6 )

6RA70

X300

238 (9.4)
2 6 8 (1 0 .6 )

NOTE, IMPORTANT: ALLOW AT LEAST 100 MILLIMETERS, (4"), OF CLEARANCE ABOVE AND BELOW THE UNIT
TO ENSURE UNRESTRICTED AIR FLOW. ADDITIONAL CLEARANCE MAY BE REQUIRED TO ALLOW FOR WIRE
OR CABLE ENTRY/EXIT AND BENDING. REFER TO APPLICABLE CODES FOR FURTHER INFORMATION.

60 AMP BASE DRIVE PANEL, (1 & 4Q)

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

6-3

Dimensions are mm (inches)

TERMINALS 80 - 92

POWER TERMINALS

MOUNTING HOLES FOR M8,
(.312"), SCREWS, 4-PLACES

L1, L2 , L3, A1, A2, GND

FUSE NOT
SUPPLIED
ON 1-QUAD
UNITS

831
(32.7)
806
(31.7)

SIEMENS

P

3 3 9 (1 3 .4 )

15
(0 .6 )

6RA70

X300

2 3 8 (9 .4 )
2 6 8 (1 0 .6 )

NOTE, IMPORTANT: ALLOW AT LEAST 100 MILLIMETERS, (4"), OF CLEARANCE ABOVE AND BELOW THE UNIT
TO ENSURE UNRESTRICTED AIR FLOW. ADDITIONAL CLEARANCE MAY BE REQUIRED TO ALLOW FOR WIRE
OR CABLE ENTRY/EXIT AND BENDING. REFER TO APPLICABLE CODES FOR FURTHER INFORMATION.

100 AMP BASE DRIVE PANEL, (1 & 4Q)

6-4

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

Dimensions are mm (inches)

MOUNTING HOLES FOR M8,
(.312"), SCREWS, 4-PLACES
GROUND
TERMINAL

L1

L2

L3

TERMINALS 80 - 92

A1

A2

FUSE NOT
SUPPLIED
ON 1-QUAD
UNITS

980
(38.6)

960
(37.8)

SIEMENS

P

326(12.8)

10
(0.4)

12
(0.45)

6RA70

X300

266(10.5)
290(11.4)

NOTE, IMPORTANT: ALLOW AT LEAST 100 MILLIMETERS, (4"), OF CLEARANCE ABOVE AND BELOW THE UNIT
TO ENSURE UNRESTRICTED AIR FLOW. ADDITIONAL CLEARANCE MAY BE REQUIRED TO ALLOW FOR WIRE
OR CABLE ENTRY/EXIT AND BENDING. REFER TO APPLICABLE CODES FOR FURTHER INFORMATION.

140 AMP BASE DRIVE PANEL, (1 & 4Q)

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

6-5

Dimensions are mm (inches)

MOUNTING HOLES FOR M8,
(.312"), SCREWS, 4-PLACES
TERMINALS 80 - 92

GROUND
TERMINAL

L1

L2

L3

A1

A2

FUSE NOT
SUPPLIED ON
1-QUAD UNITS

1120
(44.1)

1100
(43.3)
SIEMENS

P

326(12.8)

10
(0.4)

12
(0.45)

6RA70

X300

266 (10.5)
290 (11.4)

NOTE, IMPORTANT: ALLOW AT LEAST 100 MILLIMETERS, (4"), OF CLEARANCE ABOVE AND BELOW THE UNIT
TO ENSURE UNRESTRICTED AIR FLOW. ADDITIONAL CLEARANCE MAY BE REQUIRED TO ALLOW FOR WIRE
OR CABLE ENTRY/EXIT AND BENDING. REFER TO APPLICABLE CODES FOR FURTHER INFORMATION.

210 AMP BASE DRIVE PANEL, (1 & 4Q)

6-6

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

Dimensions are mm (inches)

MOUNTING HOLES FOR M8,
(.312"), SCREWS, 4-PLACES
GROUND
TERMINAL

L1

L2

TERMINALS 80 - 92

A1

L3

A2

FUSE NOT
SUPPLIED ON
1-QUAD UNITS

SIEMENS

6RA70

1180
(46.5)

1160
(45.7)

331 (13.0)

10
(0.4)

12
(0.45)

266 (10.5)
290 (11.4)

NOTE, IMPORTANT: ALLOW AT LEAST 100 MILLIMETERS, (4"), OF CLEARANCE ABOVE AND BELOW THE UNIT
TO ENSURE UNRESTRICTED AIR FLOW. ADDITIONAL CLEARANCE MAY BE REQUIRED TO ALLOW FOR WIRE
OR CABLE ENTRY/EXIT AND BENDING. REFER TO APPLICABLE CODES FOR FURTHER INFORMATION.

255 AMP BASE DRIVE PANEL, (1 & 4Q)

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

6-7

Dimensions are mm (inches)

MOUNTING HOLES FOR M10,
(.375"), SCREWS, 6-PLACES
L1

L2

L3

A1

GROUND TERMINAL

A2

FUSE NOT SUPPLIED
ON 1-QUAD UNITS
TERMINALS 80 - 94

280
(11.0)

ADDITIONAL CLEARANCE
REQ'D FROM CONTACTOR
ARC CHUTE TO ANY
GROUNDED METAL

35
(1.4)

SIEMENS

6RA70

1200
(47.2)

880
(34.6)
P

20
(0.8)

15
(0.6)

X300

334 (13.1)

520 (20.5)
550 (21.6)

348 (13.7)

430 AMP BASE DRIVE PANEL, (1 & 4Q)

6-8

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

Dimensions are mm (inches)

MOUNTING HOLES FOR M10,
(.375"), SCREWS, 6-PLACES
L2

L1

L3

A1

GROUND TERMINAL

A2

FUSE NOT SUPPLIED
ON 1-QUAD UNITS
280
(11.0)

TERMINALS 80 - 94

ADDITIONAL CLEARANCE
REQ'D FROM CONTACTOR
ARC CHUTE TO ANY
GROUNDED METAL

35
(1.4)

1200
(47.2)

SIEMENS 6RA70

880
(34.6)

P

20
(0.8)

15
(0.6)

X300

520 (20.5)
550 (21.6)

348 (13.7)
376 (14.8)

NOTE, IMPORTANT: ALLOW AT LEAST 100 MILLIMETERS, (4"), OF CLEARANCE ABOVE AND BELOW THE UNIT
TO ENSURE UNRESTRICTED AIR FLOW. ADDITIONAL CLEARANCE MAY BE REQUIRED TO ALLOW FOR WIRE
OR CABLE ENTRY/EXIT AND BENDING. REFER TO APPLICABLE CODES FOR FURTHER INFORMATION.

510 AMP BASE DRIVE PANEL, (1 & 4Q)

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

6-9

Dimensions are mm (inches)

MOUNTING HOLES FOR M10,
(.375"), SCREWS, 6-PLACES

A1

A2

L1

GROUND
TERMINAL

L3

L2

TERMINALS
80 - 94

740
(29.1)

SIEMENS

6RA70

1524
(60.0)
P

X300

NOTE:
SEMICONDUCTOR
FUSES ARE
LOCATED INSIDE
THE 6RA70
POWER MODULE

740
(29.1)

CABLE CONNECTIONS
TO POWER MODULE
THIS AREA

425 (16.7)

22
(0.9)

22
(0.9)

768 (30.2)
813 (32.0)

850 AMP BASE DRIVE PANEL, (1 & 4Q)

6-10

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

Dimensions are mm (inches)
MOUNTING SLOTS, FOR M12
(0.50"), SCREWS, 6-PLACES

L1

L2

GROUND
TERMINAL

L3

TERMINALS
80 - 102

CTB
L1-1

L2-1

80

81

82 83

84

85 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100101102

80

81

82 83

84

85 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100101102

L3-1

1

2FSFU

7CFU
6CFU
5CFU
4CFU

1

1FSFU

965
(38.0)

1

1

RATE D
600V,3 0A
N O T OP E N

U N D E R L OA D

N OT O P E N

U N D E R L OA D

2

1

RATE D
600V,30A

T M

D O

2
2

1

RATE D
600V,3 0A

TM

DO

RATE D
600V,30A

TM

D O

N OT O P E N

U N D E R L OA D

2

TM

DO

N OT OP E N

U NDE RL O A D

2

2

1CTR

PM

H1 H3 H2 H4

1CF U
L1

2.5 A, 60 0V

2CF U

L2

2.5 A, 60 0V

3CFU
1.5A, 250V

X2

XF X1

NOTE:
2CTR
P

H1

X300

H3

H2

H4

SEMICONDUCTOR FUSES
ARE LOCATED INSIDE THE
POWER MODULE, (PM).

1981
(78.0)
X2

X1

3CTR
H1

1C1

1D1

H3

H2

X2

MREC

X1

EN

MSPAUX

MSP

965
(38.0)

H4

M

A2

A1

25
(1.0)

767 (30.2)

23 (0.9)

813 (32.0)

NOTE: FROM THE BACK OF THE MOUNTING PANELTO THE TOP
OF THE POWER MODULE, (TALLEST COMPONENT) = 629 (24.8")

1180 AMP BASE DRIVE PANEL, (1 & 4Q)

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

6-11

Dimensions are mm (inches)

MOUNTING SLOTS, FOR M12
(0.50"), SCREWS, 6-PLACES

L1

GROUND
TERMINAL

L3

L2

TERMINALS
80 - 102
L1-1

L2-1

80

81

82 83

84

85

90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100101102

80

81

82 83

84

85

90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100101102

L3-1

1

2FSFU

7CFU
6CFU
5CFU
4CFU

1

1FSFU

965
(38.0)

1

1

RATE D
600V, 30
A

TM

2
2

1

RATE D
600V, 30
A

T M

RATE D
600V, 30
A

1
TM

RATE D
600V, 30
A

T M

DO NOTOPE NUNDER LOAD DO NOTOPE NUNDER LOAD DO NOTOPE NUNDER LOAD DO NOTOPE NUNDER LOAD

2

2

2

2

1CTR

PM

H1 H3 H2 H4

1C FU
2. 5A, 6 00V

L1

2C FU

L2

2. 5A, 6 00V

3CFU
1.5A , 250 V

X2

XF X1

NOTE:
2CTR
P

X300

H1

H3

H2

H4

SEMICONDUCTOR FUSES
ARE LOCATED INSIDE THE
POWER MODULE, (PM).

1981
(78.0)
X2

X1

3CTR
H1

1C1

1D1

H3

H2

X2

MREC

EN

M1

M2

A1

25
(1.0)

X1

MSPAUX

MSP

965
(38.0)

H4

A2

767 (30.2)

23 (0.9)

813 (32.0)

NOTE: FROM THE BACK OF THE MOUNTING PANELTO THE TOP
OF THE POWER MODULE, (TALLEST COMPONENT) = 629 (24.8")

6-12

1660 AMP BASE DRIVE PANEL, (1 & 4Q)
Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

Dimensions are mm (inches)

MOUNTING SLOTS, FOR M12
(0.50"), SCREWS, 6-PLACES

L1

GROUND
TERMINAL

L3

L2

TERMINALS
80 - 102
L1-1

L2-1

L3-1

81

82 83

84

85

80

81

82 83

84

85

90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101102

90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100101102

1

2FSFU

7CFU
6CFU
5CFU
4CFU

1

1FSFU

965
(38.0)

80

1

1

RATE D
600V, 30
A

TM

2
2

1

RATE D
600V, 30
A

TM

RATE D
600V, 30
A

1
TM

RATE D
600V, 30
A

TM

DO NOTOPEN UNDER LOAD DO NOTOPEN UNDER LOAD DO NOTOPEN UNDER LOAD DO NOTOPEN UNDER LOAD

2

2

2

2

1CTR

PM

H1 H3 H2 H4

1C FU
2. 5A , 6 00V

L1

2C FU

L2

2. 5A , 6 00V

3CFU
1.5A, 250 V

X2

NOTE:

XF X1

SEMICONDUCTOR FUSES
ARE LOCATED INSIDE THE
POWER MODULE, (PM).

2CTR
P

X300

H1

H3

H2

H4

1981
(78.0)
X2

X1

3CTR
H1

1C1

1D1

H3

H2

X2

MREC

EN

M1

M2

A2

A1

25
(1.0)

X1

MSPAUX

MSP

965
(38.0)

H4

767 (30.2)

23 (0.9)

813 (32.0)

NOTE: FROM THE BACK OF THE MOUNTING PANELTO THE TOP
OF THE POWER MODULE, (TALLEST COMPONENT) = 629 (24.8")

1680 AMP BASE DRIVE PANEL, (1 & 4Q)

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

6-13

NOTES:

6-14

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

7 Base Drive Panel Connections
WARNING
Base Drive Panels are operated at high voltages.
Disconnect the power supply before making any connections!
Only qualified personnel who are thoroughly familiar with all safety notices contained in the
operating instructions as well as erection, installation, operating and maintenance instructions
should be allowed to work on these devices.
Non-observance of the safety instructions can result in death, severe personal injury or
substantial property damage.
Failure to make the correct connections may result in irreparable damage to the unit.
Voltage may be present at the power and control terminals even when the motor is stopped.
The snubber capacitors may still carry a hazardous voltage for up to 2 minutes after
disconnection. For this reason, wait for at least 2 minutes before opening the converter.
When working on the open converter, remember that live parts are exposed. The unit must
always be operated with the standard front covers in place.
The user is responsible for ensuring that the motor, SIMOREG Base Drive Panel and other
devices are installed and connected up in accordance with the approved codes of practice of
the country concerned and any other regional or local codes that may apply. Special attention
must be paid to proper conductor sizing, fusing, grounding, isolation and disconnection
measures and to overcurrent protection.
These units contain hazardous rotating machinery (fans) and control rotating mechanical
components (motors). Death, serious bodily injury or substantial property damage may occur if
the instructions in the relevant operating manuals are not observed.
The successful and safe operation of this equipment is dependent on careful transportation,
proper storage and installation as well as correct operation and maintenance.

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

7-1

7.1

Base Drive Panel Schematics
460 VAC
MAIN DISCONNECT AND
BRANCH CIRCUIT
PROTECTION SIZED
PER N.E.C.
CUSTOMER SUPPLIED
IF APPLICABLE
#4 AWG,60 C
TORQUE TO
11 INCH- LBS
L3

2PFU

3PFU

1CFU
H1

3CFU
0.75A,250V
A1-FUF-DKA-GBF

L2

L2

1CTR
H2

3CFU

XF

H3

2CFU

L1
1CFU - 2CFU
1.25A,600V
A1-FUF-AFA-006

L1

1PFU

BASE DRIVE PANEL, 15 AMPS, 1 & 4 QUAD

H4

CONTROL
TRANSFORMER

115VA
A1-TRC-Q0C-285

25A,700V
A1-FUF-END-C25

230 V
X2

CTB

88

86
J3

J2
89

87

M
1SP

XP

XR

XR

5U1 5W1
PWR
SUPPLY

109

110

XP

85

J4

K1

82

J1
84

83

M

MAIN
CONTACTOR
3RT1016-1AP61
SUPPRESSOR
3RT1916-1BD00
XP

XF1-2

5N1
PWR
SUPPLY

XF1-1

3U1 3W1
FIELD
SUPPLY

1U1 1V1 1W1
ARMATURE
SUPPLY

POWER MODULE

CATALOG NO. 6RA7018-6FS22-0Z+X01, (1-QUAD)
CATALOG NO. 6RA7018-6FV62-0Z+X01, (4-QUAD)
XS

E-STOP
105

3C

XS

3D

4Q UNITS
ONLY
25A,700V
A1-FUF-END-C25

MAUX
F(+)
90

1C1

80

91

#10 AWG, 60 C
TORQUE TO
5 INCH- LBS

1D1

XF2-1

XF2-2

4PFU

106

F(-)

81

A1

A2

#4 AWG,60 C
TORQUE TO
11 INCH- LBS
MOTOR = 500 VOLTS DC
F.L.A. = 15 AMPS DC

7-2

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

460 VAC
MAIN DISCONNECT AND
BRANCH CIRCUIT
PROTECTION SIZED
PER N.E.C.
CUSTOMER SUPPLIED
IF APPLICABLE
#4 AWG,60 C
TORQUE TO
11 INCH- LBS
L3

2PFU

3PFU

1CFU

1CTR
H1

3CFU
0.75A,250V
A1-FUF-DKA-GBF

L2

L2

H2

3CFU

XF

H3

2CFU

L1
1CFU - 2CFU
1.25A,600V
A1-FUF-AFA-006

L1

1PFU

BASE DRIVE PANEL, 30 AMPS, 1 & 4 QUAD

H4

CONTROL
TRANSFORMER

115VA
A1-TRC-Q0C-285

50A,700V
A1-FUF-END-CDN

230 V
X2

CTB

88

86
J3

J2
89

87

M
1SP

XP

XR

XR

5U1 5W1
PWR
SUPPLY

109

110

XP

85

J4

K1

82

J1
84

83

M

MAIN
CONTACTOR
3RT1025-1AP60
SUPPRESSOR
3RT1926-1BD00
XP

XF1-2

5N1
PWR
SUPPLY

XF1-1

3U1 3W1
FIELD
SUPPLY

1U1 1V1 1W1
ARMATURE
SUPPLY

POWER MODULE

CATALOG NO. 6RA7025-6FS22-0Z+X01, (1-QUAD)
CATALOG NO. 6RA7025-6FV62-0Z+X01, (4-QUAD)
XS

E-STOP
105

3C

XS

3D

1C1

1D1

XF2-1

XF2-2

4Q UNITS
ONLY
50A,700V
A1-FUF-END-CDN

4PFU

106

MAUX
F(+)
90

80

91

#10 AWG, 60 C
TORQUE TO
5 INCH- LBS

F(-)

81

A1

A2

#4 AWG,60 C
TORQUE TO
11 INCH- LBS
MOTOR = 500 VOLTS DC
F.L.A. = 30 AMPS DC

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

7-3

460 VAC
MAIN DISCONNECT AND
BRANCH CIRCUIT
PROTECTION SIZED
PER N.E.C.
CUSTOMER SUPPLIED
IF APPLICABLE
#1 AWG,60 C
TORQUE TO
27 INCH- LBS
L3

2PFU

3PFU

1CFU

1CTR
H1

3CFU
0.75A,250V
A1-FUF-DKA-GBF

L2

L2

H2

3CFU

XF

H3

2CFU

L1
1CFU - 2CFU
1.25A,600V
A1-FUF-AFA-006

L1

1PFU

BASE DRIVE PANEL, 60 AMPS, 1 & 4 QUAD

H4

CONTROL
TRANSFORMER

115VA
A1-TRC-Q0C-285

70A,500V
A1-FUF-00D-014

230 V
X2

CTB

88
J2

M
1SP

XP

XR

XR

5U1 5W1
PWR
SUPPLY

109

110
K1

82

J1
84

MAIN
CONTACTOR
3RT1035-1AP60
SUPPRESSOR
3RT1926-1BD00
XP

1FSFU

89

87

XP

85

J4

20A,700V
A1-FUF-END-C20

XF1-2

5N1
PWR
SUPPLY

M

83

2FSFU

86
J3

XF1-1

3U1 3W1
FIELD
SUPPLY

1U1 1V1 1W1
ARMATURE
SUPPLY

POWER MODULE

CATALOG NO. 6RA7028-6FS22-0Z+X01, (1-QUAD)
CATALOG NO. 6RA7028-6FV62-0Z+X01, (4-QUAD)
XS

E-STOP
105

3C

XS

3D

1C1

1D1

XF2-1

XF2-2

4Q UNITS
ONLY
90A,700V
A1-FUF-00E-016

4PFU

106

MAUX
F(+)
90

80

91

#10 AWG, 60 C
TORQUE TO
5 INCH- LBS

F(-)

81

A1

A2

#1 AWG,60 C
TORQUE TO
27 INCH- LBS
MOTOR = 500 VOLTS DC
F.L.A. = 60 AMPS DC

7-4

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

460 VAC
MAIN DISCONNECT AND
BRANCH CIRCUIT
PROTECTION SIZED
PER N.E.C.
CUSTOMER SUPPLIED
IF APPLICABLE
#1 AWG,60 C
TORQUE TO
27 INCH- LBS

BASE DRIVE PANEL, 100 AMPS, 1 & 4 QUAD
L1

3CFU

XF

H4

115VA
A1-TRC-Q0C-285

3PFU

H3

2PFU

H2

CONTROL
TRANSFORMER

1PFU

1CFU

1CTR
H1

3CFU
0.75A,250V
A1-FUF-DKA-GBF

L3

L2
2CFU

L1
1CFU - 2CFU
1.25A,600V
A1-FUF-AFA-006

L2

125A,500V
A1-FUF-00D-018

230 V
X2

CTB

88
J2

M
1SP

XP

XR

XR

5U1 5W1
PWR
SUPPLY

109

110
K1

82

J1
84

MAIN
CONTACTOR
3RT1044-1AP60
SUPPRESSOR
3RT1926-1BD00
XP

1FSFU

89

87

XP

85

J4

20A,700V
A1-FUF-END-C20

XF1-2

5N1
PWR
SUPPLY

M

83

2FSFU

86
J3

XF1-1

3U1 3W1
FIELD
SUPPLY

1U1 1V1 1W1
ARMATURE
SUPPLY

POWER MODULE

CATALOG NO. 6RA7031-6FS22-0Z+X01, (1-QUAD)
CATALOG NO. 6RA7031-6FV62-0Z+X01, (4-QUAD)
XS

E-STOP
105

3C

XS

3D

1C1

1D1

XF2-1

XF2-2

4Q UNITS
ONLY
150A,700V
A1-FUF-00E-019

4PFU

106

MAUX
F(+)
90

80

91

#10 AWG, 60 C
TORQUE TO
5 INCH- LBS

F(-)

81

A1

A2

#1 AWG,60 C
TORQUE TO
27 INCH- LBS
MOTOR = 500 VOLTS DC
F.L.A. = 100 AMPS DC

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

7-5

460 VAC
MAIN DISCONNECT AND
BRANCH CIRCUIT
PROTECTION SIZED
PER N.E.C.
CUSTOMER SUPPLIED
IF APPLICABLE
2 - #250 MCM,75 C
TORQUE TO
275 INCH- LBS
L3

2PFU

3PFU

1CFU

1CTR
H1

3CFU
1.5A,250V
A1-FUF-DKA-GBP

L2

L2

H2

3CFU

XF

H3

2CFU

L1
1CFU - 2CFU
2.5A,600V
A1-FUF-AFA-011

L1

1PFU

BASE DRIVE PANEL, 140 AMPS, 1 & 4 QUAD

H4

CONTROL
TRANSFORMER

250VA
A1-TRC-Q0C-286

150A,500V
A1-FUF-00D-019

230 V
X2

CTB

88
J2

XP

XR

XR

5U1 5W1
PWR
SUPPLY

109

110
K1

82

J1
84

M

MAIN
CONTACTOR
3RT1045-1AP60

1SP

SUPPRESSOR
3RT1926-1BD00
XP

1FSFU

89

87

XP

85

J4

20A,700V
A1-FUF-END-C20

XF1-2

5N1
PWR
SUPPLY

M

83

2FSFU

86
J3

XF1-1

3U1 3W1
FIELD
SUPPLY

1U1 1V1 1W1
ARMATURE
SUPPLY

POWER MODULE

CATALOG NO. 6RA7075-6FS22-0Z+X01, (1-QUAD)
CATALOG NO. 6RA7075-6FV62-0Z+X01, (4-QUAD)
XS

E-STOP
105

3C

XS

3D

1C1

1D1

XF2-1

XF2-2

4Q UNITS
ONLY
175A,700V
A1-FUF-00E-020

4PFU

106

MAUX
F(+)
90

80

91

#10 AWG, 60 C
TORQUE TO
5 INCH- LBS

F(-)

81

A1

A2

2 - #250 MCM, 75 C
TORQUE TO
275 INCH- LBS
MOTOR = 500 VOLTS DC
F.L.A. = 140 AMPS DC

7-6

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

460 VAC
MAIN DISCONNECT AND
BRANCH CIRCUIT
PROTECTION SIZED
PER N.E.C.
CUSTOMER SUPPLIED
IF APPLICABLE
2 - #250 MCM,75 C
TORQUE TO
275 INCH- LBS

BASE DRIVE PANEL, 210 AMPS, 1 & 4 QUAD
L1

3CFU

XF

H4

CONTROL
TRANSFORMER

250VA
A1-TRC-Q0C-286

3PFU

H3

2PFU

H2

1PFU

1CFU

1CTR
H1

3CFU
1.5A,250V
A1-FUF-DKA-GBP

L3

L2
2CFU

L1
1CFU - 2CFU
2.5A,600V
A1-FUF-AFA-011

L2

200A,500V
A1-FUF-00D-021

230 V
X2

CTB

88
J2
89

M
1SP

XP

XR

XR

5U1 5W1
PWR
SUPPLY

109

110
K1

82

J1
84

MAIN
CONTACTOR
3TF5222-0AP6
SUPPRESSOR
3TX7462-3J

1FSFU

87

XP

85

J4

XP

20A,700V
A1-FUF-END-C20

XF1-2

5N1
PWR
SUPPLY

M

83

2FSFU

86
J3

XF1-1

3U1 3W1
FIELD
SUPPLY

1U1 1V1 1W1
ARMATURE
SUPPLY

POWER MODULE

CATALOG NO. 6RA7078-6FS22-0Z+X01, (1-QUAD)
CATALOG NO. 6RA7078-6FV62-0Z+X01, (4-QUAD)
XS

E-STOP
105

3C

XS

3D

4Q UNITS
ONLY
250A,700V
A1-FUF-00E-023

MAUX
F(+)
90

1C1

80

91

#10 AWG, 60 C
TORQUE TO
5 INCH- LBS

1D1

XF2-1

XF2-2

4PFU

106

F(-)

81

A1

A2

2 - #250 MCM, 75 C
TORQUE TO
275 INCH- LBS
MOTOR = 500 VOLTS DC
F.L.A. = 210 AMPS DC

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

7-7

460 VAC
MAIN DISCONNECT AND
BRANCH CIRCUIT
PROTECTION SIZED
PER N.E.C.
CUSTOMER SUPPLIED
IF APPLICABLE
2 - #250 MCM,75 C
TORQUE TO
275 INCH- LBS

BASE DRIVE PANEL, 255 AMPS, 1 & 4 QUAD
L1

3CFU

XF

H4

CONTROL
TRANSFORMER
350VA
A1-TRC-Q0C-287

3PFU

H3

2PFU

H2

1PFU

1CFU
H1

3CFU
2A,250V
A1-FUF-DKA-GBV

L3

L2

1CTR

2CFU

L1
1CFU - 2CFU
3.5A,600V
A1-FUF-AFA-014

L2

250A,500V
A1-FUF-00D-023

230 V
X2

CTB

88
J2

M
1SP

XP

XR

XR

5U1 5W1
PWR
SUPPLY

109

110
K1

82

J1
84

MAIN
CONTACTOR
3TF5322-0AP6
SUPPRESSOR
3TX7462-3J
XP

1FSFU

89

87

XP

85

J4

40A,700V
A1-FUF-END-C40

XF1-2

5N1
PWR
SUPPLY

M

83

2FSFU

86
J3

XF1-1

3U1 3W1
FIELD
SUPPLY

1U1 1V1 1W1
ARMATURE
SUPPLY

POWER MODULE

CATALOG NO. 6RA7082-6FS22-0Z+X01, (1-QUAD)
CATALOG NO. 6RA7082-6FV62-0Z+X01, (4-QUAD)
XS

E-STOP
105

3C

XS

3D

1C1

1D1

XF2-1

XF2-2

4Q UNITS
ONLY
300A,700V
A1-FUF-00E-025

4PFU

106

MAUX
F(+)
90

80

91

#10 AWG, 60 C
TORQUE TO
5 INCH- LBS

F(-)

81

A1

A2

2 - #250 MCM, 75 C
TORQUE TO
275 INCH- LBS
MOTOR = 500 VOLTS DC
F.L.A. = 255 AMPS DC

7-8

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

460 VAC
MAIN DISCONNECT AND
BRANCH CIRCUIT
PROTECTION SIZED
PER N.E.C.
CUSTOMER SUPPLIED
IF APPLICABLE
2 - #250 MCM,75 C
TORQUE TO
275 INCH- LBS

BASE DRIVE PANEL, 430 AMPS, 1 & 4 QUAD
L1

XF

400A,500V
A1-FUF-00D-028

3PFU

230 V

2PFU

3CFU

H3 H4

CONTROL
TRANSFORMER
350VA
A1-TRC-Q0C-287
1PFU

1CFU

H1 H2

3CFU
2A,250V
A1-FUF-DKA-GBV

L3

L2
1CTR

2CFU

L1
1CFU-2CFU
3.5A,600V
A1-FUF-AFA-014

L2

X2
CTB

J4

84

89

EN
M AUX

ENSP
MREC
M

XP

XR

XR

5U1 5W1
PWR
SUPPLY

109

110

83

XF1-2
4U1 4N1
FAN
SUPPLY

5N1
PWR
SUPPLY

K1

40A,700V
A1-FUF-END-C40

XF1-1

3U1 3W1
FIELD
SUPPLY

1U1 1V1 1W1
ARMATURE
SUPPLY

POWER MODULE
CATALOG NO. 6RA7085-6FS22-0Z+X01, (1-QUAD)
CATALOG NO. 6RA7085-6FV62-0Z+X01, (4-QUAD)

ENABLE
38

106

X171

EN

ENABLE RELAY
3RH1122-1AP60
SUPPRESSOR
3RT1916-1BD00
RECT. BR
A1-116-002-001
DC CONTACTOR
A1-CRD-CAC-010
XP

1FSFU

87

82

J1

J2

2FSFU

J3

XP

85

88

86

XS
94

E-STOP
105
XS

3C

3D

1C1

1D1

XF2-1

XF2-2

93

M

J5
4PFU

CTB
EN
F(+)
90

80

91

#8 AWG, 60 C
TORQUE TO
7 INCH- LBS

4Q UNITS
ONLY
500A,700V
A1-FUF-00E-030

F(-)
81

A1

A2

2 - #500 MCM, 75 C
TORQUE TO
375 INCH- LBS
MOTOR = 500 VOLTS DC
F.L.A. = 430 AMPS DC

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

7-9

460 VAC
MAIN DISCONNECT AND
BRANCH CIRCUIT
PROTECTION SIZED
PER N.E.C.
CUSTOMER SUPPLIED
IF APPLICABLE
2 - #500 MCM,75 C
TORQUE TO
375 INCH- LBS
L3

2PFU

3PFU

1CFU

1CTR
H1 H2

3CFU
2A,250V
A1-FUF-DKA-GBV

L2

L2

3CFU

2CFU

L1
1CFU-2CFU
3.5A,600V
A1-FUF-AFA-014

L1

1PFU

BASE DRIVE PANEL, 510 AMPS, 1 & 4 QUAD

H3 H4

CONTROL
TRANSFORMER
350VA
A1-TRC-Q0C-287

230 V

XF

500A,500V
A1-FUF-00D-030

X2
CTB

ENSP
MREC
M

XP

XR

XR

5U1 5W1
PWR
SUPPLY

109

110

XF1-2

4U1 4N1
FAN
SUPPLY

5N1
PWR
SUPPLY

K1

40A,700V
A1-FUF-END-C40

XF1-1

3U1 3W1
FIELD
SUPPLY

1U1 1V1 1W1
ARMATURE
SUPPLY

POWER MODULE
CATALOG NO. 6RA7087-6FS22-0Z+X01, (1-QUAD)
CATALOG NO. 6RA7087-6FV62-0Z+X01, (4-QUAD)

ENABLE
38

106

X171

EN

ENABLE RELAY
3RH1122-1AP60
SUPPRESSOR
3RT1916-1BD00
RECT. BR
A1-116-002-001
DC CONTACTOR
A1-CRD-CAC-010
XP

1FSFU

EN

83

2FSFU

84

89

M AUX

82

J1

J2

J4
87

XP

85

88

86
J3

XS
94

E-STOP
105
XS

3C

3D

1C1

1D1

XF2-1

XF2-2

93

M

J5
4PFU

CTB
EN
F(+)
90

80

91

#8 AWG, 60 C
TORQUE TO
7 INCH- LBS

4Q UNITS
ONLY
600A,700V
A1-FUF-00E-031

F(-)
81

A1

A2

2 - #500 MCM, 75 C
TORQUE TO
375 INCH- LBS
MOTOR = 500 VOLTS DC
F.L.A. = 510 AMPS DC

7-10

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

460 VAC
MAIN DISCONNECT AND
BRANCH CIRCUIT
PROTECTION SIZED
PER N.E.C.
CUSTOMER SUPPLIED
IF APPLICABLE
3 - #500 MCM,75 C
TORQUE TO
375 INCH- LBS

BASE DRIVE PANEL, 850 AMPS, 1 & 4 QUAD
L1

1CFU

1CTR
H1 H2

3CFU
6.25A,250V
A1-FUF-DKA-GCM

L3

L2

3CFU

2CFU

L1
1CFU-2CFU
3.5A,600V
A1-FUF-AFA-014

L2

H3 H4

CONTROL
TRANSFORMER
1000VA
A1-TRC-Q0C-288

230 V

XF

X2
CTB

ENSP
MREC
M

XP

XR

XR

5U1 5W1
PWR
SUPPLY

109

110

XF1-2

40A,700V
A1-FUF-END-C40

XF1-1

3U1 3W1
FIELD
SUPPLY

4U1 4N1
FAN
SUPPLY

5N1
PWR
SUPPLY

K1

1U1 1V1 1W1
ARMATURE
SUPPLY

POWER MODULE
CATALOG NO. 6RA7091-6FS22-0Z+X01, (1-QUAD)
CATALOG NO. 6RA7091-6FV62-0Z+X01, (4-QUAD)

ENABLE
38

106

X171

EN

ENABLE RELAY
3RH1122-1AP60
SUPPRESSOR
3RT1916-1BD00
RECT. BR
A1-116-002-001
DC CONTACTOR
A1-CRD-CAC-010
XP

1FSFU

EN

83

2FSFU

84

89

M AUX

82

J1

J2

J4
87

XP

85

88

86
J3

XS
94

E-STOP
105
XS

3C

3D

1C1

1D1

XF2-1

XF2-2

93

M

J5
CTB
EN
F(+)
90

80

91

#8 AWG, 60 C
TORQUE TO
7 INCH- LBS

F(-)
81

A1

A2

3 - #500 MCM, 75 C
TORQUE TO
375 INCH- LBS
MOTOR = 500 VOLTS DC
F.L.A. = 850 AMPS DC

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

7-11

460 VAC

CUSTOMER SUPPLIED
IF APPLICABLE
4 - #500 MCM,75 C
TORQUE TO
375 INCH- LBS

1CFU

1CTR

CTB

H1

250VA
A1-TRC-Q0C-286

H2

MREC

M
XR

XR

109
5U1 5W1
PWR SUPPLY

110

RECT.BR
A1-116-002-001
DC CONTACTOR
A1-CRD-CAC-010
XP

2FSFU

ENSP

1FSFU

EN

MSP

L1

106

X171

XS
94

E-STOP
105
XS

H4

750VA
A1-TRC-Q0C-289

X1

L2

X2

L3
1.1-1.6A
SET@1.50A

T1
XF1-2

T2

MSP
3RV1011-1AA10

T3

XF1-1

CATALOG NO. 6RA7093-4GS22-0Z+X01, (1-QUAD)
CATALOG NO. 6RA7093-4GV62-0Z+X01, (4-QUAD)
ENABLE
38

H3

460 V
X2

50A,700V
A1-FUF-END-C50

3U1 3W1
FIELD SUPPLY

5N1
PWR SUPPLY

H2

460 V

83

POWER MODULE

K1

EN

H1

H4

5A,600V
A1-FUF-AFA-016

3CTR

82

X1
ENABLE RELAY
3RH1122-1AP60
SUPPRESSOR
3RT1916-1BD00

101

J1

J2

84

XP

H3

2CTR

85
CTB

J8
100

CONTROL
TRANSFORMERS

230 V
X2

XP

CTB

99

3CFU

XF

M AUX

J7
98

4CFU

97

7CFU

J6
96

CONTROL
TRANSFORMER

H1 H2 H3 H4

3CFU
1.5A,250V
A1-FUF-DKA-GBP

L3

L2
2CFU

L1
1CFU-2CFU
2.5A,600V
A1-FUF-AFA-011

L2

5CFU

L1

6CFU

BASE DRIVE PANEL, 1180 AMPS, 1 & 4 QUAD

3C

3D

XF2-2

1U1 1V1 1W1
SEMICONDUCTOR
FUSES ARE INTERNAL
TO POWER MODULE

4U1

4V1
FAN
SUPPLY

4W1

Note:
FAN MUST ROTATE COUNTER-CLOCKWISE
WHEN VIEWED FROM ABOVE

ARMATURE
SUPPLY
1C1
1D1

XF2-1

93
J5

M

CTB

EN

F(-)

F(+)

90

80

91

#4 AWG, 60 C
TORQUE TO
11 INCH- LBS

81

A1

A2

4 - #500 MCM, 75 C
TORQUE TO
375 INCH- LBS
MOTOR = 500 VOLTS DC
F.L.A. = 1180 AMPS DC

7-12

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

460 VAC

CUSTOMER SUPPLIED
IF APPLICABLE
6 - #500 MCM,75 C
TORQUE TO
375 INCH- LBS

1CFU

1CTR

H1 H2 H3 H4

3CFU
1.5A,250V
A1-FUF-DKA-GBP

CTB

M1

84

H2

RECT.BR
A1-116-002-001
DC CONTACTOR
A1-CRD-CAC-010

H3

XR

XR
110

XP

XF1-2

XS
94

L2

XS

X2

L3
1.1-1.6A
SET@1.50A

T2

MSP
3RV1011-1AA10

T3

XF1-1

3U1 3W1
FIELD SUPPLY

E-STOP
106
105

X171

3CTR
L1

CATALOG NO. 6RA7095-4GS22-0Z+X01, (1-QUAD)
CATALOG NO. 6RA7095-4GV62-0Z+X01, (4-QUAD)
ENABLE
38

H4

750VA
A1-TRC-Q0C-289

X1

50A,700V
A1-FUF-END-C50

POWER MODULE

K1

H3

5A,600V
A1-FUF-AFA-016

460 V
X2

T1

5N1
PWR SUPPLY

H2

460 V

83

M2

109
5U1 5W1
PWR SUPPLY

101

H1

H4

2CTR

82

X1

2FSFU

ENSP

J8
100

7CFU

CTB

99

J1

J2

ENABLE RELAY
3RH1122-1AP60
SUPPRESSOR
3RT1916-1BD00
1FSFU

MSP

EN

J7
98

CONTROL
TRANSFORMERS
85

MREC

XP

CTB

H1

250VA
A1-TRC-Q0C-286

230 V

EN

XP

97

4CFU

CONTROL
TRANSFORMER

X2

M2

J6
96

3CFU

XF

M1

L3

L2
2CFU

L1
1CFU-2CFU
2.5A,600V
A1-FUF-AFA-011

L2

5CFU

L1

6CFU

BASE DRIVE PANEL, 1660 AMPS, 1 & 4 QUAD

3C

1U1 1V1 1W1
SEMICONDUCTOR
FUSES ARE INTERNAL
TO POWER MODULE

3D

XF2-2

4U1

4V1
FAN
SUPPLY

4W1

Note:
FAN MUST ROTATE COUNTER-CLOCKWISE
WHEN VIEWED FROM ABOVE

ARMATURE
SUPPLY
1C1
1D1

XF2-1

93
J5

M1

CTB

EN

F(-)

F(+)

90

80

91

M2

A1

81

A2

6 - #500 MCM, 75 C
TORQUE TO
375 INCH- LBS

#4 AWG, 60 C
TORQUE TO
11 INCH- LBS

MOTOR = 500 VOLTS DC
F.L.A. = 1660 AMPS DC

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

7-13

460 VAC

CUSTOMER SUPPLIED
IF APPLICABLE
6 - #500 MCM,75 C
TORQUE TO
375 INCH- LBS

1CFU

1CTR

H1 H2 H3 H4

3CFU
1.5A,250V
A1-FUF-DKA-GBP

CTB

M1

84

H2

RECT.BR
A1-116-002-001
DC CONTACTOR
A1-CRD-CAC-010

H3

XR

XR
110

XP

XF1-2

XS
94

L2

XS

X2

L3
1.1-1.6A
SET@1.50A

T2

MSP
3RV1011-1AA10

T3

XF1-1

3U1 3W1
FIELD SUPPLY

E-STOP
106
105

X171

3CTR
L1

CATALOG NO. 6RA7096-4GS22-0Z+X01, (1-QUAD)
CATALOG NO. 6RA7096-4GV62-0Z+X01, (4-QUAD)
ENABLE
38

H4

750VA
A1-TRC-Q0C-289

X1

125A,600V
A1-FUF-HHA-024

POWER MODULE

K1

H3

5A,600V
A1-FUF-AFA-016

460 V
X2

T1

5N1
PWR SUPPLY

H2

460 V

83

M2

109
5U1 5W1
PWR SUPPLY

101

H1

H4

2CTR

82

X1

2FSFU

ENSP

J8
100

7CFU

CTB

99

J1

J2

ENABLE RELAY
3RH1122-1AP60
SUPPRESSOR
3RT1916-1BD00
1FSFU

MSP

EN

J7
98

CONTROL
TRANSFORMERS
85

MREC

XP

CTB

H1

250VA
A1-TRC-Q0C-286

230 V

EN

XP

97

4CFU

CONTROL
TRANSFORMER

X2

M2

J6
96

3CFU

XF

M1

L3

L2
2CFU

L1
1CFU-2CFU
2.5A,600V
A1-FUF-AFA-011

L2

5CFU

L1

6CFU

BASE DRIVE PANEL, 1680 AMPS, 1 & 4 QUAD

3C

3D

XF2-2

1U1 1V1 1W1
SEMICONDUCTOR
FUSES ARE INTERNAL
TO POWER MODULE

4U1

4V1
FAN
SUPPLY

4W1

Note:
FAN MUST ROTATE COUNTER-CLOCKWISE
WHEN VIEWED FROM ABOVE

ARMATURE
SUPPLY
1C1
1D1

XF2-1

93
J5

M1

CTB

EN

F(-)

F(+)

90

80

91

#1 AWG, 60 C
TORQUE TO
22 INCH- LBS

M2

81

A1

A2

6 - #500 MCM, 75 C
TORQUE TO
375 INCH- LBS
MOTOR = 500 VOLTS DC
F.L.A. = 1680 AMPS DC

7-14

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

NOTES:

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

7-15

7.2

Control Connections CUD1

TYPICAL CONTROL CONNECTIONS
Also see Start-up 8.4.1 and 8.4.2
INPUTS
34
35
36

START

37
38
39

OUTPUTS

CUD 1

X171 BINARY INPUTS
+24VDC SUPPLY 100mA
COMMON

M

SERIAL INTERFACE #2 RS485 X172

SELECT INPUT BINARY 1

TX+ RS485

POWER ON / SHUTDOWN

TX- RS485

ENABLE OPERATION

RX+/TX+ RS485

SELECT INPUT BINARY 2

RS485

RX-/TX- RS485

8.5ma @ 24 V
M

GND

BA

X173 PULSE ENCODER INPUTS
26
27

A
A
B
B
ZERO MARKER
(OPTIONAL)

28
29
30
31
32
33

CW

59

+

M

M

POSITIVE

BINARY OUTPUTS X171

NEGATIVE

SELECT OUTPUT 1

POSITIVE
NEGATIVE

47

SELECT OUTPUT 2

CPU

POSITIVE

RELAY 2

48

OUTPUT TYPICAL
24 VDC, 100 ma MAX

NEGATIVE

RELAY 1

46

54

M

X174 REFERENCE, ANALOG INPUTS, MOTOR TEMP

GND

1

COMMON

M

2

P10

3

N10

4
5
6
7
22

ANALOG OUTPUTS X175
(10V = 200% converter amps) Iact

RESOULTION ADJUSTABLE
+/- 11 BITS TO +/- 14 BITS

A

MAIN SETPOINT +
MAIN SETPOINT -

D

515 K ohms

MOTOR TEMP +

23

MOTOR TEMP -

24

COMMON

M

OPTIONAL
COMMUNICATIONS AND
TECHNOLOGY BOARDS

X110

X111

OPTIONAL CUD2
TERMINAL EXPANSION

12

M

ANALOG 2
Analog Outputs:
RESOULTION +/- 11 BITS
O to +/- 10 Volts, 2mA MAX

V

15
16

M

V

13
14

M

A

ANALOG 1 +
ANALOG 1 -

ANALOG 1

D

150 K ohms

X107

7-16

58

60

BA

+24VDC
SPEED
POT
10K

57

M

+15VDC SUPPLY 200mA
COMMON

56

17

OPERATOR
PANEL
X300

OPTIONAL
OP1S
OPERATOR

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

V

Terminal Locations CUD1

34
35
36
37
38
39
46
47
48
54

X171

56
57
58
59
60

X172

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33

X173

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
22
23
24

X174

12
13
14
15
16
17

X175

X107

X109

C98043-A7001-L1

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

7-17

7.3

Control Connections CUD2
OPTIONAL CUD2 CONTROL CONNECTIONS
OUTPUTS

CUD 2

INPUTS

X165

RX+/TX+
RX-/TX-

X161BINARY INPUTS
RX+/TX+
210

211
212
213
214

+24VDC SUPPLY 100mA

RX-/TX-

SELECT INPUT BINARY

RX+/TX+

SELECT INPUT BINARY

RX-/TX-

PARALLEL
CONVERTER
INTERFACE

X166

SELECT INPUT BINARY
RX+/TX+

SELECT INPUT BINARY

RX-/TX-

RETURN

215
216

OPTICALLY
ISOLATED

M

217

SERIAL INTERFACE #3 RS485 X162
TX+ RS485

8.5ma @ 24 V

TX- RS485
RX+/TX+ RS485

RS485

RX-/TX- RS485

BA

X163 BINARY INPUTS
44

40
41
42
43

62
63
64
65

BA
M

+24VDC SUPPLY 100mA
+

M

45

61

M

SELECT INPUT BINARY 3
SELECT INPUT BINARY 4

BINARY OUTPUTS X163

SELECT INPUT BINARY 5

SELECT OUTPUT 3

RELAY 3

50

SELECT INPUT BINARY 6

51

8.5ma @ 24 V

SELECT OUTPUT 4
OUTPUT TYPICAL
24 VDC, 100 ma MAX

+24VDC

RELAY 4

52

M

53

M

ANALOG OUTPUTS X164
X164 ANALOG INPUTS

RESOULTION +/- 10 BITS

A
ANALOG 2 +

8
9

11

205

M

MOTOR TEMP +

D

52 K ohms
M

18

M

A

ANALOG 3 +

10

204

D
52 K ohms
M

M

ANALOG 3

V

19

ANALOG 4
20
Analog Outputs:
RESOULTION +/- 11 BITS
O to +/- 10 Volts, 2mA MAX

M

V

21

MOTOR TEMP -

X110

X111

CONNECTION TO CUD1

7-18

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

Terminal Locations CUD2

210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217 X161

61
62
63
64
65

X162

44
45
40
41
42
43
50
51
52
53

X163

8
9
10
11
18
19
20
21
204
205 X164

C98043-A7006

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

7-19

7.4

Description of Power/Control Terminals
WARNING
The Base Drive Panel might sustain serious or irreparable damage if connected incorrectly.
The power cables and/or busbars must be secured mechanically outside the converter in order
to provide proper stress relief at the terminals.

Base Drive Panels are complete drive assemblies that include all semiconductor type fuses, main contactor, and
a control transformer, ready to be connected and operated. All external connections to Base Drive Panels,
including power connections are made with compression type terminals on the drive.
The user is responsible for installation of the motor, SIMOREG Base Drive Panel, transformer, and other devices
in accordance with the National Electric Code and other applicable local codes that cover such items as wire
size, protective grounding, disconnects, and short circuit protection. Depending on the rating, base drives can
accommodate a range of cable sizes as indicated below.

Base Drive Panel Power Connections 15 to 100 Amp
RATING
15 AMP

CABLE RANGE

RECOMMENDED TORQUE

#12 to #4 AWG

1.2 Nm

(11 IN-LBS)

#12 to #4 AWG

1.2 Nm

(11 IN-LBS)

#10 to #1 AWG

3 Nm

(27 IN-LBS)

#10 to #1 AWG

3 Nm

(27 IN-LBS)

L1, L2, L3, A1, A2, GND

30 AMP
L1, L2, L3, A1, A2, GND

60 AMP
L1, L2, L3, A1, A2, GND

100 AMP
L1, L2, L3, A1, A2, GND

Base Drive Panel Power Connections 140 to 255 Amp
RATING

CABLE RANGE

140 AMP

2 CABLES PER CONNECTION

L1, L2, L3, A1, A2

#6 AWG to 250 MCM

210 AMP

2 CABLES PER CONNECTION

L1, L2, L3, A1, A2

#6 AWG to 250 MCM

255AMP

2 CABLES PER CONNECTION

L1, L2, L3, A1, A2

#6 AWG to 250 MCM

Ground Terminal

#8 to #2 AWG

RECOMMENDED TORQUE
31 Nm

(275 IN-LBS)

31 Nm

(275 IN-LBS)

31 Nm

(275 IN-LBS)

5 Nm

(45 IN-LBS)

140, 210, 255 Amp

7-20

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

Base Drive Panel Power Connections 430 to 1680 Amp
RATING

CABLE RANGE

RECOMMENDED TORQUE

430AMP

2 CABLES PER CONNECTION

L1, L2, L3 ----------------

#6 AWG to 250 MCM (L1, L2, L3) -----------

31 Nm

(275 IN-LBS)

A1, A2 ---------------------

#6 AWG to 500 MCM (A1, A2) ----------------

43 Nm

(375 IN-LBS)

510 AMP

2 CABLES PER CONNECTION

43 Nm

(375 IN-LBS)

L1, L2, L3, A1, A2

#6 AWG to 500 MCM

850 AMP

3 CABLES PER CONNECTION

43 Nm

(375 IN-LBS)

L1, L2, L3, A1, A2

#1/0 AWG to 500 MCM

1180 AMP

4 CABLES PER CONNECTION

43 Nm

(375 IN-LBS)

L1, L2, L3, A1, A2

#1/0 AWG to 500 MCM

1660 / 1680 AMP

6 CABLES PER CONNECTION

43 Nm

(375 IN-LBS)

L1, L2, L3, A1, A2

#1/0 AWG to 500 MCM

Ground Terminal
430 TO 850 Amp

#2 to #4/0 AWG ----------------------------------

17 Nm

(150 IN-LBS)

1180/1660/1680 Amp

#1/0 to 350 MCM --------------------------------

31 Nm

(275 IN-LBS)

Base Drive Panel Control Connections, (CTB), 15 TO 1680 Amp
RATING

WIRE RANGE

RECOMMENDED TORQUE

15 TO 255 Amp
#18 to #10 AWG

0.55 Nm

(5 IN-LBS)

CTB-80…….CTB-85

#14 to #8 AWG ---------------------------------

0.8 Nm

(7 IN-LBS)

CTB-86…….CTB-95

#18 to #10 AWG ---------------------------------

0.55 Nm

(5 IN-LBS)

CTB-80…….CTB-85

#12 to #4 AWG ---------------------------------

1.3 Nm

(11 IN-LBS)

CTB-86…….CTB-95

#18 to #10 AWG ---------------------------------

0.55 Nm

(5 IN-LBS)

CTB-80…….CTB-85

#10 to #1 AWG ---------------------------------

2.5 Nm

(22 IN-LBS)

CTB-86…….CTB-95

#18 to #10 AWG ---------------------------------

0.55 Nm

(5 IN-LBS)

CTB-80…….CTB-92
430 TO 850 Amp

1180 & 1660 Amp

1680 Amp

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

7-21

Motor Armature circuit
Function

Terminal

Connection values/Remarks

L1
L2
L3

Armature supply AC input

See technical data, section 5 for
actual maximum current values.

Ground PE conductor
Armature circuit motor
connection

A1
A2

Possible
settings
P078

P100
P101

Motor Field circuit
Function
AC Supply connection
Motor Field connection

Terminal
CTB
CTB
CTB
CTB

Connection values/Remarks

83
Single Phase 460 VAC
84
See section 5 for current rating
80 + Rated DC voltage 300V

Possible
settings
P076
P078
P102

81 -

Electronics power supply, main contactor, fans (if used) 15 to 850 amp
Function
Incoming AC supply 230V
(supplied by internal
control transformer)

Terminal
CTB
CTB

87
89

Connection values/Remarks

Possible
settings

Single Phase, 230 VAC, (hot)
(ground side)

Current Requirement for Terminals 87, 89 if supplied from a separate source
15 amp to 100 amp base drive panels: 0.55 amps
140 and 210 amp base drive panels:

1.2 amps

255 to 510 amp base drive panels:

1.6 amps

850 amp base drive panel:

4.6 amps

7-22

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

Electronics power supply, main contactor, and fans 1180 to 1680 amps
Function
Incoming AC supply
460 VAC, 3 Phase

Terminal
CTB
CTB
CTB

Connection values/Remarks

Possible
settings

97 Internally connected to incoming
99 460V supply
101

Current Requirement for Terminals if supplied from a separate source
1180, 1660 and 1680 amp base drives:

2.5 amps at 460 VAC 3 phase

Note: Phase sequence is important for the fan direction of rotation. The fan must rotate counterclockwise when viewed from above. If necessary, swap the L1 and L2 phase wiring at
incoming supply to change the fan direction of rotation.

Remote relay Enable terminals: 430 amp to 1680 amp base drive panels
Function
External enable (if used)

Terminal
CTB
CTB

93
94

Connection values/Remarks

Possible
settings

If a remote enable function is required
using a relay contact, then remove jumper
J5 and install a normally open low voltage
contact at terminals 93 – 94.

The 430 amp to 1680 amp Base Drive Panels use a DC contactor that is interlocked through the enable function
at regulator terminals 34 and 38. This circuit is brought out to CBT terminals 93 and 94 to allow an easy point to
add an external enable contact if required. A remote enable contact can be wired directly to terminals 34 and 38
of the regulator for Base Drive Panels rated 15 to 255 amps.

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

7-23

NOTES:

7-24

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

8 Start-Up
8.1

General safety information for start-up

NOTE
Before handling any boards (in particular, the A7001 electronics board), please make sure that your body
is electrostatically discharged to protect electronic components against high voltages caused by
electrostatic charges. The simplest way of doing this is to touch a conductive, grounded object (e.g. bare
metal cabinet component immediately beforehand).
PCBs must not be allowed to come into contact with highly insulating materials (e.g. plastic foil, insulating
tabletops or clothing made of synthetic fibers).
PCBs may only be set down on electrically conducting surfaces.

WARNING
Hazardous voltages and rotating parts (fans) are present in this electrical equipment during
operation. Non-observance of the safety instructions can result in death, severe personal injury
or substantial property damage.
Hazardous voltage may be present at the signaling relays in the customer’s installation.
The units must not be connected to an AC supply with an earth-leakage ground detector since,
in the event of a fault to ground, the fault current may contain a DC component that may either
prevent or hinder a higher-level ground fault detector from tripping. In this case, all loads
connected to this ground fault detector will not be protected.
Only qualified personnel who are thoroughly familiar with all safety notices contained in the
operating instructions as well as erection, installation, operating and maintenance instructions
should be allowed to work on these devices.
The successful and safe operation of this equipment is dependent on careful transportation,
proper storage and installation as well as correct operation and maintenance.
The unit is at a hazardous voltage level even when the line contactor is open. The gating board
(board mounted directly to lower part of housing) has many circuits at hazardous voltage
levels. Before carrying out any maintenance or repair work, all Base Drive Panel power
sources must be disconnected and locked out.
These instructions do not claim to list all of the measures required to ensure the safe and
reliable operation of the converter. For special applications, additional, supplementary
information or instructions might be required. If problems do occur and you feel in any way
uncertain, please contact your local Siemens office or representative.
The use of unauthorized parts in the repair of this unit and handling of the equipment by
unqualified personnel can give rise to hazardous conditions which may cause death, severe
personal injury or substantial property damage. All safety notices contained in this instruction
manual and attached to the converter itself must be carefully observed.
Please read the safety information given in Section 1 of this instruction manual.

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

8-1

8.2

Operator control panels
The basic converter is equipped with a simple operator panel (PMU) as standard. A user-friendly panel with
plain text display (OP1S) can be connected as an option.

8.2.1

Simple operator control panel (PMU “Parameterization Unit“)
The simple operator control panel is mounted in the converter door and consists of a 5-digit, 7-segment
display with three status display LED’s and three parameterization keys.
All adjustments, settings and measurements that need to be undertaken for the purpose of start-up can be
made on the simple control panel.

Run Ready Fault

X300

• P key
− Switches over between parameter number (parameter mode), parameter value (value mode)
and index number (index mode) on indexed parameters.
− Acknowledges active fault messages.
− P and RAISE keys to switch a fault message and alarm to the background to get access to the
parameter mode.
− P and LOWER key to switch a fault message and alarm from the background back to the
foreground display on the PMU.
• UP key ()
− Selects a higher parameter number in parameter mode. When the highest parameter number is
displayed, the key can be pressed again to roll over to the lowest parameter number.
− Increases the displayed parameter value in value mode.
− Increases the index number in index mode (for indexed parameters)
− If the DOWN key is pressed, then, also pressing the UP key will accelerate the DOWN adjustment
process.
• DOWN key ()
− Selects a lower parameter number in parameter mode. When the lowest parameter number is
displayed, the key can be pressed again to roll over to the highest parameter number.
− Decreases the displayed parameter value in value mode.
− Decreases the index number in index mode (for indexed parameters)
− If the UP key is pressed, then, also pressing the DOWN key will accelerate the UP adjustment
process.

8-2

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

LED displays
Run green LED
LED illuminated ⇒

in “Torque direction active” state (MI, MII, M0).
(See parameter r000)

Ready yellow LED
LED illuminated ⇒

in “Ready” state (o1 .. o7).
(See parameter r000)

Fault red LED
LED illuminated ⇒

in “Fault signal present” state (o11)
(See parameter r000)

LED flashing

8.2.2

⇒

An alarm is active (see Faults and Alarms).

User-friendly operator control panel (OP1S)
The optional, user-friendly, operator control panel with plain text display (order no.: 6SE7090-0XX84-2FK0)
can be mounted in the special location provided in the converter door or remotely mounted on the enclosure
door. The OP1S connects to the basic converter interface SST1 at sub D connector X300.
Parameters can be selected directly through input of the parameter number by the keyboard of the OP1S.
The following interrelationships apply:

Basic converter
parameter
Technology board
parameter

Displayed
number

Number to be keyed in
on OP1S

rxxx, Pxxx

(0)xxx

Uxxx, nxxx

2xxx

Hxxx, dxxx

1xxx

Lxxx, cxxx

3xxx

For more information on the operation of the OP1S, refer to the power module operating instructions and the
instructions that were provided with the OP1S.

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

8-3

8.3

Parameterization procedure
Parameterization is the process of changing or setting parameter values, activating converter functions, or
displaying measured values with the operator panel.
Parameters for the basic converter are called P, r, U or n parameters.
Parameters for an optional supplementary board are called H, d, L or c parameters.
The basic unit parameters are displayed first on the PMU, followed by the technology board parameters (if
such a board is installed). It is important not to confuse the parameters of the S00 technology software of
the basic unit with the parameters of an optional supplementary board (T400).
Depending on how parameter P052 is set, only some parameter numbers are displayed.

8.3.1

Parameter types
Display parameters (r, n, d, and c), are used to display current quantities such as the main setpoint,
armature voltage, feedback signals, outputs of controller, etc. The values of display parameters are readonly values and cannot be changed.
Setting parameters (P, U, H, L), are used to both display and change parameter quantities such as the
rated motor current, thermal motor time constant, speed controller P gain, etc.
Indexed parameters (P, U, H, L), are used to both display and change several parameter values which are
all assigned to the same parameter number but identified by the index number.

8.3.2

Parameterization on simple operator control panel
After the electronics supply voltage has been switched on, the PMU is either in the operational display state
and indicating the current operating status of the SIMOREG 6RA70 (e.g. o7.0), or in the fault/alarm display
state and indicating a fault or alarm (e.g. F021).
Drive operational states are described by parameter r000 whereas fault and alarm messages are described
in the power module operating instructions in Section 10.
1. To enter the parameter number level from the operational display state (e.g. o7.0), press the P key and
then the  or  key to select individual parameter numbers.
2. To enter the parameter index levels (for indexed parameters) from the parameter number level, press P
again and then the  or  key to select individual indices. If you press P when a non-indexed
parameter is displayed, you go directly to the parameter value level.
3. To reach the parameter value level from the parameter index level (for indexed parameters), press P
again and the parameter value will be displayed.
4. On the parameter value level, you can change the setting of a parameter value by pressing the  or
 key.

CAUTION!
Parameters can be altered only if the following conditions are fulfilled:
− The key code is set with P051 = 40.
− The converter is in the correct operational state. Some parameters are “off-line” and cannot be changed
when the converter is in the “Run” or on-line state.
− The values of display parameters can not be changed (read only).

8-4

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

5. Manual shifting
If the 5 existing digits on the 7-segment display are not sufficient to display a parameter value, the display
first shows just 5 digits (see Fig. 8.1). To indicate that more digits are concealed to the right or left of this
“window”, the right-hand or left-hand digit flashes. By pressing the 
+ or 
+ key, you
can shift the window over the remaining digits of the parameter value. As an orientation guide, the position
of the right-hand digit within the overall parameter value is displayed briefly during manual shifting.
Example: Parameter value “208.173“
"208.17" is displayed when the parameter is selected. When the
P and LOWER keys are pressed, "1" appears briefly followed by
“08.173“, i.e. the right-hand digit 3 is the 1st position in the
parameter value.
When the P and RAISE keys are pressed, "2" appears briefly
followed by “208.17“, i.e. the right-hand digit 7 is the 2nd position
in the parameter value.
Fig. 8.1

P

+

P
+

Shifting the PMU display for parameter values with more than 4 digits

6. Press the P key to return to the parameter number level from the parameter value level.

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

8-5

8.4

Typical Connection Diagrams

8.4.1 Configured with Analog Speed Setpoint and
Start/Stop Control by Contacts
460 VOLT
3 PHASE, 50 / 60 HZ.

L1

X174
SPEED
SETPOINT
(10K)

CW

2

P10

4

REF+

5

REF-

1

COM

L3

PMU

X171
34

P24

37

RUN

38

ENABLE

39

SELECT INPUT

36

SELECT INPUT

START

E-STOP

L2

Run Ready Fault

X300

XS
106

ES/P24

105

E-STOP WHEN DE-ENERGIZED
X174

26
P15

27
COM

28
A

29
A

30
B

31

A1(+)

A2(-)

80(+)

81(-)

B

MOTOR
FIELD
ENCODER

8-6

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

8.4.2 Configured with Analog Speed Setpoint and
Push-Button Start/Stop Control
460 VOLT
3 PHASE, 50 / 60 HZ.

X174
SPEED
SETPOINT
(10K)

CW

L1

2

P10

4

REF+

5

REF-

1

COM

X171

L2

L3

PMU

34

P24

37

RUN P445 = 1
(PUSH-BUTTON CONTROL)

38

ENABLE

39

SELECT INPUT

36

SELECT INPUT

START
Run Ready Fault

X300

STOP

E-STOP

P444 = 16
(OFF 1 WHEN DE-ENERGIZED)

XS
106

ES/P24

105

E-STOP WHEN DE-ENERGIZED
X174

26
P15

27
COM

28
A

29
A

30
B

31

A1(+)

A2(-)

80(+)

81(-)

B

MOTOR
FIELD
ENCODER

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

8-7

8.5

Reset to factory default values and adjust offsets
In order to start from a predefined set of parameter values, it is highly recommended that the “Restore to
default” function be executed before a complete new start-up operation is begun.

NOTE
When the “Restore to default” function is activated, all parameters set for a specific installation
are overwritten (deleted). If the old settings are to be retained they should be recorded before
the default procedure is executed. The old settings can be read out and stored in a file using a
PC and either the Quick Start or DriveMonitor PC program.
“Restore to default” must be followed by a completely new start-up operation since none of the
application related parameters are set.
Execution of the default function:
1. Set parameter P051 = 21
2. When the “P” key is pressed the parameter values are reset to the factory value.
The parameter values are stored in non-volatile storage (EEPROM) so that they will still be available
when the converter is switched off. This operation takes at least 5 s (but may also last several minutes).
The number of the parameter currently being processed is displayed on the PMU during the process.
The electronics power supply must remain powered up while this operation is in progress.
3. Field offset adjustments
Parameter P825.ii is automatically set (takes approx. 10 s) to provide proper calibration of the field
converter rated current. The offset adjustment can also be activated as an individual function by means
of parameter P051 = 22.

8-8

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

8.6

Start-up procedure
WARNING
The Base Drive Panel is at a hazardous voltage level even when the line contactor is open.
The gating board (board mounted directly to lower part of housing) has many circuits at
hazardous voltage levels.
Non-observance of the safety instructions given in this manual can result in death, severe
personal injury or substantial property damage.

The following steps summarize the start-up procedure.
Always begin by defaulting the parameters back to the factory value as outlined in paragraph 8.5
Step

Procedure

1

Set P051 = 40 to gain access to change parameters

2

Set P067 = 5 for US rating. This parameter setting is mandatory on Base Drive
Panels.

3

Set the actual operating AC supply voltage for the armature and field converters (P078)

4

Input motor data (P100, P101, P102, P114)

5

Select speed feedback method (P083) [analog tach, encoder, EMF voltage, custom]

6

Select field control and weakening (P081, P082)

7

Set current limits and ramp generator time (P171, P172, P303, P304, P305, P306)

8

Perform self tuning (P051 = 25, 26, 27, 28)

9

Set application specific parameters

10

Documentation of final parameter values

The following details explain how to do each of the above steps.

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

8-9

1

Access authorization
P051 . . . Key parameter
0 Parameter cannot be changed
40 Parameter can be changed
P052 . . . Selection of parameters to be displayed
0 Only parameters that are not set to default are visible
3 All parameters are visible

2

Adjustment of converter rated currents
Base Drive Panels are designed to continuously operate at the converter US rated current and then provide
150% overload current for 60 seconds. In order to meet this requirement it is mandatory that P067 be set to a
value of 5. The IEC Class 1 rating provides a higher continuous current but has no overload capability. The
fuses, contactor, power terminals, and power wiring used on base drives have been selected based on the US
rating. Failure to set P067 on Base Drive Panels to the US rating may cause damage to Base Drive Panel
components and void warranty.
Set parameter P067 = 5 “U.S. Rating“.
Set parameter P075 = 1 to allow dynamic overload capability.

3

Adjustment to actual converter supply voltage
P078.001 . . . Supply voltage for armature circuit (in volts)
P078.002 . . . Supply voltage for field circuit (in volts)

4

Input of motor data
The motor data as given on the motor rating plate must be entered in parameters P100, P101, P102 and P114.
P100 . . . Rated armature current (in amps)
P101 . . . Rated armature voltage (in volts)
P102 . . . Rated field current (in amps)
P114 . . . Thermal time constant of motor (in minutes). If not known use the default 10-minute value.

5

Actual speed sensing data
5.1

8-10

Operation with analog tachometer
P083 = 1:

The actual speed is supplied from the “Main actual value” channel (K0013)
(terminals XT.103, XT.104)

P741

Tachometer voltage at maximum speed (– 270,00V to +270,00V)

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

5.2

Operation with pulse encoder
P083 = 2:
P140

The actual speed is supplied by the pulse encoder (K0040)

Selecting a pulse encoder type (pulse encoder types see below)
0 No encoder/"Speed sensing with pulse encoder" function not selected
1 Pulse encoder type 1
(Normal selection)
2 Pulse encoder type 1a
(Special encoder)
3 Pulse encoder type 2
(Special encoder)
4 Pulse encoder type 3
(Special encoder)
1. Pulse encoder type 1
Encoder with two pulse tracks mutually displaced by 90° (with or without zero marker)
Track 1
X173 28, 29
Track 2
X173 30, 31
Zero marker
X173 32, 33

Heidenhain ROD
Teldix Rotaswitch Serie 26

P141

Number of pulses of pulse encoder (in pulses/revolution)

P142

Matching to pulse encoder signal voltage
0 Pulse encoder outputs 5 V signals (requires separate 5V encoder supply voltage)
1 Pulse encoder outputs 15V signals (uses internal 15V encoder supply voltage)
CAUTION
Resetting parameter P142 to the alternative 5V setting does not switch over the supply
voltage for the pulse encoder (terminals X173.26 and 27).
Terminal X173.26 always supplies +15V. An external voltage supply must be provided for
pulse encoders requiring a 5V supply.

P143

5.3

5.4

Setting the maximum operating speed for pulse encoder operation (in revolutions/minute).
The speed set in this parameter corresponds to an actual speed (K0040) of 100%.

Operation without tachometer (EMF control)
P083 = 3:

The actual speed is supplied from the “Actual EMF” channel (K0287),
but scaled with P115.

P115

EMF at maximum speed (Note: EMF = Terminal voltage – IxR)
1.00% to 140.00% of rated converter supply voltage at r071.

Freely wired actual value
P083 = 4:

The actual value input is defined with P609.

P609

Number of connector to which actual speed controller value is connected.

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

8-11

6

Field data
6.1

6.2

7

Field control
P082 = 0:

Internal field is not used and field functions are not used.
(e.g. with permanent-field motors)

P082 = 1:

The field is switched together with the line contactor
(field pulses are enabled/disabled when line contactor closes/opens)

P082 = 2:

Automatic connection of standstill field set by P257 after a delay parameterized by P258,
after operating status o7 or higher has been reached

P082 = 3:

Field current permanently connected

Field weakening
P081 = 0:

No field weakening as a function of speed or EMF

P081 = 1:

Field weakening operation as a function of internal EMF control so that, in the field
weakening range, i.e. at speeds above motor base speed, the motor EMF is maintained
constant. Note: Rated EMF = Rated Terminal voltage – IratedxRarmature
EMFsetpoint (K289) = P101 – P100 * P110.

Selection of basic technological functions
7.1

Current limits
P171

Motor current limit in torque direction I (in % of P100, default value = 100%)
US setting P171 = 150%

P172

Motor current limit in torque direction II (in % of P100, default value = -100%)
US setting P172 = -150%

7.2

8-12

Ramp-function generator
P303

Acceleration time 1 (in seconds, default value = 10)

P304

Deceleration time 1 (in seconds, default value = 10)

P305

Initial rounding 1 (in seconds, default value = 0)

P306

Final rounding 1 (in seconds, default value = 0)

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

8

Execution of optimization runs
8.1

The unit must be in operating state o7.0 or o7.1 (enter SHUTDOWN!).

8.2

Select one of the following optimization runs in key parameter P051:
P051 = 25

Optimization run for precontrol and current controller for armature and field

P051 = 26

Speed controller optimization run

P051 = 27

Optimization run for field weakening

P051 = 28

Optimization run for compensation of friction moment and moment of inertia

Note: The optimization runs should be performed in the above order.

8.3

The SIMOREG converter switches to operating state o7.4 for several seconds and then to o7.0 or o7.1
and waits for the START command and ENABLE.
Enter the commands START and ENABLE.
The flashing of the decimal point in the operational status display on the PMU (simple operator control
panel) indicates that an optimization run will be performed after the Start command.
If the start command is not given within 30 s, this waiting status is terminated and fault message F052
displayed.

8.4

As soon as the converter reaches operating status 0)

6

The "Main contactor checkback" (control word 2 bit 31) [see also P691] did not switch to "1" before the time set in P095 ran
out, or switched back to "0" during operation [V1.8 and later].

Fault in the field circuit
(active in operating states of ≤ o5)
The line voltage RMS value calculated from the area of each network half-wave (rectification average value * peak factor) must
be greater than the response value for phase failure monitoring

P078.002 ∗

P353
100%

The distance between two identical network zero passages of the voltage for the field converter must not exceed 450 degrees.
The actual field current K0265 equals < 50% of the required field current setpoint K0268 for more than 500ms. This monitoring
function is effective only if the field current setpoint corresponds to >2% of the converter rated field current.
[In SW 1.9 and later, the percentage (50%) and time (500ms) can be altered in P396 and P397 respectively]
If one of the fault conditions described persists in operation (or ≤ o4) for longer than the “restart” time set in P086, the fault
message is output.
After the converter is switched on, it waits in operating state o5 for a period not exceeding the setting in P089 for the field supply
voltage or sufficiently high field current before this fault message is activated.
Monitoring for timeout as the field decays or builds up after initiation of field reversal (fault values 6 and 7) is not implemented
until SW 1.7 and later.
Possible fault causes
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦

Threshold for phase failure (P353) set incorrectly
Field phase failed
Line contactor opened during operation
Fuse blown in the field circuit
Field current controller and/or field current precontrol not optimized or badly optimized (check P112, P253 to P256; possibly
execute current controller optimization)
Check P396 (field current monitoring threshold) and P397 (field current monitoring time)
If the fault value is 6: Offset fault in the actual field current value sensing, relevant parameter: P825.i01-i03 (Offset depends
on P076.i02) or P394, P395 (Threshold and hysteresis for message I_field < I_field_min) must be checked
If the fault value is 7: Circuit for the "new" field direction is interrupted (e.g. because the contactor for "new" field direction
does not pick up), P398, P399 (Threshold and hysteresis for message I_field < I_field_x) must be checked

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

9-3

Fault

Description

No.

Cause as a function of fault value
(r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error)

Further information (r047.002 to r047.016)

Fault value:
1

F006

Voltage failure occurred in the field supply (terminals 3U1 and 3W1) (if P086 = 0)

2

Delay time according to P089 elapsed in state o5.1 (waiting for voltage at the field power section)

3

Delay time according to P089 elapsed in state o5.0
(waiting until Ifield act (K0265) is > 50% of the instantaneous field current setpoint K0268)
[threshold settable in P396 as of SW 1.9]

4

After P086 > 0 has elapsed (time for automatic restart) in operating state ≤ o4:
Voltage failure in the field supply or Ifield act (K0265) < 50% Ifield set (K0268) for longer than 500 ms
[settable via P396 and P397 as of SW 1.9]

5

When P086 = 0 (no automatic restart) in operating state ≤ o4:
Ifield act (K0265) < 50% Ifield set (K0268) for longer than 500 ms
[settable via P396 and P397 as of SW 1.9]

6

If field reduction before field reversal, I_field ≤ I_field_min (P394) is not reached within 30 s

7
If field build-up after field reversal, I_field > I_field_x (P398) is not reached within 30 s
Undervoltage
(active in operating states of ≤ o4)
The voltage at terminals 1U1, 1V1 or 1W1 and 3U1, 3W1 is lower than the response threshold for longer than the “restart time”
set in P086.
Response threshold for armature supply voltage:

P078.001 ∗ (1+

P351
)
100%

Response threshold for field supply voltage:

P078.002 ∗ (1+

P351
)
100%

Possible fault causes
♦
♦

F007

Line undervoltage
Monitoring values set too sensitively or incorrectly (P351, P078)

Fault value:

r047 Index 002 to 016:

1

Undervoltage has occurred

i002 Number of phase that has activated fault message
0 ... Phase UV
1 ... Phase VW
2 ... Phase WU
3 ... Phase field
i003 Incorrect voltage value (normalized to 16384)

4

Undervoltage persists for longer than time set in
parameter P086 (if this is set to >0)

-

Overvoltage
(active in operating states of ≤ o4)
The voltage at terminals 1U1, 1V1 or 1W1 and 3U1, 3W1 is higher than the response threshold (for longer than the “restart time”
set in P086).
Response threshold for armature supply voltage:

P078.001 ∗ (1+

P352
)
100%

Response threshold for field supply voltage:

P078.002 ∗ (1+

P352
)
100%

Possible fault causes
♦
♦

9-4

Line overvoltage
Monitoring values set too sensitively or incorrectly (P352, P078)

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

Fault

Description

No.

Cause as a function of fault value
(r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error)

Further information (r047.002 to r047.016)

NOTICE
This monitoring function is deactivated in the delivery state. It can be activated via parameter P820.

F008

Fault value:

r047 Index 002 to 016:

1

Overvoltage has occurred

002 Number of phase that has activated fault message
0.... Phase UV
1.... Phase VW
2.... Phase WU
3.... Phase field
i003 Incorrect voltage value (normalized to 16384)

4

Undervoltage persists for longer than time set in
parameter P086 (if this is >0)

-

Line frequency less than the minimum line frequency acc. to parameter P363
(active in operating states of ≤ o5)
This fault message is activated if the line frequency is less than the minimum line frequency (for longer than the “restart time” set
in parameter P086).
Note: Up to software version 1.7 the threshold for activation of the fault message (minimum line frequency) is 45Hz.
Fault value:

F009

1

Frequency of the armature supply < minimum line frequency

2

Frequency of the field supply < minimum line frequency

4

Line frequency less than the minimum line frequency for longer than set in parameter P086 (if >0)

Line frequency greater than the maximum line frequency acc. to parameter P364
(active in operating states of ≤ o5)
This fault message is activated if the line frequency is greater than the maximum line frequency (for longer than the “restart time”
set in parameter P086).
Note: Up to software version 1.7 the threshold for activation of the fault message (maximum line frequency) is 65Hz
Fault value:
1
2

Frequency of the field supply > maximum line frequency

4

Line frequency greater than the maximum line frequency for longer than set in parameter P086 (if >0)

9.1.2.2
F011

Frequency of the armature supply > maximum line frequency

Interface error
Telegram failure at GSST1
when P780 = 2:
USS telegram failure at G-SST1
(active from the first receipt of a valid protocol in all operating states)
After the receipt of the first valid protocol, no further telegrams have been received within the time period set in parameter P787.
Possible fault causes
♦
♦

Cable break
Error in USS master

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

9-5

Fault

Description

No.
F012

Cause as a function of fault value
(r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error)

Further information (r047.002 to r047.016)

Telegram failure at GSST2
when P790 = 2:
USS telegram failure at G-SST2
(active from the first receipt of a valid protocol in all operating states)
After the receipt of the first valid protocol, no further telegrams have been received within the time period set in parameter P797.
Possible fault causes
♦
♦

Cable break
Error in USS master

when P790 = 4 or 5 and P798 = 32 or 33:
Peer-to-peer telegram failure at G-SST2
(active in operating states of ≤ o6)
After the receipt of the first valid protocol, no further telegrams have been received within the time period set in parameter P797.
Possible fault causes
♦
♦
♦
F013

Interruption in connecting cable
EMC interference on connecting cable
P797 is set too low

Telegram failure at GSST3
when P800 = 2 and P808 = 32 or 33:
USS telegram failure to G-SST3
(active from the first receipt of a valid protocol in all operating states)
After the receipt of the first valid protocol, no further telegrams have been received within the time period set in parameter P807.
Possible fault causes
♦
♦

Cable break
Error in USS master

when P800 = 4 or 5:
Peer-to-peer telegram failure at G-SST3
(active in operating states of ≤ o6)
After the receipt of the first valid protocol, no further telegrams have been received within the time period set in parameter P807.
Possible fault causes
♦ Interruption in connecting cable
♦ EMC interference on connecting cable
♦ P807 is set too low
F014

Telegram failure at paralleling interface
(active when U800 = 1 or 2 from the first receipt of a valid protocol in all operating states)
After the receipt of the first valid protocol, no further telegrams have been received within the time period set in parameter U807.
Possible fault causes
♦
♦
♦

9-6

Interruption in connecting cable
EMC interference on connecting cable
U807 is set too low

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

Fault

Description

No.
F015

Cause as a function of fault value
(r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error)

Further information (r047.002 to r047.016)

Telegram failure on one SIMOLINK board
(active when U741 > 0 as soon as the first valid telegram is received)
After receipt of one valid telegram, no further valid telegrams have arrived within the period set in parameter U741.
Possible fault causes
♦
♦
♦

Break in connecting cable
Parameter setting change during telegram exchange (for parameters see Section 11 "Configuration of SIMOLINK board)
U741 is set to low

Fault value:
st

1 Telegram failure on 1 SLB
2 Reserved
F016

Hardware fault on expansion board EB1
Fault value:

F017

1

Fault on first EB1

2

Fault on second EB1

Hardware fault on expansion board EB2
Fault value:

F018

1

Fault on first EB2

2

Fault on second EB2

Short circuit or overloading of binary outputs
(active in all operating states)
Possible fault causes
♦

Short circuit or overload at terminals 46, 48, 50 or 52 and 26 or 34

Fault value:

r047 Index 002 to 016:

1

i002 Bit 8 = 1:
Bit 9 = 1:
Bit 10 = 1:
Bit 11 = 1:
Bit 12 = 1:
Bit 13 = 1:

Short circuit or overload at binary outputs

Overload at terminal 46
Overload at terminal 48
Overload at terminal 50
Overload at terminal 52
Overload at terminal 26 (15 V output)
Overload at terminal 34, 44 and/or 210
(24 V output)

NOTICE
This monitoring function is deactivated in the delivery state. It can be activated via parameter P820.

9.1.2.3
F019

F020

External faults
Fault message from free function block FB286
(active in all operating states)
Fault value:
1
the binector wired via parameter U100 Index.005 is in the state log.”1”
2
the binector wired via parameter U100 Index.006 is in the state log.”1”
3
the binector wired via parameter U100 Index.007 is in the state log.”1”
4
the binector wired via parameter U100 Index.008 is in the state log.”1”
Fault message from free function block FB287
(active in all operating states)
Fault value:
1
2
3
4

the binector wired via parameter U101 Index.005 is in the state log.”1”
the binector wired via parameter U101 Index.006 is in the state log.”1”
the binector wired via parameter U101 Index.007 is in the state log.”1”
the binector wired via parameter U101 Index.008 is in the state log.”1”

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

9-7

Fault

Description

No.

Cause as a function of fault value
(r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error)

F021

External fault 1
(active in all operating states)

F022

External fault 2
(active in all operating states)

F023

Fault message from free function block FB2
(active in all operating states)

Further information (r047.002 to r047.016)

Bit 15 in control word 1 was in the log. "0" state for longer than the time set in P360 index 001

Bit 26 in control word 2 was in the log. "0" state for longer than the time set in P360 index 002

Fault value:
1
2
3
4
F024

the binector wired via parameter U100 Index.001 is in the state log.”1”
the binector wired via parameter U100 Index.002 is in the state log.”1”
the binector wired via parameter U100 Index.003 is in the state log.”1”
the binector wired via parameter U100 Index.004 is in the state log.”1”

Fault message from free function block FB3
(active in all operating states)
Fault value:
1
2
3
4

9.1.2.4
F025

the binector wired via parameter U101 Index.001 is in the state log.”1”
the binector wired via parameter U101 Index.002 is in the state log.”1”
the binector wired via parameter U101 Index.003 is in the state log.”1”
the binector wired via parameter U101 Index.004 is in the state log.”1”

Fault messages from motor sensors
Brush length too short
(active in operating states of ≤ o3)
When parameter P495=2 (binary sensing of brush length), fault message at log.”0” signal (longer than 10s) at terminal 211
Possible fault causes
♦
♦

F026

Encoder for brush length has responded
Open circuit in encoder cable

Bearings in bad condition
(active in operating states of ≤ o6)
When parameter P496=2 (bearing condition sensing) fault message at log. “1” signal (longer than 2 s) at terminal 212
Possible fault causes
♦

F027

Encoder for bearing condition has responded

Air-flow monitoring of motor fan
(active in operating states of < o6)
When parameter P497=2 (air-flow monitoring), fault message at log ”0” signal (longer than 40s) at terminal 213
Possible fault causes
♦
♦

F028

Encoder for fan monitoring has responded
Open circuit in encoder cable

Motor overtemperature
(active in operating states of ≤ o6)
When parameter P498=2 (thermostat connected), fault message at log. “0” signal (longer than 10s) at terminal 214
Possible fault causes
♦
♦

9-8

Thermostat for monitoring motor temperature has responded
Open circuit in encoder cable

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

Fault

Description

No.
F029

Cause as a function of fault value
(r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error)

Further information (r047.002 to r047.016)

Motor overtemperature
(active in all operating states)
Select via

P493=2 or 3 (temperature sensor at terminals 22 / 23) or
P494=2 or 3 (temperature sensor at terminals 204 / 205)

When parameter P490.01=1 (KTY84 at terminals 22 / 23) or P490.02=1 (KTY84 at terminals 204 / 205):
The fault message is activated if the motor temperature reaches or exceeds the value set in parameter P492.
When parameter P490.01=2, 3, 4 or 5 (PTC thermistor at terminals 22 / 23) or P490.02=2, 3, 4 or 5 (PTC thermistor at terminals
204/ 205):
The fault message is activated if the motor temperature reaches or exceeds the response value of the selected PTC thermistor.
Fault value:
1
2

9.1.2.5

Fault activation through temperature sensor at terminals 22 / 23
Fault activation through temperature sensor at terminals 204 / 205

Drive faults

NOTICE
The monitoring functions F031, F035, F036, and F037 are deactivated in the delivery state.
They can be activated via parameter P820.
F030

Commutation failure or overcurrent has occurred
(active in operating states of – –, I, II)
Possible error causes
♦
♦

F031

Mains voltage dip in regenerative feedback mode
Current control loop not optimized

Fault value:

r047 Index 002 to 016:

1

The blocking voltage time area for the commutating
thyristor pair was too small

i002 Delay angle (K0100) in case of error

2

The current crest curve breaks upwards

i004 Trigger circuitry diagnostics (K0989) in case of error

3

The maximum current value was higher than 250% of
rated device current

i005 Actual field current (K0265) in case of error

4

A paralleled SIMOREG DC Master has detected a
commutation failure or overcurrent

i003 Actual EMF (K0287) in case of error

i006 Number of pulses (K0105) in case of error

Speed controller monitoring
(active in operating states of – –, I, II)
The monitor responds when the difference between the connectors selected in P590 and P591 (factory setting: Setpoint/actual
value difference of speed controller) exceeds the limit set in parameter P388 for longer than the time set in parameter P390.
Possible fault causes
♦
♦
♦

9.1.2.6
F033

Open control loop
Controller not optimized
P590 or P591 is not correctly parameterized

External faults
Fault message from free function block FB4
(active in all operating states)
Fault value:
1
2
3
4

the binector wired via parameter U102 Index.001 is in the state log.”1”
the binector wired via parameter U102 Index.002 is in the state log.”1”
the binector wired via parameter U102 Index.003 is in the state log.”1”
the binector wired via parameter U102 Index.004 is in the state log.”1”

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

9-9

Fault

Description

No.
F034

Cause as a function of fault value
(r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error)

Further information (r047.002 to r047.016)

Fault message from free function block FB5
(active in all operating states)
Fault value:
1
2
3
4

9.1.2.7
F035

the binector wired via parameter U103 Index.001 is in the state log.”1”
the binector wired via parameter U103 Index.002 is in the state log.”1”
the binector wired via parameter U103 Index.003 is in the state log.”1”
the binector wired via parameter U103 Index.004 is in the state log.”1”

Drive faults
Drive is blocked
(active in operating states of – –, I, II)
This monitoring function responds if the following conditions are fulfilled for longer than the period set in parameter P355:
♦
♦
♦

Positive or negative torque or armature current limit
The armature current is higher than 1% of the converter rated armature DC current
The actual speed is less than 0.4% of maximum speed

Possible fault causes
♦
F036

Drive is blocked

No armature current is flowing
(active in operating states of – –, I, II)
This monitoring function responds if the armature firing angle is at the rectifier stability limit for more than 500 ms and the
armature current is less than 1% of the converter rated armature DC current.
Possible fault causes
♦
♦
♦
♦

F037

Armature circuit is open
(e.g. DC fuses have blown, open circuit, etc.)
Rectifier stability limit αG (P150) is incorrectly set
Drive is operating at αG limit (e.g. due to supplyundervoltage
EMF is too high because maximum speed setting is too high,
refer to P083, P115, P143, P741)
EMF is too high because field weakening is not selected (refer to P082)
EMF is too high because field current is set too high (refer to P102)
EMF is too high because transition speed for field weakening is set too high (refer to P101) ??

♦
♦
♦
I2t motor monitor has responded
(active in operating states of – –, I, II)

This monitoring function responds when an I2t value is reached which corresponds to the final temperature at 110% of the rated
motor armature current.
Possible fault causes
♦
♦
F038

Parameter P114 is incorrectly set
Drive has been operating for too long at >110% of rated motor armature current

Overspeed
(active in operating states of – –, I, II)
This fault message is activated if the actual speed value (selected in P595) exceeds the positive (P380) or negative (P381)
threshold by 0.5%.
Possible fault causes
♦
♦
♦
♦

9-10

Lower current limit has been input
Current-controlled operation
P512, P513 are set too low
Tachometer cable contact fault in operation close to maximum speed

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

Fault

Description

No.
F039

Cause as a function of fault value
(r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error)

Further information (r047.002 to r047.016)

I2t power section monitor has responded
(active in operating states of – –, I, II)
This monitoring function responds if the calculated I2t value of the power section reaches the permissible value for the power
section concerned (see also P075).
Possible fault causes
♦
♦
♦

F040

Drive has been operating at overload for too long
Parameter P075 is incorrectly set
Parameter P077 is incorrectly set

Electronics supply disconnected in active fault status
(active in all operating states)
This fault message is activated if the electronics power supply has been disconnected, even though a fault was displayed and not
yet acknowledged.
Possible fault causes
♦

Not all fault messages have been acknowledged

Fault value:
Last active fault message
F041

Ambiguous selection of parameter set or ramp-function generator
(active in all operating states)
♦

While an optimization run is in progress, the function data set selection must not be changed. Fault F041 is displayed if
another, different function data set is selected while an optimization run is being executed.

♦

Check whether ramp-function generator parameter set 1 or 2 or 3 (parameters P303 to P314) is clearly selected. If parameter
sets 2 and 3 are selected simultaneously for more than 0.5s, then fault message F041 is displayed. While the parameter set
selection is ambiguous, the system continues to apply the last clearly identified ramp-function generator parameters.

Possible fault causes
♦
♦

P676 or P677 (selection of binectors which determine the active function data set in control word 2, bits 16 and 17) is
incorrectly set
P637 or P638 (selection of binectors which determine ramp-function generator setting) is incorrectly set

Fault value:
2

The selection of the function data set has been changed during an optimization run

3

Ambiguous selection of ramp-function generator parameter set

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

9-11

Fault

Description

No.
F042

Cause as a function of fault value
(r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error)

Further information (r047.002 to r047.016)

Tachometer fault
(active in operating states of – –, I, II)
A check is performed every 20ms to ensure that

Actual speed (K0179)
Actual EMF (K0287)

is > +5%

If the check result is incorrect for 4 times in succession, the fault message is activated.
The following rule applies:
100% actual speed
100% actual EMF

= maximum speed
= ideal average DC voltage at α ≥ 0, i.e. when the thyristor bridge is fully gated

The ideal DC voltage average value at α = 0 is

P078.001 ∗

The monitoring function is effective only if the EMF > a % of

3∗ 2
π
P078.001 ∗

3∗ 2
π

"a" is a percentage that can be set in parameter P357 (default setting 10%).
The monitoring function is effective only if the armature current is > 2% of the converter rated DC current set in r072.002.
Possible fault causes
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦

9-12

Open circuit in tachometer or pulse encoder cable.
Tachometer of pulse encoder cable incorrectly connected.
Pulse encoder supply has failed.
Polarity for actual speed value (P743) is incorrectly set.
Armature circuit data (P110 und P111) are incorrectly set (execute current controller optimization run).
Tachometer or pulse encoder defective
Pulse encoder supply voltage is incorrectly set (P140)
The field polarity is not reversed by the external hardware when the field is reversed.

Fault value:

r047 Index 002 to 016:

1

Open circuit in tachometer or pulse encoder cable

i002 Actual speed value (K0179) in case of fault

2

Polarity of tachometer or pulse encoder is incorrect

i003 Actual EMF value (K0287) in case of fault

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

Fault

Description

No.
F043

Cause as a function of fault value
(r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error)

Further information (r047.002 to r047.016)

EMF too high for braking operation
(active in operating states of – –, I, II)
This fault message is activated if the following 5 conditions are fulfilled when a torque direction reversal is requested (selection of
MI or MII):
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦

P272=0 (fault message is parameterized and not alarm + field weakening)
A parameterized, additional, torque-free interval (P160 ≠ 0) has expired
Parallel drive is ready for engagement of the new torque direction
The absolute value of the armature current (K0118) requested in the new torque direction is >0.5% of P072
The calculated firing angle (K0101) for the armature current requested for the new torque direction is >165 degrees.

Possible fault causes
♦

♦
♦
♦

No “speed-dependent field weakening" (P081=0) is parameterized even though operation in the field weakening range is
needed for the requested maximum speed
Note:
In motor operation, it is possible to reach EMF values corresponding to the peak of the phase-to-phase supply voltage at a
firing angle of αG=30° (rectifier stability limit P150) and low armature currents.
Setpoint EMF for field weakening operation too high (parameter P101 is set too high)
Supply voltage dip
EMF controller or field current controller is not optimized, possibly resulting in excessive EMF on power-up.

Fault value:
Calculated firing angle (armature) before limitation (K0101)

r047 Index 002 to 016:
i002 Instantaneously measured actual EMF (K0287)
i003 Armature current controller setpoint (K0118)

F044

A slave connected to the paralleling interface is not operating
(active when U800 = 1 or 2 and U806>10 (master) after receipt of the first valid protocol in operating states – –, I, II)
Fault value:

F046

1

A fault message is active on a slave

2

A slave is not in operation (e.g. because its enable input is set to "0")

Analog select input for main setpoint (terminals 4 and 5) faulty
(active in operating states of ≤ o6)
This fault message is activated when P700=2 (current input 4 to 20 mA) and an input current of less than 2mA is flowing.
Possible fault causes
♦
♦

F047

Open circuit in supply cable
P700 is incorrectly set

Analog select input 1 (terminals 6 and 7) is faulty
(active in operating states of ≤ o6)
This fault message is activated when P710=2 (current input 4 to 20 mA) and an input current of less than 2mA is flowing.
Possible fault causes
♦
♦

Open circuit in supply cable
P710 is incorrectly set

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

9-13

Fault

Description

No.
F048

Cause as a function of fault value
(r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error)

Further information (r047.002 to r047.016)

Fault in measuring channel for digital speed sensing using pulse encoder
(active in all operating states)
1. Disturbances on encoder cables:
Faults on the encoder cables (transitions to 0 with a 1 signal or to 1 with a 0 signal) are signalled as a rotational direction change
by the evaluation circuit. Frequent changes in rotational direction can occur only at speeds around 0.
The fault message is activated if 10 consecutive pulse encoder signal evaluations identify “direction of rotation change” at a
speed of ≥ 48 rev/min and an EMF > threshold (see below).
2. Pulse encoder defective:
The fault message is activated if, at an EMF > threshold (see below) 10 consecutive pulse encoder signal evaluations identify
“implausible characteristics” of these signals (i.e. frequent rotational direction changes, edges too close together, failure of an
encoder cable or short circuit between two encoder cables).
Possible fault causes
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦

EMC-related interference on a pulse encoder signal (terminals 28 to 31)
Pulse encoder defective
Interruption in an encoder cable
Short circuit between an encoder cable and the supply voltage or another encoder cable
P110 or P111 is incorrectly set (resulting in incorrectly calculation of EMF)

Note:
When the speed encoder is operating correctly, signal sequences, which are characteristic of a faulty pulse encoder or
disturbances on the pulse encoder cables, may occur continuously at the input terminals (e.g. continuous changes in rotational
direction or short pulse intervals) at about 0 speed, e.g. as the result of slight oscillation around a bright/dark transition on the
speed encoder disk).
For this reason, fault F048 is not activated until the EMF > 10% of

P078.001 ∗

3∗ 2
π

.

Fault value:
1

Disturbances on encoder cables

2

Defective pulse encoder

9.1.2.8
F050

Start-up faults
Optimization run not possible
(active in all operating states)
A fault has occurred during an optimization run.

NOTE
The contents of r047, Index 002 to 016, can provide specialists with more detailed information about fault causes. For this
reason, please read out and document all the indices associated with this fault and pass them on when you contact Siemens for
help.
Fault value:
1

Armature current is too low when α=30° and EMF=0.
(average armature current <75% of IA, motor or <75% of IA, rated)
Possible cause:
• Armature circuit interrupted
• High-resistance load
• P150 (Alpha G limit) has been set to excessively high value

2

It was not possible to determine the armature circuit resistance (P110) because the armature current was ≥ 37.5 % of P100
in fewer than 20 of the 150 firing cycles of the measuring phase.
Possible cause:
•Armature current of 37.5% of P100 (I A, motor) is no longer possible (although a current of 75% of P100 was already
flowing, maybe a fuse has blown).

9-14

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

Fault

Description

No.

Cause as a function of fault value
(r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error)
3

Further information (r047.002 to r047.016)

Armature current peaks are too small at α=30° and EMF=0
(armature current peak value <50% of IA, motor or <50% of IA,rated)
Possible cause:
• Armature circuit inductance is too high (field supply from armature terminals)
• P150 (Alpha G limit) has been set to excessively high value
Possible remedy:
• Reduce P100 (IA,motor) while this optimization run is in progress

4

The armature circuit inductance (P111) cannot be determined from the sampled values of the armature current and line
voltage of the armature current crest last generated
Possible cause:
•P100 (IA,motor) or r072.i002 (IA,rated) very much smaller than actual motor rated current of the armature
•LA >327.67mH (armature circuit inductance too large)
•P100 (IA,motor) very much smaller than r072.i002 (IA,rated)
•Armature circuit short-circuited

5

Offset adjustment of actual field current sensing is not possible
(value detected for P825 is outside permissible value range)
Possible cause:
• Fault in actual field current sensing circuit
(defective A7004 gating board or A7001 electronics board)

7

The field circuit resistance (P112) is indeterminable
(the actual field current does not reach the internally specified setpoint of 95% of P102 as a result of P112 variation)
Possible cause:
• RA >3276.7Ω
• Fault in actual field current sensing circuit (defective gating board or A7001 electronics board)
• The command “Inject standstill field” is applied
• P102 is set too high
• A thyristor in the field bridge is not firing

8

80% of rated EMF (K287=P101 – P100 * P110) cannot be reached within 15s (or maximum of the three set acceleration
times)
Possible cause:
• Acceleration time (P303, P307, P311) is set too low
• P101 does not match the set maximum speed (UA at nmax < P101) or setting for P102 is too low
• The command “Ramp-function generator enable”=0 or ”Ramp-function generator stop”=1

9

Field current control loop is not stable enough to record field characteristics
(30s after injection of internal field current setpoint, actual field current is deviating by more than (0.39% of P102 + 0.15 %
of r073.002) from the setpoint)
Possible cause:
• Field current controller or field current precontrol is not optimized or optimized badly (check P112, P253 to P256 or
execute a current controller optimization run (P051=25))

10

Field characteristic is not uniform
(i.e. in spite of field current setpoint reduction, the flux values of this measuring point calculated from EMF and actual speed
are rising)
Possible cause:
• High armature reaction and sharp load variations during recording of field characteristics
• Field current controller or field current precontrol is not optimized or optimized badly (check P112, P253 to P256 or
execute a current controller optimization run (P051=25))

11

A lower field current limit of ≥ 50% of P102 (IF,motor) is applied
(for this reason, it is not possible to plot a minimum of 9 field weakening measuring points)
Possible cause:
• P103 ≥ 50% of P102
Check P614 !

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

9-15

Fault

Description

No.

Cause as a function of fault value
(r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error)

Further information (r047.002 to r047.016)

12

The drive has reached the positive torque limit even though the applied field current setpoint is still ≥ 50% of P102
(IF,motor)
Possible cause:
• Armature current is very “unsteady”, e.g. due to high speed controller P gain setting in P225 (on drive with high integralaction time). In this case, setting a lower actual speed filtering value in P200 and execution of another speed controller
optimization run (P051=26) may help.
• Check torque limits

13

The drive has reached the positive armature current limit even through the applied field current setpoint is still ≥ 50% of
P102 (IF,motor)
Possible cause:
• Armature current is very “unsteady”, e.g. due to high speed controller P gain setting in P225 (on drive with high integralaction time). In this case, setting a lower actual speed filtering value in P200 and execution of another speed controller
optimization run (P051=26) may help
• Check armature current limits

14

The speed has changed by more than 12.5% at a constant speed setpoint even through the applied field current setpoint is
still ≥ 50% of P102 (IF,motor)
Possible cause: as for fault value 12

15

The EMF setpoint is too small to plot a field characteristic
EMFset = UA – IA,motor * RA = P101 – P100 * P110 < 10% of 1.35 * P078.i001
(e.g. P078.i001 = 400 V . . . minimum EMFset = 54 V)

16

Field weakening operation is not allowed in operation without a tachometer (P083=3)

17

The field current controller cannot be optimized because the field circuit time constant cannot be determined (actual field
current does not decay after switch-off to below 0.95*initial value within approximately 1s or to below 0.8 * 0.95*initial
values within approximately 2 s)
Possible cause:
• Setting in P103 is too high
• Field circuit inductance is too high
• Fault in actual field current sensing circuit (gating board or A7001 electronics board defective)
• Ratio r073.02 / P102 is too high (change P076.02 if necessary)

18

Field weakening range is too wide, i.e. during power-up (at full field) to a speed setpoint of +10% nmax , the |EMK| is > 77%
of setpoint EMF (P101 – P100 * P110)

Possible cause:
• Maximum speed setting is incorrect
• Pulse encoder parameters are incorrect (P140 to P143)
• Parameters for tachometer adaptation are incorrect (P741)
• Setpoint EMF is not correct (P101, P100, P110)
• An excessively high load torque (in positive or negative direction, e.g. a suspended load) causes the drive to rotate, one
of the armature current or torque limits may be parameterized too low
19

A steady-state actual speed of +10%, +20%, +30% . . . or +100% of the maximum speed cannot be reached within 3
minutes (or maximum value of the three set acceleration times) in speed-controlled operation (the speed setpoint/actual
value difference averaged over 90 firing cycles must equal <0.1% nmax for a specific time period)
Possible cause:
• Acceleration time is set too low (P303, P307, P311)
• Drive is blocked
• An excessively high load torque (in positive or negative direction, e.g. a suspended load) causes the drive to rotate, one
of the armature current or torque limits may be parameterized too low
• Poor speed controller setting (P225, P226, P228) or speed controller is parameterized as pure P controller or with
droop
• A band elimination filter (P201, P202 or P203, P204) is active
• Command “Ramp-function generator enable” =0 or ”Ramp-function generator STOP” =1 is applied

9-16

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

Fault

Description

No.

Cause as a function of fault value
(r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error)

Further information (r047.002 to r047.016)

20

Current limit is too low
(With speed controller optimization run: Less than 30% or 45% of P100 (IA,motor) + the armature current required for zero
speed,
With optimization run for friction moment and moment of inertia compensation: Less than 20% of P100 (IA, motor) + the
armature current required for a steady-state speed corresponding to 10% of maximum speed)

21

Field weakening range is too wide (nact < +7% nmax produces |EMF| > 54% setpoint EMF)
(setpoint EMF= K289= P101 – P100 * P110)

Possible cause:
• Maximum speed setting is incorrect
• Pulse encoder parameters are incorrect (P140 to P143)
• Parameters for tachometer adaptation are incorrect (P741)
• Setpoint EMF is not correct (P101, P100, P110)
• Caution:
Even a high absolute negative actual speed value can produce an | EMF | of > 54% setpoint EMF
22

With speed controller optimization run:
With an acceleration current equaling 20% or 30% of P100 (IA, motor) + armature current required for zero speed or
With optimization run for friction moment and moment of inertia compensation:
With an acceleration current equaling the current required to achieve a steady-state speed of 10% of maximum speed +
20% of P100 (IA, motor), the maximum speed cannot be reached within 45s +7%
Possible cause:
• Centrifugal mass is too large
• Drive is blocked, heavily speed-dependent or excessively high load torque
• “Active” load is attempting to maintain a certain speed
Possible remedy:
• Increase P100 while the optimization run is in progress in order to raise the applied acceleration current during
optimization (during the speed controller optimization run, a maximum of 45% of IA, motor (+ armature current for zero
speed) is applied as the armature current setpoint, IA,motor (P100) can thus be increased to 2.2 times the value at
maximum without exceeding 100% IA, motor during optimization)

23

With speed controller optimization run:
With an acceleration current equaling 20% or 30% of P100 (IA, motor) + armature current required for zero speed or
With optimization run for friction moment and moment of inertia compensation:
With an acceleration current equalling the current required to achieve a steady-state speed of 10% of maximum speed +
20% of P100 (IA, motor), the maximum speed or 100% of setpoint EMF cannot be reached within 90s +13%
Possible cause:
• Flywheel mass is too large
• Drive is blocked, heavily speed-dependent or excessively high load torque
• “Active” load is attempting to maintain a certain speed
Possible remedy:
• Increase P100 while the optimization run is in progress in order to raise the applied acceleration current during
optimization (during the speed controller optimization run, a maximum of 45% of IA, motor (+ armature current for zero
speed) is applied as the armature current setpoint, IA,motor (P100) can thus be increased to 2.2 times the value at
maximum without exceeding 100% IA, motor during optimization)

24

With speed controller optimization run:
The actual speed does not drop to below +2% of maximum speed or to below the speed threshold nmin set in P370 within 2
minutes
With optimization run for field weakening:
The actual speed does not drop to below +2% of maximum speed or to below the speed threshold nmin set in P370 within
10 minutes
With optimization run for friction moment and moment of inertia compensation:
The actual speed does not drop to below +2% of maximum speed or to below the speed threshold nmin set in P370 within
11 or 2 minutes
Possible cause:
• Single-quadrant drive coasts to a standstill too slowly

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

9-17

Fault

Description

No.

Cause as a function of fault value
(r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error)
25

Further information (r047.002 to r047.016)

The average armature current required for the speed range from +7% to approximately +13% of maximum speed to cover
the friction and/or steady-state load torque cannot be calculated
Possible cause:
• Drive with very little friction or very small integral-action time and, as a result of the very short measuring time,
computational inaccuracies during evaluation
• Distorted or disturbed actual speed value
• Large flywheel mass that is coupled to the drive via long shaft with high torsion, possibly via a
coupling with large amount of play
Possible remedy:
• Reduce P100 for duration of the optimization run to decrease the acceleration current applied during optimization and
thus to lengthen the measuring time

26

Load torque too high (nset =0% nmax results in nict ≥ 40% nmax) (actual speed value is averaged over 90 firing cycles,
speed monitoring at ≥ 40% nmax does not start for 1s after application of speed setpoint of nset=0)
Possible cause:
• An excessively high load torque (in a positive or negative direction, e.g. suspended load) causes the drive to rotate (the
speed controller parameters are parameterized according to the factory setting during this run)
• One of the armature current or torque limits is parameterized too low (the motor field may not be reaching full field
strength fast enough with the result that the initial motor torque is too low)
• Maximum speed setting is incorrect
• Pulse encoder parameters are incorrect (P140 to P143)
• Parameters for tachometer adjustment are not correct (P741)

27

Load torque is too high (nset=0% nmax results in |EMF| >100% setpoint EMF) (EMF monitoring at ≥ (P101 – P100 * P110)
does not start for 1 s after application of speed setpoint of nset=0)
Possible cause:
• An excessively high load torque (in a positive or negative direction, e.g. suspended load) causes the drive to rotate (the
speed controller parameters are parameterized according to the factory setting during this run)
• One of the armature current or torque limits is parameterized too low (the motor field may not be reaching full field
strength fast enough with the result that the initial motor torque is too low)
• Maximum speed setting is incorrect
• Pulse encoder parameters are incorrect (P140 to P143)
• Parameters for tachometer adjustment are not correct (P741)
• Setpoint EMF settings are incorrect (P101, P100, P110)

28

A steady-state actual speed corresponding to 0% of maximum speed cannot be reached within 0 s in speed-controlled
operation (the speed setpoint/actual value difference averaged over 90 firing cycles must be <1.0% nmax for a total of 4s)
Possible cause: As for fault value 26

29

The calculated armature circuit inductance is greater than 327.67 mH, therefore P111 = 327,67 mH has been set. All other
parameters (the current controller parameters P155 and P156 too) have been set correctly despite that. (For the real
armature circuit inductance in mH, see r047.i010).
Possible cause:
•e.g. field supply from the armature terminals

30

The calculated armature circuit inductance is greater than 327.67 mH and the calculated armature circuit resistance is
greater than 32.767 Ω, therefore P111 = 327,67 mH and P110 = 32,767 Ω has been set. All other parameters have also
been set. However, the values of the current controller parameters P155 and P156 might differ from the optimum setting.
Possible cause:
•e.g. field supply from the armature terminals

9-18

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

Fault

Description

No.

Cause as a function of fault value
(r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error)
31

Further information (r047.002 to r047.016)

The calculated armature circuit resistance is greater than 32.767 Ω, therefore P110 = 32,767 Ω has been set. All other
parameters have also been set. Possibly the calculated P111 and therefore also the current controller parameters P155
and P156 have been distorted by the limitation in P110 .
Possible cause:
•e.g. field supply from the armature terminals

r047 Index 002:

F051

F052

1

Fault has occurred during optimization run for current controller and precontrol for armature and field (selected by means of
P051=25)

2

Fault has occurred during optimization run for speed controller (selected through setting P051=26)

3

Fault has occurred during optimization run for field weakening (selected through setting P051=27)

4

Fault has occurred during internal offset adjustments (selected through P051=22)

5

Fault has occurred in optimization run for friction and moment of inertia compensation (selected through setting P051=28)
[V2.1 and later]

No optimization run when permanent memory is disabled
(active in all operating states)

If P051.001 is set to 0 (write access to permanent memory disabled), it is not possible to execute an optimization run.
Optimization run aborted as a result of external cause
(active in operating states of – –, I, II)
This fault message is activated when the converter ceases operating in the RUN state (state I, II or --) during an optimization run
(and thus in response to every FAULT) or if the EMERGENCY STOP or SHUTDOWN command is applied. The optimization run
is aborted. Only those parameters which had been fully optimized prior to activation of the fault message are altered.
When the STANDSTILL command is applied, this fault message is not activated if the optimization run for field weakening is
interrupted after the 1st field weakening measuring point has been recorded or, in the case of the optimization run for friction and
moment of inertia compensation, after the measuring point at 10% maximum speed has been determined. In these cases, the run
may be interrupted by STANDSTILL so as to be able to complete the run in several stages (by repeated restarts) for a limited
travel path.
Fault value:

r047 Index 002 to 016:

1

Run was aborted because converter is no longer
operating in RUN mode

2

Run was aborted because EMERGENCY STOP
command was applied (speed controller setpoint =0)

i002=1 Fault has occurred during optimization run for current
controller and precontrol for armature and field
(selected by means of P051=25)

3

Run was aborted because STANDSTILL command was
applied (ramp-function generator setpoint=0)

4

Operation has been aborted because P051 was changed
during the optimization run

5

Run was aborted because SWITCH-ON command was
not applied within 30 s of selection of optimization run

6

Operation has been aborted because the OPERATING
ENABLE command was not entered within 1 minute of
selection of the optimization run.

7

Operation has been aborted because converter was not
in operating state < o7.2 15 s after selection of the
optimization run with P051 = 25, 26, 27 or 28 (input of
OFF1 command may have been forgotten)

9.1.2.9
F053

i002=2 Fault has occurred during optimization run for speed
controller (selected through setting P051=26)
i002=3 Fault has occurred during optimization run for field
weakening (selected through setting P051=27)
i002=5 Fault has occurred in optimization run for friction and
moment of inertia compensation (selected through
setting P051=28)

External faults
Fault message from free function block FB288
(active in all operating states)
Fault value:
1
2
3
4

F054

the binector wired via parameter U102 Index.005 is in the state log.”1”
the binector wired via parameter U102 Index.006 is in the state log.”1”
the binector wired via parameter U102 Index.007 is in the state log.”1”
the binector wired via parameter U102 Index.008 is in the state log.”1”

Fault message from free function block FB289
(active in all operating states)
Fault value:

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

9-19

Fault

Description

No.

Cause as a function of fault value
(r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error)
1
2
3
4

9.1.2.10
F055

Further information (r047.002 to r047.016)

the binector wired via parameter U103 Index.005 is in the state log.”1”
the binector wired via parameter U103 Index.006 is in the state log.”1”
the binector wired via parameter U103 Index.007 is in the state log.”1”
the binector wired via parameter U103 Index.008 is in the state log.”1”

Start-up faults

No field characteristic recorded
(active in operating states of – –, I, II)
Possible fault causes
♦

The optimization run for field weakening (P051=27) has not yet been executed.

Fault value:

F056

1

P170 = 1 (”torque control”) selected, but “no valid field characteristic has been recorded” (P117=0) yet

2

P081 = 1 (”speed-dependent field weakening”) selected, but “no valid field characteristic has been recorded” (P117=0) yet
(P117=0)

Important parameter is not set
(active in operating states of ≤ o6)
This fault message is activated if certain parameters are still set to 0.
Fault value:

F058

1

Speed controller actual value selection in P083 is still set to 0

2

Rated motor armature current in P100 is still set to 0.0

3

Rated motor field current in P102 is still set to 0.00 (fault message only when P082 ≠ 0)

4

Rated DC current of external field device is still set to 0.00 in U838 (error message if P082 >= 21 only)

Parameter settings are not consistent
(active in operating states of ≤ o6)
Inconsistent values have been set in mutually dependent parameters.
Fault value:

F059

9-20

2

The parameters for speed-dependent current limitation are not set correctly (the following applies: P105>P107 (I1>I2) and
P104 < P106 (n1P086 (time for automatic restart)

11

P090 (stabilization time for supply voltage) >P089 (waiting time in state o4 or o5)

12

P445=1 is set (switch-on, shutdown and crawl act as a pushbutton) although no binector is parameterized as a shudown
button (P444=0)

13

If P067 > 1, then P075 must also be > 0

14

Parameter U673 > U674 (this setting is not permitted; see function diagram B152)

15

Parameter P169 = 1 and P170 = 1 (impermissible setting)

Technology option S00 is disabled/will be disabled soon
(active in all operating statuses)

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

Fault

Description

No.

Cause as a function of fault value
(r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error)

Further information (r047.002 to r047.016)

Fault value:
1

Time credit for S00 = 0 hrs
The technology option S00 for 500 operating hours no longer applies. The functions are now no longer available, but the
parameter settings have been retained.
If you wish to continue using technology option S00, please contact your nearest Siemens Sales Office to obtain the PIN
number you will require to permanently enable this option.
You will need to know the serial number of your SIMOREG DC Master. For further details, please refer to the description of
parameters U977 and n978 in Chapter 11 of the Parameter List.

2

Time credit S00 < 100 Std.
The remaining time period of temporary enabling of technology option S00 is now less than 100 operating hours. The
technology functions will not be available for much longer.
If you wish to continue using technology option S00, please contact your nearest Siemens Sales Office to obtain the PIN
number you will require to permanently enable this option.
for permanent enabling of technology option S00.
You will need to know the serial number of your SIMOREG DC Master. For further details, please refer to the description of
parameters U977 and n978 in Chapter 11 of the Parameter List.

3

S00 operation will not be possible if an SLB cycle time of < 1 ms is set
Owing to the available capacity of the electronics board, it is not possible to operate the S00 technology option at the same
time as a SIMOLINK bus with an extremely short cycle time (U746 < 1 ms).
See also parameter U746.

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

9-21

Fault

Description

No.

Cause as a function of fault value
(r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error)

9.1.2.11
F061

Further information (r047.002 to r047.016)

Hardware faults

Fault message from thyristor check function
(active in operating state o3)
This fault message can be activated only if the thyristor check is activated via parameter P830.
If “Thyristor defective” or “Thyristor unable to block” is signaled, then the relevant thyristor module must be replaced.
Possible causes for irreparable damage to thyristors:
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦

Interruption in snubber circuit
Current controller and precontrol are not optimized (excessive current peaks)
Inadequate cooling (e.g. fan is not operating, ambient temperature is too high, fan is rotating in wrong direction (incorrect
phase sequence), inadequate air supply, heatsink is very dirty)
Excessive voltage peaks in incoming supply system
External short circuit or fault to ground (check armature circuit)

If “Thyristor unable to block” is signaled, the cause can generally be attributed to a firing circuit fault, rather than to a defective
thyristor.
Possible causes:
♦ Firing pulse cable to relevant thyristor is interrupted
♦ Ribbon cable X101 or X102 is incorrectly inserted or interrupted
♦ Defective electronics or gating board
♦ Internal interruption in gating cable in thyristor module
The designations of the firing cables and associated thyristors can be found in Section 6.4 (power connections).
Fault value:
1
2
3
4
5
6

Defective thyristor (short circuit in module V1, on 15A and 30 converters: V1 or V4)
Defective thyristor (short circuit in module V2, on 15A and 30 converters: V2 or V5)
Defective thyristor (short circuit in module V3, on 15A and 30 converters: V3 or V6)
Defective thyristor (short circuit in module V4, on 15A and 30 converters: V4 or V1)
Defective thyristor (short circuit in module V5, on 15A and 30 converters: V5 or V2)
Defective thyristor (short circuit in module V6, on 15A and 30 converters: V6 or V3)

8

Fault to ground in armature circuit

9

I=0 message defective
Possible fault cause
• Defective A7001 electronics board

11
12
13
14
15
16
17

Thyristor cannot be fired (X11)
Thyristor cannot be fired (X12)
Thyristor cannot be fired (X13)
Thyristor cannot be fired (X14)
Thyristor cannot be fired (X15)
Thyristor cannot be fired (X16)
2 or more thyristors (MI) cannot be fired
Possible fault cause
• Armature circuit interrupted

21
22
23
24
25
26
27

9-22

Thyristor cannot be fired (X21)
Thyristor cannot be fired (X22)
Thyristor cannot be fired (X23)
Thyristor cannot be fired (X24)
Thyristor cannot be fired (X25)
Thyristor cannot be fired (X26)
2 or more thyristors (MII) cannot be fired

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

Fault

Description

No.

Cause as a function of fault value
(r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error)
31
32
33
34
35
36

9.1.2.12
F062

Further information (r047.002 to r047.016)

Thyristor unable to block (X11 or X21)
Thyristor unable to block (X12 or X22)
Thyristor unable to block (X13 or X23)
Thyristor unable to block (X14 or X24)
Thyristor unable to block (X15 or X25)
Thyristor unable to block (X16 or X26)

Internal faults

Fault in parameter memory
(active in all operating states)
Software monitoring of correct functioning of the EEPROM module (non-volatile memory) on the A7009 board.
The EEPROM values contains all data which must be protected in the case of a power failure (i.e. parameter values and process
data which must remain stored during power failures).
The following are monitored:
♦
♦
♦
♦

Connection between the A7001 electronics board and the EEPROM on the A7009 backplane wiring assembly
Whether the parameter values stored on the EEPROM are within the permissible value range
Whether data are being correctly stored on the EEPROM. For this purpose, values are read and checked for correctness
after they are transferred to the module
Whether the checksum of the non-volatile process data in the EEPROM is correct

Possible causes for all fault types:
Excessive EMC-related interference is present (e.g. due to unprotected contactors, unscreened cables, loose shield connections)
Fault value:
1

r047 Index 002 to 016:

Connection to EEPROM is faulty
Possible fault causes
• A7001 electronics board is defective
• A7009 backplane wiring assembly is defective
• Plug-in connection X109 is defective

2

3

Parameter value is outside permissible value range

i002 Number of faulty parameter

Possible fault causes
• “Restore to default value” has never been executed
with this software (e.g. after software replacement)
• A7009 backplane wiring assembly is defective

i003 Index of faulty parameter

Possible remedy:
• Acknowledge fault, execute “Restore to default value”
and start up the drive again
Parameter value cannot be stored on EEPROM
Possible fault causes
• A7001 electronics board is defective
• A7009 backplane wiring assembly is defective
• Plug-in connection X109 is defective

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

i004 Faulty parameter value

i002 Address of fault memory location
i003 Faulty value in EEPROM
i004 Correct parameter value

9-23

Fault

Description

No.

Cause as a function of fault value
(r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error)
11

Checksum of non-volatile data (part 1)
is not correct

12

Checksum of non-volatile data (part 2)
is not correct

13

Checksum of non-volatile data (part 3)
is not correct

20

Checksum of configuring table of parameter values is not
correct

Further information (r047.002 to r047.016)
i002 Calculate checksum
i003 Checksum found in EEPROM

Possible fault causes
• Defective EEPROM
• “Restore to default value” has never been executed
with this software (e.g. after software replacement)
Possible remedy:
• Acknowledge fault, execute “Restore to default value”
and start up the drive again! Check interference
suppression measures and improve if necessary.
F063

Errors in compensation data of analog inputs and outputs
(active in all operating states)
This function monitors whether the factory-set compensation data for the analog inputs and outputs are plausible
Possible fault cause:
♦

F064

Defective A7001 or A7006 electronics board

Fault value:

r047 Index 002 to 016:

11

Incorrect number of words in compensation values
for analog inputs and outputs of A7001

i002 Incorrect number of words

12

Checksum error in compensation values for
analog inputs and outputs of A7001

i002 Calculated checksum

13

Incorrect value among compensation values for
analog inputs and outputs of A7001

i002 Incorrect value

23

Incorrect value among compensation values for
analog inputs and outputs of A7006

i002 Incorrect value

i003 Errored checksum

Watchdog timer has initiated a reset
(active in all operating states)
An internal microprocessor hardware counter monitors whether the program for calculating the firing pulses runs at least once
every 14 ms (program is executed on average every 2.7 to 3.3 ms). If this is not the case, the counter initiates a reset, F064 is
then displayed.
Possible fault causes
♦
♦

F065

A7001 electronics board is defective
Excessive EMC-related interference is present (e.g. due to unprotected contactors, unscreened cables, loose shield
connections)

Illegal microprocessor status
(active in all operating states)
An internal microprocessor hardware function monitors the microprocessor for illegal operating states.
Possible fault causes
♦
♦

F067

A7001 electronics board is defective
Excessive EMC-related interference is present (e.g. due to unprotected contactors, unscreened cables, loose shield
connections)

Converter cooling faulty
(active in operating states of ≤ o13)
The heatsink temperature monitoring function is activated 6s after connection of the electronics supply.
(The current heat sink temperature is indicated at parameter r013 and on connector K050)

9-24

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

Fault

Description

No.

Cause as a function of fault value
(r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error)
Fault value:

F068

Further information (r047.002 to r047.016)
r047 Index 002 to 016:

1

Heatsink temperature > permissible heatsink temperature

i002 Measured heatsink temperature (16384 .. 100°C)

2

Heatsink temperature sensor is defective

i003 Measured ADC value

3

Converter fan is defective

Analog measuring channel faulty (main setpoint, main actual value or analog select input)
(active in all operating states)
Hardware monitoring of measuring circuits
Possible fault causes
•
•

A7001 module defective
Measuring circuit saturated (input voltage at terminals 4 and 5 or 6 and 7 higher than approx. 11.3V)

Fault value:

F069

1

Measuring channel for main setpoint / analog select input 1 faulty (terminals 4 and 5)

2

Measuring channel for main actual value faulty (terminals 103 and 104)

3

Measuring channel for analog select input 1 faulty (terminals 6 and 7)

MLFB data are faulty
(active in all operating states)
Possible fault causes
♦
♦

Fault value:

r047 Index 002 to 016:

1

MLFB code number (r070) = MLFB code number (r070)
is illegal

i002 Incorrect MLFB code number

2

MLFB data checksum error

-

3

Works number checksum error

-

4

Number of words of MLFB data is incorrect

-

9.1.2.13
F070

Excessive EMC-related interference is present
(e.g. due to unprotected contactors, unscreened cables, loose shield connections)
A7009 backplane wiring assembly is defective

Communication errors with supplementary boards

SCB1: Serious initialization error
(active in all operating states)
SCB1 and SCI cannot power up correctly (see diagnostic parameter n697 for details)
Fault value:
12

No connection to slave 1

22

No connection to slave 2

F073

SCB1: Current below 4mA minimum value at analog input1 of slave 1
(active in all operating states)
The cause of the fault may be a cable break

F074

SCB1: Current below 4mA minimum value at analog input2 of slave 1
(active in all operating states)
The cause of the fault may be a cable break

F075

SCB1: Current below 4mA minimum value at analog input3 of slave 1
(active in all operating states)
The cause of the fault may be a cable break

F076

SCB1: Current below 4mA minimum value at analog input1 of slave 2
(active in all operating states)
The cause of the fault may be a cable break

F077

SCB1: Current below 4mA minimum value at analog input2 of slave 2
(active in all operating states)
The cause of the fault may be a cable break

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

9-25

Fault

Description

No.

Cause as a function of fault value
(r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error)

Further information (r047.002 to r047.016)

F078

SCB1: Current below 4mA minimum value at analog input3 of slave 2
(active in all operating states)
The cause of the fault may be a cable break

F079

SCB1: Telegram failure
(active in all operating states)
Check function of SCB1 (activity LEDs) and connection to SCI slaves (fiber optics)

F080

Error in initialization of a CB/TB board
Possible causes for fault values 1 and 6:
♦
♦
♦

F081

CB/TB board is defective
CB/TB board is not installed correctly
CB/TB board is taking too long to run up (e.g. due to very complex TB configuration)

Fault value (r949 index 001):

r047 index 002 to 016:

1

The "Heartbeat counter“ of the CB/TB has not started to
count within 20 s

i015 Code number of board:
st
1
TB or 1 CB
nd
2
2 CB

2

The product version of the installed CT/TB board is not
compatible with the SIMOREG 6RA70 converter

i002 Code number of slot containing incompatible board:
2
Slot D
3
Slot E
4
Slot F
5
Slot G
6
CB when configuration includes TB

5

i015 Code number of board:
Parameters P918, U711 to U721 are not correctly set or
st
1
TB or 1 CB
not accepted after a change by means of U710 = 0
nd
2
2 CB
setting. (The meanings of these parameters are defined
in the manual for the relevant CB board, see also function
diagrams, Section 8, Sheets Z110 and Z111)

6

The initialization run for a CB/TB board has not been
completed within 40 s

CB/TB heartbeat error
CB/TB has not incremented the monitoring counter for a period
of 800 ms
Possible causes of fault
♦
•

F082

i015 Code number of board:
st
1
TB or 1 CB
nd
2
2 CB
i015 Code number of board:
st
1
TB or 1 CB
nd
2
2 CB

CB/TB board is defective
CB/TB board is not correctly installed

CB/TB message timeout or error in data exchange
Possible causes of fault
♦
♦
♦
♦

9-26

CB/TB PZD message timeout (with fault value 10)
Excessive EMC-related interference
(e.g. due to unprotected contactors, unscreened cables, loose screen connections)
CB/TB board is defective
CB/TB board is not correctly inserted

Fault value (r949 index 001):

r047 Index 002 to 016:

1

Fault in alarm channel from CB to basic unit

i015 Code number of board:
st
1
TB or 1 CB
nd
2
2 CB

2

Fault in alarm channel from TB to basic unit

3

Fault in fault channel from TB to basic unit

5

Fault in parameter job channel from CB to basic unit

i015 Code number of board:
st
1
TB or 1 CB
nd
2
2 CB

6
CB

Fault in parameter response channel from basic unit to

i015 Code number of board:
st
st
1
1 TB or 1 CB
nd
2
2 CB

7

Fault in parameter job channel from TB to basic unit
Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

Fault

Description

No.

Cause as a function of fault value
(r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error)
8
TB

Fault in parameter response channel from basic unit to

10

CB/TB process data failure (message timeout period set
in U722)

11

Fault in parameter job channel from PMU to TB

i015 Code number of board:
st
1
TB or 1 CB
nd
2
2 CB

12

Fault in parameter response channel from TB to PMU

15

Fault in setpoint channel from CB/TB to basic unit

i015 Code number of board:
st
1
TB or 1 CB
nd
2
2 CB

16

Fault in actual value channel from basic unit to CB/TB

i015 Code number of board:
st
1
TB or 1 CB
nd
2
2 CB

9.1.2.14
F101
to
F147

Further information (r047.002 to r047.016)

Fault messages from supplementary boards

This group of fault messages is activated by supplementary boards
Please refer to the operating manual of the relevant supplementary board for explanation of the fault messages and fault values

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

9-27

9.2

Alarm messages
Alarm message display:
On the PMU: A (Alarm) and a three-digit number. The red LED (Fault) flashes.
On the OP1S: On the bottom line of the operational display. The red LED (Fault) flashes.
An alarm message cannot be acknowledged, but disappears automatically when the cause has been
eliminated.
Several alarm messages can be active at the same time, these are then displayed in succession.
Many alarms (see List of Alarm Messages) can only be active in certain operating states.
The system responses to an alarm are as follows:
•

Alarm message is displayed on the operator panel (PMU, OP1S)

•

B0114 ( = status word 1, bit 7) is set and B0115 is cancelled
(see also special alarm bits in status word 2, e.g. for an external alarm, overload, etc.)

•

The corresponding bit in one of the alarm words r953 (K9801) to r960 (K9808) is set

Alarm

Description

No.
A015

Simolink start
(active in all operating states)
Although the board has been initialized, it cannot yet exchange telegrams (parameters have not yet been correctly configured on
all nodes or the boards have not yet been linked via fiber optics to form a closed ring).

A018

Short circuit at binary outputs
(active in all operating states)

A019

Alarm message from free function block FB256
(active in all operating states)

A020

Alarm message from free function block FB257
(active in all operating states)

A021

External alarm 1
(active in all operating states)

A022

External alarm 2
(active in all operating states)

A023

Alarm message from free function block FB6
(active in all operating states)

A024

Alarm message from free function block FB7
(active in all operating states)

Hardware monitoring function to check for short circuit at one of the binary select outputs (see also F018 and r011).

The binector wired via parameter U104 Index.002 is in the state log.”1”

The binector wired via parameter U105 Index.002 is in the state log.”1”

Bit 28 in control word 2 was in the log. "0" state for longer than the time set in P360 index 003.

Bit 29 in control word 2 was in the log. "0" state for longer than the time set in P360 index 004.

The binector wired via parameter U104 Index.001 is in the state log.”1”

The binector wired via parameter U105 Index.001 is in the state log.”1”

9-28

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

Alarm

Description

No.
A025

Brush length too short
(active in all operating states)
When parameter P495=1 (binary sensing of brush length):
Alarm in response to log. “0” signal (longer than 10s) at terminal 211
Possible causes
♦
♦

A026

Encoder for brush length has responded
Interruption in encoder cable

Poor bearing condition
(active in all operating states)
When parameter P496=1 (bearing condition sensing):
Alarm in response to log. “0” signal (longer than 2s) at terminal 212
Possible causes
♦

A027

Encoder for bearing condition has responded

Air flow monitoring
(active in operating states of < o6)
When parameter P497=1 (air flow monitoring):
Alarm in response to log. “0” signal (longer than 40s) at terminal 213
Possible causes
♦
♦

A028

Encoder for fan monitoring has responded
Interruption in encoder cable

Motor overtemperature
(active in all operating states)
When parameter P498=1 (thermostat connected):
Alarm in response to log. “0” signal (longer than 10s) at terminal 214
Possible causes
♦
♦

A029

Thermostat for monitoring motor temperature has responded
Interruption in encoder cable

Motor overtemperature
(active in all operating states)
Selection via P493=1 or 3 (thermostat at terminals 22 / 23) or
P494=1 or 3 (thermostat at terminals 204 / 205)
When parameter P490.01=1 (KTY84 at terminals 22 / 23) or P490.02=1 (KTY84 at terminals 204 / 205):
The alarm is activated if the motor temperature reaches or exceeds the values set in parameter P492.
When parameter P490.01=2, 3, 4 or 5 (PTC thermistor at terminals 22 / 23) or P490.02=2, 3, 4 or 5 (PTC thermistor at terminals
204 / 205):
The alarm is activated if the motor temperature reaches or exceeds the trip value of the selected PTC.

A030

Commutation failure or overcurrent has occurred
(active in operating states of – –, I, II)
Possible error causes
♦
♦

A031

Mains voltage dip in regenerative feedback mode
Current control loop not optimized

Speed controller monitoring
(active in operating states of – –, I, II)
The monitor responds when the difference between the connectors selected in P590 and P591 (factory setting: Setpoint/actual
value difference of speed controller) exceeds the limit set in parameter P388 for longer than the time set in parameter P390.
Possible causes
♦
♦
♦

Control loop interrupted
Controller is not optimized
P590 or P591 is not correctly parameterized

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

9-29

Alarm

Description

No.
A033

Alarm message from free function block FB8
(active in all operating states)

A034

The binector connected via parameter U106 Index.001 is in the log. "1" state
Alarm message from free function block FB9
(active in all operating states)

A035

The binector connected via parameter U107 Index.001 is in the log. "1" state
Drive blocked
(active in operating states of – –, I, II)

A036

A037

A038

The monitoring function responds if the following conditions are fulfilled for longer than the time set in parameter P355:
♦ Positive or negative torque or armature current limit reached
♦ Armature current is greater than 1% of converter rated armature DC current
♦ The actual speed value is less than 0.4% of maximum speed
No armature current can flow
(active in operating states of – –, I, II)
This monitoring function responds if the armature firing angle is at the rectifier stability limit for more than 500 ms and the
armature current is less than 1% of the converter rated armature DC current.
I2t motor monitor has responded
(active in operating states of – –, I, II)
The alarm is activated when the calculated I2t value of the motor reaches the value which corresponds to the final temperature
at 100% of permissible continuous motor current (= P113*P100).
Overspeed
(active in operating states of – –, I, II)
The monitoring function responds if the actual speed value (selected in P595) exceeds the positive (P512) or negative (P513)
threshold by 0.5%.
Possible causes

A039

A043

♦ Lower current limit has been input
♦ Current-controlled operation
♦ P512, P513 are set too low
♦ Tachometer cable contact fault in operation close to maximum speed
I2t value of power section too high
(active in all operating states)
This alarm is activated if the permissible I2t value for the relevant power section is reached. At the same time, the current limit is
set to P077 * 100% of the converter rated DC current. This limit is not cancelled again until the setpoint drops below 100% of the
converter rated DC current. See also Fault F039 and Parameter P075.
Automatic field current reduction if EMF is too high in operation
(active in operating states of – –, I, II)
This alarm is active only when parameter P272=1 and activated if the following equation applies to firing angle α (armature)
before limitation (K101):
α > (αW (inverter stability limit acc. to P151) – 5 degrees) or , at a low (pulsating) current
α > (165 degrees – 5 degrees)
The field is reduced simultaneously with A043, implemented through control of the armature firing angle to (αW (or 165 degrees)
- 5 degrees) using a P controller whose output reduces the EMF controller setpoint. For this reason, “Field current setpoint input
through internal EMF control” (PO81=1) must be parameterized.
When a change in torque direction is requested, both torque directions are inhibited until the calculated control angle (K101) is
<165 degrees for the armature current requested in the new torque direction, i.e. until the field, and thus the EMF, have been
reduced accordingly.
See also parameter P082.

A044
A046

An alarm is active on one slave connected to the paralleling interface
(active in all operating states)
Analog select input for main setpoint (terminals 4 and 5) faulty
(active in operating states of ≤ o6)
This alarm is activated when P700=2 (current input 4 to 20 mA) and the input current is less than 3mA.

A047

Analog select input 1 (terminals 6 and 7) faulty
(active in operating states of ≤ o6)
This alarm is activated when P710=2 (current input 4 to 20 mA) and the input current is less than 3mA.

9-30

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

Alarm

Description

No.
A049

SCB1: No SCI slave connected
(active in all operating states)

A050

SCB1: Not all required SCI slaves are available
(active in all operating states)

A053

Alarm message from free function block FB258
(active in all operating states)

The SCI slave required to perform the parameterized functions is not available

A054

The binector connected via parameter U106 Index.002 is in the log. "1" state
Alarm message from free function block FB259
(active in all operating states)
The binector connected via parameter U107 Index.002 is in the log. "1" state

A059

Remaining time for temporary enabling of the S00 technology option is now less than 100 operating hours
(active in all operating statuses)
Remaining time for temporary enabling of the S00 technology option is now less than 100 operating hours. The functions will
soon be unavailable.

A067

If you wish to continue using technology option S00, please contact to your nearest Siemens Regional Office for a PIN number
for permanent enabling of technology option S00.
You will need to know the serial number of your SIMOREG DC Master. For further details, please refer to the description of
parameters U977 and n978 in Chapter 11 of the Parameter List.
Converter cooling faulty
(active in all operating states)
The heatsink temperature is > 90 °C.
The monitoring function is activated 6s after the electronics supply is connected.
(The current heat sink temperature is indicated at parameter r013 and on connector K050)
st

A081
to
A088

CB alarm of 1 CB
(active in all operating states ≤ o11)

A089
to
A096

CB alarm of 2 CB
(active in all operating states ≤ o11)

A097
to
A128

TB alarms
(active in operating states ≤ o11)

The meaning of these alarms depends on the type of board used.
For further information, refer to Section 7.7, Start-Up of Optional Supplementary Boards, in the relevant board description.
nd

The meaning of these alarms depends on the type of board used.
For further information, refer to Section 7.7, Start-Up of Optional Supplementary Boards, in the relevant board description.

For more information about TECH BOARD alarms, please refer to Operating Instructions or Configuring Guide of the relevant
board.

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

9-31

NOTES:

9-32

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

10

Parameter list
Overview

The Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions does not contain information about all available
parameters. Only the parameters mentioned in this book are included. For a complete list of
parameters please refer to power module Operating Instructions 6RX1700-0AD76.

Range of parameter numbers Function
r000

Operating display

r001 - P050

General visualization parameters

P051- r059

Access authorization levels

r060 - r065

Definition of SIMOREG DC MASTER converter

P067 - P079

Definition of SIMOREG DC MASTER power section

P080 - P098

Setting values for converter control

P100 - P139

Definition of motor

P140 - P148

Definition of pulse encoder, speed sensing using pulse encoder

P150 - P165

Closed-loop armature current control, auto-reversing stage, armature gating unit

P169 - P191

Current limitation, torque limitation

P192

Auto-reversing stage, armature gating unit

P200 - P236

Speed controller (further parameters for the speed controller P550 - P567)

P250 - P265

Closed-loop field current control, field gating unit

P272 - P284

Closed-loop EMF control

P295 - P319

Ramp-function generator

P320 - P323

Setpoint processing

P330

Ramp-function generator

P351 - P364

Setting values for monitoring functions and limits

P370 - P399

Setting values for limit-value monitors

P401 - P416

Settable fixed values

P421 - P428

Fixed control bits

P430 - P445

Digital setpoint input (fixed setpoint, inching and crawling setpoints)

P450 - P453

Position sensing with pulse encoder

P455 - P458

Connector selector switches

P460 - P473

Motorized potentiometer

P480 - P485

Oscillation

P490 - P498

Definition of "Motor interface”

P500 - P503

Configuring of torque shell input

P509 - P515

Speed limiting controller

P519 - P530

Friction compensation

P540 - P546

Compensation of moment of inertia (dv/dt injection)

P550 - P567

Speed controller (further parameters for the speed controller P200 - P236)

P580 - P583

Field reversal

P590 - P597

Input quantities for signals

P600 - P647

Configuring of closed-loop control

P648 - P691

Control word, status word

P692 - P698

Further configuring measures

P700 - P746

Analog inputs (main actual value, main setpoint, selectable inputs)

P749 - P769

Analog outputs

P770 - P778

Binary outputs

P780 - P819

Configuration of serial interfaces on basic converter

P820 - P821

Deactivation of monitoring functions

r824 - r829

Compensation values

P830

Thyristor diagnosis

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

10-1

Range of parameter numbers Function
P831 - P899

Parameters for DriveMonitor and OP1S

P918 - P927

Profile parameters

r947 - P952

Fault memory

r953 - r960

Visualization parameters: Alarms

r964

Device identification

r967 - r968

Visualization parameters: Control and status word

P970 - r999

Resetting and storing parameters, list of existing and modified P and r parameters

U710 - n739

Configuration of supplementary boards in board locations 2 and 3

n980 - n999

List of existing and modified U and n parameters

10-2

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

Overview of abbreviations
Example:
PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P520
1)
*
FDS 2)
8) 9)

Friction at 0% speed

0.0 to 100.0
[%]
0.1%4)

Setting as % of converter rated DC current or converter rated torque

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=0.0 5)
Type: O2 3)

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 ≥ 20
Online6)

(G153)
10)

1) An under the parameter number means that the parameter requires confirmation, i.e. the altered value
*
does not take effect until the P key is pressed.
2) Abbreviation indicating that the parameter belongs to a data set (refers only to indexed parameters) (see
Section 9.11 “Switch over parameter sets“)
FDS
BDS

Parameter belongs to the function data set (see Section 9.1, subsection "Data sets")
Parameter belongs to the BICO data set
(see Section 9.1, subsection "Data sets")

3) Specification of parameter type
Unsigned 16-bit value
Signed 16-bit value
Unsigned 32-bit value
Signed 32-bit value
Bit-coded quantity
Nibble-coded quantity

O2
I2
O4
I4
V2
L2

4) Setting steps for access via PKW mechanism
5) Factory setting
6) Minimum setting required (P052) to allow display of the relevant parameter
Minimum access level required (P051) to allow modification of the relevant parameter
Online: The parameter can be changed in all converter operating states
Offline: The parameter can only be changed in converter operating states of ≥ o1.0
8)
S00
Parameter belongs to the technology software in the basic converter, S00 option
9) The "OP parameter number" (i.e. the number to be entered via the OP1S operator panel) is specified in
brackets in the "PNU" column for all parameters which are not "P parameters" or "r parameters": e.g. (2010)
under n010 or (2100) under U100.
10) The parameter is shown in the specified function diagram in Section 8 (here G153) in SIMOREG DC Master
Operating Instructions (6RX1700-0AD76)

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

10-3

NOTES:

10-4

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

PNU

Description

10.1
r000

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

Ind: None
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Operating status display

Operating status display
Status display, fault and alarm messages

-I
II
o1
o1.0
o1.1
o1.2
o1.3
o1.4
o1.5

o1.6

Torque direction M0, MI or MII (=RUN)
No torque direction active
Torque direction I active (MI)
Torque direction II active (MII)
Waiting for operating enable (=READY)
Brake release delay time running.
Waiting for operating enable at terminal 38.
Waiting for operating enable via binector (acc. to selection in
P661) or control word, bit 3 (acc. to selection in P648)
Inching command cancellation delay time running.
Waiting for field to be reversed.
Waiting for cancellation of command "Brake by field reversal"
Waiting for operating enable from optimization run
(the optimization run does not output the operating enable signal
at the end until n P091.002
If |n-set| (|K0193|) and |n-actual| (K0166) are less than
P091.002, the firing pulses are disabled and the drive goes into
state o2.0.
[SW 2.0 and later]

o3
o3.0
o3.1
o3.2
o3.3

Test phase
Waiting for completion of thyrsitor check (selectable function).
Waiting for completion of line symmetry check.
Waiting for a DC contactor to pick up
Waiting for "Main contactor checkback"
(control word 2 bit 31, see P691)
[SW 1.8 and later]

o4
o4.0

Waiting for voltage (armature)
Waiting for voltage at power terminals 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 (the
threshold set in parameters P351 and P353 must be exceeded,
see also P078.001)
Waiting for fuse monitoring to signal OK
[SW 1.7 and later]

o4.1
o5
o5.0
o5.1

Waiting for field current
Waiting until actual field current K0266 equals > P396 (FS=50%
of field current setpoint K0275) and for "I field extern > I f min"
(see P265).
Waiting for voltage at power terminals 3U1, 3W1
(the threshold set in parameters P351 and P353 must be
exceeded, see also P078.002)

NOTE
The converter dwells in states o4 and o5 for a maximum total delay time
that is set in parameter P089. The appropriate fault message is output if
the corresponding conditions are still not fulfilled at the end of this
period.
o6
o6.0
o6.1

Wait status before the line contactor is closed
Waiting for auxiliaries to be switched on (delay in P093)
Waiting for a setpoint ≤ P091 to be applied to the ramp-function
generator input (K0193)

o7
o7.0
o7.1

Waiting for switch-on command (=READY TO SWITCH ON)
Waiting for switch-on command via terminal 37.
Waiting for switch-on command via binector (acc. to selection in
P654) or control word, bit 0 (acc. to selection in P648).
Waiting for cancellation of internal shutdown through input of an
internal shutdown command or
waiting for cancellation of command "Braking with field reversal"

o7.2

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

10-5

PNU

Description

o7.3
o7.4
o7.5
o7.6
o7.9

o8
o8.0
o8.1
o9
o9.0
o9.1
o9.2
o9.3

o10
o10.0
o10.1
o10.2
o10.3
o10.4
o10.5
o10.6

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

Waiting for acknowledgement of starting lockout
Waiting for acknowledgement of starting lockout through input of
SHUTDOWN command (OFF1).
Simulation operation active (see under U840) [SW1.7 and later]
Fast stop (OFF3)
Fast stop has been input via binector (acc. to selection in P658)
or control word, bit 2 (acc. to selection in P648).
Fast stop has been input via binector (acc. to selection in P659).
Fast stop has been input via binector (acc. to selection in P660).
Fast stop is stored internally (memory can be reset by cancelling
FAST STOP command and entering SHUTDOWN).
Voltage disconnection (OFF2)
Voltage disconnection has been input via binector (acc. to
selection in P655) or control word, bit 1 (acc. to selection in
P648).
Voltage disconnection has been input via binector (acc. to
selection in P656).
Voltage disconnection has been input via binector (acc. to
selection in P657).
E-Stop (safety shutdown) has been input via terminal 105 or 107
Wait for receipt of a valid telegram on G-SST1 (only if telegram
failure time monitoring is set with P787 ≠ 0)
Waiting for receipt of a valid telegram on G-SST2 (only if
telegram failure time monitoring is set with P797 ≠ 0)
Waiting for receipt of a valid telegram on G-SST3 (only if
telegram failure time monitoring is set with P807 ≠ 0)
Fault
= Fxxx Fault message is displayed, red LED lights up.

o12
o12.1
o12.2
o12.3
o12.9

Electronics initialization in progress
Basic converter electronics initialization in progress
Initialization of supplementary board in location 2 in progress
Initialization of supplementary board in location 3 in progress
Restructuring of parameters in non-volatile storage after
software update (takes approx. 15s)

o13
o13.0

Software update in progress
Waiting for arrival of start command from HEXLOAD PC routine
(press the DOWN key to abort this status and start a RESET)
Deletion of Flash EPROM in progress
Display of address currently being programmed
The Flash EPROM has been successfully programmed
(a RESET is performed automatically after approx. 1 second)
Programming of the Flash EPROM has failed
(press UP key to return to operating state o13.0)

o13.3

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

Waiting for completion of "Restore factory settings" operation.
Waiting for switch-on command before execution of an
optimization run
Wait for completion of "Read in parameter set" operation.
Wait for completion of "Load MLFB" operation (performed at
factory)
reserved for firmware download for optional supplementary
modules
[SW 2.0 and later]

o11
o11.0

o13.1
xxxxx
o13.2

10-6

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

o14

Loading of boot sector in progress
(this operation is performed only in factory)

o15

Electronics not connected to voltage
Dark display: Waiting for voltage at terminals 5U1, 5W1
(electronics supply voltage).

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

PNU

10.2

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

-200.0 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-200.0 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-200.0 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-200.0 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-200.0 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-200.0 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-200.0 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-200.0 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-200.0 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%

Ind: None
Type: I2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: I2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: I2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: I2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: I2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: I2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: I2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: I2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: I2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: V2

P052 = 3

General visualization parameters

r001

Display of terminals 4 and 5 (main setpoint)

(G113)
r002

Analog input, terminals 103 and 104 (main actual value)

(G113)
r003

Analog input, terminals 6 and 7 (selectable input 1)

(G113)
r004

Analog input, terminals 8 and 9 (selectable input 2)

(G114)
r005

Analog input, terminals 10 and 11 (selectable input 3)

(G114)
r006

Analog output, terminals 14 and 15

(G115)
r007

Display of output value before normalization and offset

(G115)
r008

Display of output value before normalization and offset

(G116)
r009

Display of output value before normalization and offset

(G116)
r010

Display of output value before normalization and offset

Analog output, terminals 16 and 17

Analog output, terminals 18 and 19

Analog output, terminals 20 and 21

Display of status of binary inputs
Representation on operator panel (PMU):

(G110)

Segment ON:
Segment OFF:

15

14

13

12

11

10 9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

0

1

Corresponding terminal is activated
(HIGH level is applied)
Corresponding terminal is not activated
(LOW level is applied)

Segment or bit
0 ....... Terminal 36
1 ....... Terminal 37 (switch-on)
2 ....... Terminal 38 (operating enable)
3 ....... Terminal 39
4 ....... Terminal 40
5 ....... Terminal 41
6 ....... Terminal 42
7 ....... Terminal 43
8 ....... Terminal 211
9 ....... Terminal 212
10 ....... Terminal 213
11 ....... Terminal 214
12 ....... Safety shutdown (E-Stop is applied) 1)
13 ....... (not used)
14 ....... (not used)
15 ....... (not used)
1) The safety shutdown command is applied (segment dark) if
- terminal XS-105 is open (switch operation, see also Section 9)
or
- terminal XS-107 (Stop pushbutton) is opened briefly and terminal XS108 (Reset pushbutton) is not yet activated (pushbutton operation,
see also Section 9)

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

10-7

PNU

Description

r011

Display of status of binary outputs

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: None
Type: V2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3

-58 to +200
[°C]
1°C

Ind: 2
Type: I2

P052 = 3

-47 to +200
[°C]
1°C
0.0 to 200.0
[%]
0.1%

Ind: None
Type: I2

P052 = 3

Ind: 2
Type: O2

P052 = 3

0.0 to 2800.0
[V]
0.1V

Ind: None
Type: O2

P052 = 3

0.0 to 800.0
[V]
0.1V

Ind: None
Type: O2

P052 = 3

0.00 to 120.00
[Hz]
0.01Hz
0.00 to 180.00
[degrees]
0.01degrees
-400.0 to 400.0
[% of P100]
0.1% of P100

Ind: None
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: I2

P052 = 3

0.0 to 300.0
[% of P100]
0.1% of P100
-400.0 to 400.0
[%]
0.1% (see column on
left)

Ind: None
Type: I2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: I2

P052 = 3

Representation on operator panel (PMU):
(G112)
(G117)

15

14

7

6

13

12

11

10

9

8

5

4

3

2

1

0

Segment ON:

Corresponding terminal is activated
(HIGH level is applied) or overloaded or short-circuited

Segment OFF:

Corresponding terminal is not activated
(LOW level is applied) or not overloaded or not shortcircuited

Display of status of binary output terminals:
Segment or bit
0 ..... Terminal 46
1 ..... Terminal 48
2 ..... Terminal 50
3 ..... Terminal 52
7 ..... Terminal 109/110 (relay contact for line contactor)
Display of overloading of binary outputs:
Segment or bit
8 ..... Terminal 46
9 ..... Terminal 48
10 .... Terminal 50
11 .... Terminal 52
12 .... Terminal 26 (15V output)
13 .... Terminal 34, 44 and/or 210 (24V output)
r012
(G185)

Motor temperature
Display of motor temperature when a KTY 84 temperature sensor is
connected (P490.x=1).
A value of "0" is always output in r012 when a PTC thermistor or no
temperature sensor is installed.
i001:
i002:

Motor temperature 1 (sensor at terminals 22 / 23)
Motor temperature 2 (sensor at terminals 204 / 205)

r013

Heatsink temperature

r014

Temperature rise

Display of heatsink temperature
i001:
i002:
r015

Calculated motor temperature rise (see P114)
Calculated thyristor temperature rise (see P075)

Display of line voltage (armature)
(generated as arithmetic rectification average, RMS value display applies to
sinusoidal voltage, average over 3 line-to-line voltages)

r016

Display of line voltage (field)
(generated as arithmetic rectification average, RMS value display applies to
sinusoidal voltage)

r017

Display of line frequency

r018

Display of firing angle (armature)

(G163)
r019

Display of actual armature current

(G162)

The internal actual armature current value is displayed (arithmetic average
over the last 6 current peaks in each case)

r020

Display of the absolute value of armature current setpoint

(G162)
r021

Display of torque setpoint after torque limitation

(G160)

∧ 0.1% of rated motor torque (=rated motor armature current
Steps: 1 =
(P100) * magnetic flux at rated motor field current (P102))

10-8

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

r022

Display of torque setpoint before torque limitation

(G160)

∧ 0.1% of rated motor torque (=rated motor armature current
Steps: 1 =
(P100) * magnetic flux at rated motor field current (P102))

-400.0 to 400.0
[%]
0.1% (see column on
left)

r023

Display of speed controller setpoint/actual value deviation

(G152)
r024

Display of actual speed value from pulse encoder

(G145)
r025

Display of actual speed controller value

(G151)
r026

Display of speed controller setpoint

(G152)
r027

Display of ramp-function generator output

(G136)
r028

Display of ramp-function generator input

(G136)
r029

Display of main setpoint before limitation

(G135)
r034

Display of firing angle (field)

(G166)
r035

Display of field current controller actual value

(G166)
r036

Display of field current controller setpoint

(G166)
r037

Display of actual EMF value

(G165)
r038

Display of actual armature voltage value

r039

Display of EMF setpoint

(G165)

This parameter displays the EMF setpoint which is applied as the control
quantity in the field-weakening range.
This value is calculated from:
Umotorrated – Imotorrated * RA (= P101 – P100 * P110)

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

-200.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-200.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-200.0 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-200.0 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-200.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-200.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-200.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
0.00 to 180.00
[degrees]
0.01degrees
0.0 to 199.9
[% of P102]
0.1% of P102
0.0 to 199.9
[% of P102]
0.1% of P102
-1500.0 to 1500.0
[V]
0.1V
-1500.0 to 1500.0
[V]
0.1V
0.0 to 1500.0
[V]
0.1V

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: None
Type: I2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: I2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: I2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: I2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: I2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: I2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: I2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: I2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: I2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: I2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: O2

P052 = 3

10-9

PNU

Description

r040

Display of limitations:

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: None
Type: V2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3

-200.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%

Ind: 2
Type: I2

P052 = 3

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

-200.0 to 199.9
[%]
0.1%

Ind: 7
Type: I2

P052 = 3

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 7
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 1

Ind: 4
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Representation on operator panel (PMU):

Segment ON:
Segment OFF:

15

14

7

6

13

12

11

10

9

8

5

4

3

2

1

0

Corresponding limitation is reached
Corresponding limitation is not reached

Segment or bit
0
αW limit (field) reached (P251)
1
Negative current limit (field) reached (K0274)
2
αW limit (armature) reached (αW acc. to P151
for continuous current, 165° for discontinuous current)
3 ....... Negative current limit (armature) reached (K0132)
4 ....... Negative maximum speed reached (P513)
Speed limiting controller responds (B0201)
5 ....... Negative torque limit reached (B0203)
6 ....... Neg. limitation at ramp generator output reached (K0182)
7 ....... Neg. limitation at ramp generator input reached (K0197)
8 ....... αG limit (field) reached (P250)
9 ....... Positive current limit (field) reached (K0273)
10 ....... αG limit (armature) reached (P150)
11 ....... Positive current limit (armature) reached (K0131)
12 ....... Positive maximum speed reached (P512)
Speed limiting controller responds (B0201)
13 ....... Positive torque limit reached (B0202)
14 ....... Pos. limitation at ramp generator output reached (K0181)
15 ....... Pos. limitation at ramp generator input reached (K0196)
Note:

This parameter has the same bit assignments as connector K0810.

Connector and binector displays
r041
High-resolution connector display:
(G121)

i001:
i002:

Display of connector selected in P042.01
Display of connector selected in P042.02

The display value is filtered with a time constant of 300ms (see Section 8,
Sheet G121)
P042
*
(G121)

r043
(G121)

P044
*
(G121)

r045
(G121)

10-10

High-resolution connector display:
i001:
i002:

Selection of connector to be displayed in r041.01
Selection of connector to be displayed in r041.02

The display value is filtered with a time constant of 300ms (see Section 8,
Sheet G121)
Connector display:
i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:
i005:
i006:
i007:

Display of connector selected in P044.01
Display of connector selected in P044.02
Display of connector selected in P044.03
Display of connector selected in P044.04
Display of connector selected in P044.05
Display of connector selected in P044.06
Display of connector selected in P044.07

Connector display:
i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:
i005:
i006:
i007:

Selection of connector displayed in r043.01
Selection of connector displayed in r043.02
Selection of connector displayed in r043.03
Selection of connector displayed in r043.04
Selection of connector displayed in r043.05
Selection of connector displayed in r043.06
Selection of connector displayed in r043.07

Binector display:
i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:

Display of binector selected in P046.01
Display of binector selected in P046.02
Display of binector selected in P046.03
Display of binector selected in P046.04

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P046
*

Binector display:

All binector numbers
1

(G121)

r047

i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:

Selection of binector displayed in r045.01
Selection of binector displayed in r045.02
Selection of binector displayed in r045.03
Selection of binector displayed in r045.04

Display of fault diagnostic memory
Provides more detailed information about the cause of a fault after activation
of a fault message (see Section 10).
i001
i002
...
i016

(G189)

Display of time (hours) in which drive has been operating in states I, II or - -.
All times of ≥ approx. 0.1 s are included in the count.

r049

Fault time

(G189)

Display of time at which the current fault, and the last 7 acknowledged
faults, were activated.

10.3
P051
*

Ind: 16
Type: O2

P052 = 3

0 to 65535
[hours]
1 hour

Ind: None
Type: O2

P052 = 3

0 to 65535
[hours]
1 hour

Ind: 8
Type: O2

P052 = 3

0 to 4
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 ≥ 0
Online

see column on left

Ind: None
FS=40
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 ≥ 0
Online

0, 1, 3

Ind: None
FS=3
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 ≥ 0
Online

hours
hours
hours
hours
hours
hours
hours
hours

Language of plaintext display on optional OP1S operator panel and in
DriveMonitor PC service routine
German
English
Spanish
French
Italian

Access authorization levels
Key parameters
0
6
7
9
21

22
25
26
27
28
29
40
P052
*

Current fault
st
1 acknowledged fault
nd
2 acknowledged fault
rd
3 acknowledged fault
th
4 acknowledged fault
th
5 acknowledged fault
th
6 acknowledged fault
th
7 acknowledged fault

Language

0:
1:
2:
3:
4:

0 to 65535
1

Word 16 (fault number)

Hours run

P050
*

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Word 1 (fault value)
Word 2

r048

i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:
i005:
i006:
i007:
i008:

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: L2

No access authorization
Do not set (for use by DriveMonitor)
Do not set (for use by DriveMonitor)
Do not set (for use by DriveMonitor)
Restore factory settings
All parameters are reset to their defaults (factory settings).
Parameter P051 is then automatically reset to factory setting
"40".
Execute internal offset compensation (see Section 7.4)
Optimization run for precontrol and current controller (armature
and field) (see Section 7.5)
Optimization run for speed controller (see Section 7.5)
Optimization run for field weakening (see Section 7.5)
Optimization run for compensation of friction and moment of
inertia (see Section 7.5)
Optimization run for the speed controller with an oscillating
mechanical system (see Section 7.5)
Access authorization to parameter values for authorized service
personnel

Selection of display parameters
0

0 Display only parameters that are not set to original factory
settings

1

Display only parameters for simple applications

3

Display all parameters used

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

10-11

PNU

Description

P053
*

Control word for the permanent memory

P054

P055
*
(G175)

Value range
[Unit]
Steps
[SW 1.7 and later]

Disabling or enabling write accesses to the permanent memory
i001:

Disabling or enabling write accesses to the parameter memory
0 Only save parameter P053 in the permanent memory;
parameter changes are active immediately but the changed
values are only stored temporarily and are lost when the
electronics supply voltage is switched off
1 Save all parameter values in the permanent memory

i002:

Disabling or enabling write accesses to the memory of the
nonvolatile process data
0 Do not save nonvolatile process data in the permanent
memory
1 Save all nonvolatile process data in the permanent memory
If the nonvolatile process data are not stored (P053.002=0),
data are lost when the electronics supply of the SIMOREG DC
Master is switched off, i.e. they have the value 0 after the
electronics supply is switched on again:
K0240: Setpoint of the motor potentiometer
K0309: Motor heating
K0310: Thyristor heating
K9195: Output of the 1st tracking/storage element
K9196: Output of the 2nd tracking/storage element

OP1S – Background lighting
0

ON continuously

1

ON when panel is in use

Copy function data set
This parameter allows parameter set 1, 2, 3 or 4 to be copied to parameter
set 1, 2, 3 or 4. This function is applicable only to parameters with 4 indices
in the function data set (see also Section 9.1, Data sets and Section 9.11,
and Section 8, Sheet G175).
0xy

Do nothing, automatic resetting value at the end of a copy
operation.

1xy

The contents of parameter set x (source data set, x=1, 2, 3 or 4)
are copied to parameter set y (target data set, y=1, 2, 3 or 4)
(parameter set x remains unchanged, the original contents of
parameter set y are overwritten).
x and y are the respective parameter set numbers (1, 2, 3 or 4)
of the source and target parameter sets.

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 2
FS=1
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 0
on-line

0, 1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 ≥ 0
Online

011 to 143
1

Ind: None
FS=012
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

1 to 4
1
011 to 121
1

Ind: None
Type: O2
Ind: None
FS=012
Type: L2

P052 = 3

1 to 2
1

Ind: None
Type: O2

0 to 1
1

The copy operation is started by switching P055 over into parameter mode
when P055=1xy.
During the copy operation, the numbers of the parameters being copied are
displayed on the operator panel (PMU).
At the end of the copy operation, P055 is reset to P055=0xy.
r056
(G175)
P057
*
(G175)

Display of active function data set
Copy Bico data set
This parameter allows parameter set 1 or 2 to be copied to parameter set 1
or 2. This function is applicable only to parameters with 2 indices in the Bico
data set (see also Section 9.1, Data sets and Section 9.11, and Section 8,
Sheet G175).
0xy

Do nothing, automatic resetting value at the end of a copy
operation.

1xy

The contents of parameter set x (source data set, x=1 or 2) are
copied to parameter set y (target data set, y=1 or 2) (parameter
set x remains unchanged, the original contents of parameter set
y are overwritten).
x and y are the respective parameter set numbers (1 or 2) of the
source and target parameter sets.

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

The copy operation is started by switching P057 over into parameter mode
when P057=1xy.
During the copy operation, the numbers of the parameters being copied are
displayed on the operator panel (PMU).
At the end of the copy operation, P057 is reset to P057=0xy.
r058
(G175)

10-12

Display of active Bico data set

P052 = 3

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

r059

Display of operating state
Meaning as for r000

10.4

Software version

(G101)

Converter software release

r061

i001: CUD
i002: Slot D (board location 2)
i003: Slot E (board location 2)
i004: Slot F (board location 3)
i005: Slot G (board location 3)
Creation date of software

r062
(G101)

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3

0.0 to 9.9
0.1

Ind: 5
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 5
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 2
Type: L2

P052 = 3

Ind: 5
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Definition of SIMOREG DC MASTER converter

r060

(G101)

0.0 to 14.5
0.1

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: None
Type: O2

i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:
i005:

Year
Month
Day
Hour
Minute

Checksum
i001:
i002:

Converter firmware checksum
Boot sector checksum

r063

Board code

(G101)

Identification code of boards mounted in locations 1 to 3 of electronics box.
3

2

F

D

G

E

CUDx

1

Arrangement of
board locations 1 to 3
and slots D to G in
electronics box

i001:

Board in location 1
71: CUD1
72: CUD1 + CUD2

i002:

Board in slot D (upper slot of location 2)
111:
Pulse encoder board (SBP) [SW 1.8 and later]
131 to 139:
Technology board
141 to 149:
Communications board
151, 152, 161: Special board (EB1, EB2, SLB)

i003:

Board in slot E (lower slot of location 2)
111:
Pulse encoder board (SBP) [SW 1.8 and later]
131 to 139:
Technology board
141 to 149:
Communications board
151, 152, 161: Special board (EB1, EB2, SLB)

i004:

Board in slot F (upper slot of location 3)
111:
Pulse encoder board (SBP) [SW 1.8 and later]
141 to 149:
Communications board
151, 152, 161: Special board (EB1, EB2, SLB)

i005:

Board in slot G (lower slot of location 3)
111:
Pulse encoder board (SBP) [SW 1.8 and later]
141 to 149:
Communications board
151, 152, 161: Special board (EB1, EB2, SLB)

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

10-13

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

r064

Board compatibility

(G101)

Compatibility identifier of boards in locations 1 to 3 of electronics box.
The compatibility identifier is bit-coded. To ensure the compatibility of a
board, it must have a "1" setting at the same bit location of the parameter
value as the CUD (in location 1 / index i001).

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 5
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3

Ind: 5
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
FS=1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

Ind: None
Type: 02

P052 = 3

Indices:
i001: Compatibility identifier of board in location 1
i002: Compatibility identifier of board in slot D
i003: Compatibility identifier of board in slot E
i004: Compatibility identifier of board in slot F
i005: Compatibility identifier of board in slot G
Example:
Index Value
i001
253
i002
002
i003
001

Bit representation
0000 0000 1111 1101
0000 0000 0000 0010
0000 0000 0000 0001

Compatible with CUD
no
yes

r065

Software identifiers

(G101)

Extended software version identifiers in locations 1, 2, and 3 of the
electronics box
Indices:
i001: Software identifier of the board in location 1
i002: Software identifier of the board in slot D
i003: Software identifier of the board in slot E
i004: Software identifier of the board in slot F
i005: Software identifier of the board in slot G

P067
*
(G101)

Load class
1
2
3
4
5

[SW1.8 and later]

Load class DC I
Load class DC II
Load class DC III
Load class DC IV
US rating

1 to 5
1

The load classes are described in Chapter 3.4.1.
Depending on the load class selected, the device rated DC of the
SIMOREG DC Master is reduced to a value of different magnitude to suit
the power section and load class.
The current value of the device rated DC is indicated in parameter r072.002.
Notes:
If the device rated DC is reduced via parameter P076.001, the lesser of the
two values is active.
If you set a value of > 1 in P067, you must ensure that the "Dynamic
overload capability of power module“ is enabled, i.e. a value of > 0 must be
set in parameter P075.
The SIMOREG DC Master does not monitor for compliance with the criteria
of the load class set in parameter P067. If permitted by the power module,
the unit can operate for overload periods in excess of those defined by the
load class. The permissible overload period for the installed power module
is always longer than the period defined for the load class. The SIMOREG
DC Master does monitor the actual permissible overload period for the
power module. See Section 9.15.
r068
(G101)

10-14

Options according to rating plate
0
1
2
3

No option
Option L04 (low voltage, 85V)
Option K00 (terminal expansion)
L04 and K00

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

PNU

Description

r069

Serial number of SIMOREG DC Master converter

(G101)

st

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 16
Type: L2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3

0 to 120
1

Ind: None
Type: O2

P052 = 3

10 to 830
[V]
1V
0.0 to 6553.5
[A]
0.1A

Ind: None
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 2
Type: O2

P052 = 3

0.00 to 100.00
[A]
0.01A

Ind: 2
Type: O2

P052 = 3

10 to 460
[V]
1V
0 to 2
1

Ind: None
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
FS=1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

nd

i001: 1 and 2 places of serial number
rd
th
i002: 3 and 4 places of serial number
th
th
i003: 5 and 6 places of serial number
th
th
i004: 7 and 8 places of serial number
th
th
i005: 9 and 10 places of serial number
th
th
i006: 11 and 12 places of serial number
th
th
i007: 13 and 14 places of serial number
i008 to i015:
0
i016: Checksum for serial number
The serial number ASCII code is displayed in this parameter. The number is
output in plaintext on the OP1S panel.

r070

MLFB (order number) of SIMOREG DC Master converter

(G101)

The corresponding MLFB is displayed in encoded form in this parameter.
The MLFB is displayed in plaintext on the OP1S panel.

r071

Converter rated supply voltage (armature)

(G101)
r072

Converter rated supply voltage (armature) as specified on rating plate

(G101)

r073
(G101)

Converter rated DC current (armature)
i001:

Converter rated DC current (armature) as specified on rating
plate (output DC current at power terminals 1C1 and 1D1)

i002:

Actual converter rated DC current (armature) according to
setting in parameter P076.001 or P067

Converter rated DC current (field)
i001:

Converter rated DC current (field) as specified on rating plate
(output DC current at power terminals 3C and 3D)

i002:

Actual converter rated DC current (field) as set in parameter
P076.002

r074

Converter rated supply voltage (field)

(G101)
P075
*

Converter rated supply voltage (field) as specified on rating plate

(G101)
(G161)

Control word for power section
Selection of operating characteristics of thermal monitor (I2t monitoring) of
power section (see also Section 9.16 ”Dynamic overload capability of power
section”).
The ”Dynamic overload capability of the power module“ allows the
SIMOREG DC Master to operate for short periods on armature currents that
are higher than the converter rated DC current specified on the rating plate
(=r072.001).
The permissible overload period is determined solely by the power module
and the preceding operating history.
The "thermal power module monitoring" function does not monitor operation
in compliance with the load class criteria set in parameter P067. If permitted
by the power module, the unit can operate for overload periods in excess of
those defined by the load class.
0

Dynamic overload capability is not permitted
The armature current is limited to P077 * r072.001.

1

Dynamic overload capability is permitted, alarm A039
The armature current is limited to P077 * 1.8 * r072.001 as long
as the calculated thyristor temperature does not exceed the
permitted value.
If the temperature exceeds the permitted value, the SIMOREG
DC Master protects itself by reducing the current limit to P077 *
r072.001. Alarm A039 is output at the same time.
The armature current setpoint limit is not increased to P077 *
1.8 * r072.001 (alarm A039 also disappears) until the calculated
thyristor temperature has dropped below the limit value again
and the armature current setpoint is lower than the converter
rated DC current (r072.001).

2

Dynamic overload capability is permitted, fault F039
The armature current is limited to P077 * 1.8 * r072.001 as long
as the calculated thyristor temperature does not exceed the
permitted value.
Fault message F039 is output if the permissible temperature
limit is exceeded.

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

10-15

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P076
*

Reduction of converter rated DC current

see column on left

i001:
i002:

(G101)

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 2
FS=100.0
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0.50 to 1.00
0.01

Ind: None
FS=1.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

i001: 10 to r071
i002: 10 to r074
[V]
1V

Ind: 2
FS=
i001: r071
i002: 400V
except when
r071 = 460V
then 460V
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 1
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Reduction of converter rated DC current (armature)
Reduction of converter rated DC current (field)

For the purpose of achieving a close match between the converter and
motor, the converter rated DC current is reduced to the value entered here.
The current value of the device rated DC is indicated in parameter r072.002.
The following values can be set:
10.0%, 20.0%, 33.3%, 40.0%, 50.0%, 60.0%, 66.6% 70.0%, 80.0%, 90.0%
and 100.0%
Note:
If a load class is selected in parameter P067 which causes a reduction in
the converter rated DC current, then the lower of the two parameter setting
values is effective.
P077

Total thermal reduction factor

(G101)
(G161)

The factor set in this parameter effects a reduction in the armature current
limit (as defined by the setting in P075).
The converter must be derated in the following instances:
–

Operation at high ambient temperatures:
If the ambient temperature is higher than 45°C (on naturally air-cooled
converters) or 35°C (on converters with forced air-cooling), the possible
load capability of the converter decreases as a consequence of the
maximum permissible thyristor junction temperature by percentage
reduction "a" as specified in the table in Section 3.4, resulting in a
temperature reduction factor of
ktemp = k1

–

Installation altitudes of over 1000m above sea level:
In this case, the lower air density and thus less effective cooling reduce
the possible load capability of the converter to the percentage load "b1"
specified in the table in Section 3.4, resulting in an installation altitude
reduction factor of
kaltitude = k2

P077 must be set as follows: P077 = ktemp * kaltitude
Note:
A general reduction in the converter rated DC current (through appropriate
setting of parameter P076.001) can be included in this calculation.
P078
(G101)

Reduction of converter rated supply voltage
i001:
i002:

Rated input voltage converter armature
Rated input voltage converter field

The rated voltage value of the power system actually used to supply the
power section must be set in this parameter.
This setting acts as the reference for the undervoltage, overvoltage and
phase failure monitoring functions (see also P351, P352 and P353) as well
as for connectors K0285 to K0289, K0291, K0292, K0301 K0302, K0303
and K0305

NOTE
If a SIMOREG converter is operated at a rated input voltage that is
lower than its rated supply voltage, then the rated DC voltage specified
in the technical data (Section 3.4) cannot be reached !
P079
*

Short pulses / long pulses, armature gating unit
0

Short pulses (0.89 ms=approx. 16 degrees at 50 Hz) are output
on the armature gating unit.

1

Long pulses (pulse duration up to approx. 0.1 ms before next
pulse) are output on the armature gating unit (e.g. required in
cases where field is supplied via armature terminals).

(G163)

10-16

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

PNU

10.5
P080
*

Description

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

1 to 2

Ind: None
FS=1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 1
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Setting values for converter control
Control word for brake control
1

The brake is a holding brake
When the "Operating enable" command is cancelled or when
the "Voltage disconnection" or "E-Stop" command is input, the
"Close brake" command is not input until n< nmin (P370, P371)
is reached.

2

The brake is an operating brake
When the "Operating enable" command is cancelled or when
the "Voltage disconnection" or "E-Stop" command is input, the
"Close brake" command is input immediately, i.e. while the
motor is still rotating.

(G140)

P081
*

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

EMF-dependent field weakening
0

No field-weakening operation as a function of speed or EMF
(100% of rated motor field current is applied constantly as the
internal field current setpoint).

1

Field-weakening operation by internal closed-loop EMF control
to ensure that in field-weakening operation, i.e. at speeds above
the motor rated speed (="field-weakening activation limit
speed”), the motor EMF is maintained constantly at the setpoint
EMFset (K0289) = P101 – P100 * P110 (field current setpoint is
the product of the EMF controller output and the precontrol
component determined by the actual speed according to the
field characteristic).

(G165)

NOTICE
When P081=1, a valid field characteristic must be available (P117=1),
otherwise the optimization run for field weakening (P051=27) must be
executed.

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

10-17

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P082
*

Operating mode for field

0 to 24
1

(G166)

No field
0

No field is used (e.g. in the case of permanent-field motors). The
field gating pulses are disabled. Unlike all other cases, the motor
flux (K0290) is not calculated according to the field characteristic
(P120 to P139) as a function of the actual field current (K0265),
but set to the value for 100% rated flux.

1

The field is switched with the line contactor - this setting must be
selected if the mains supplies for the field and armature power
sections are connected or disconnected simultaneously (field
gating pulses are enabled/disabled at the same time as the line
contactor is closed/opened, the field current decays with the
field time constant).

2

Automatic injection of standstill field set in P257 after expiry of a
time period set in P258, after converter has reached operating
state o7 or higher.

3

Field ACTIVE continuously.

4

The field is switched with the "Auxiliaries ON“ (B0251) signal

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: None
FS=2
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Internal field power module

External field power module (40.00A field)
11

Board C98043-A7044 (40A field power module) is inserted at
connector X102 on board C98043-A7002 or C98043-A7003.
The field is controlled as described in para. 1.

12

As described in para. 11, but
the field is controlled as described in para. 2.

13

As described in para. 11, but
the field is controlled as described in para. 3.

14

As described in para. 11, but
the field is controlled as described in para. 4.
External field device

21

An external field device is used. The setpoint for the external
field device is supplied via connector K0268 (e.g. via an analog
output or the peer-to-peer interface).
The rated DC current of the external field device is set in
parameter U838. This value is also displayed in parameter
r073.001. P076.002 is inoperative.
If the external field device supplies an actual field current signal,
then this can be fed in at P612. If not, then P263 should be set
to 1 or 2.
If the external field device supplies an "I field < I field min“
signal, then this can be fed in at P265.
The field is controlled as described in para. 1.

22

As described in para. 21, but
the field is controlled as described in para. 2.

23

As described in para. 21, but
the field is controlled as described in para. 3.

24

As described in para. 21, but
the field is controlled as described in para. 4.

NOTICE
Even though changes to the parameter value from > 0 to = 0 are
accepted in operating states of ≥ o1.0, they do not take effect until the
converter reaches an operating state of ≥ o7.0.
[Values 11 to 24 can be set only in SW 1.9 and later]

10-18

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P083
*

Selection of actual speed value

0 to 4
1

FDS
(G151)

P084
*
(G160)

P085

0

Actual speed value is not yet selected (fixed value 0%)

1

Actual speed value supplied by "Main actual value” channel
(K0013) (terminals XT.103, XT.104)

2

Actual speed value supplied by "Actual speed from pulse
encoder” channel (K0040)

3

Actual speed value supplied by "Actual EMF" channel (K0287),
but weighted with P115 (operation without tacho)
Note:
The effectiveness of the overspeed monitoring function (see
Section 8, function diagram G188) is restricted, since very high
motor speeds can be reached if the EMF is utilized as the actual
speed value when the actual field current value is too low.

4

Actual speed value is wired up freely (selected in P609)

Selection of closed-loop speed / current or torque control
1

Operation under closed-loop speed control

2

Operation under closed-loop current / torque control
The setpoint supplied by the ramp-function generator output is
input as a current or torque setpoint (speed controller is
bypassed)

Wait period after cancellation of inching command
After an inching command has been cancelled, the drive dwells in operating
state o1.3 for the time period set in this parameter with the controllers
disabled, but the line contactor closed. This wait period does not commence
until n
P364), or if the actual field current drops to below 50% of the field current
setpoint for more than 0.5s (F005), then the corresponding fault message is
activated only if the fault condition has not been eliminated within the
"Automatic restart" period set in this parameter.

Voltage failure period for automatic restart

The gating pulses and controllers are disabled while the fault conditions are
present. The converter dwells in operating state o4 (in the case of armature
line voltage fault) or o5 (in the case of field line voltage or field current fault)
or in o13.
Setting this parameter to 0.00s deactivates the "Automatic restart" function.
NOTE:
Setting values higher than 2.00s are effective only in relation to the voltages
at terminals 1U1, 1V1, 1W1, 3U1 and 3W1.
A "restart time" of 2.00 s is operative in this case for the voltage at terminals
5U1 and 5W1 (electronics power supply).
P087

Brake release time

(G140)

-10.00 to -0.01 s
The "Release brake" command is delayed in relation to enabling of the
gating pulses for thyristors and controllers (i.e. operating state I, II or --) by
the delay time set in this parameter. During this period, the motor rotates
against the closed brake. This setting is useful, for example, for vertical
loads.

-10.00 to 10.00
[s]
0.01s

0.00 to +10.00 s
When a "Switch-on" or "Inching" or "Crawling" command is input with
"Operating enable", the drive dwells in operating state o1.0 for the delay
period set in this parameter; the internal controller enabling signal, and thus
enabling of the thyristor gating pulses, do not take effect until the delay
period has elapsed so as to give the holding brake time to open.

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

10-19

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P088

Brake closing time

(G140)
(G187)

When the "Switch-on" or "Inching" or "Crawling" command is cancelled, or
when the "Switch-on" command is not applied, or when the "Fast stop"
command is input, the internal controller disabling signal, and thus the
thyristor gating pulse disabling signal, is not actually activated after n 50% of the field current setpoint (K0268). The
corresponding fault message is activated if no power section voltage and no
field current is detected. This parameter specifies the maximum total delay
period in which the drive may dwell in operating states o4 and o5 (response
threshold for function which checks for voltage at power section, see
parameter P353).

P090

Stabilization time for line voltage
When the line contactor has dropped out and the "Switch-on" or "Inching" or
"Crawling" command is applied, or after a phase failure has been detected
in the armature or field mains supply with active "Automatic restart" function
(P086>0), the converter dwells in operating state o4 and o5 until voltage
appears at the power section. Line voltage is not assumed to be applied to
the power terminals until the amplitude, frequency and phase symmetry
have remained within the permissible tolerance for a period exceeding the
setting in this parameter. The parameter applies to both the armature and
field power connections.

0.00 to 10.00
[s]
0.01s

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: None
FS=0.00
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.0 to 60.0
[s]
0.1s

Ind: None
FS=2.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.01 to 1.00
[s]
0.01s

Ind: None
FS=0.02
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%

Ind: 2
FS=
i001: 199.99
i002: 0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Caution:
The setting in P090 must be lower than the settings in P086 (except when
P086=0.0) and P089!
P091

Setpoint threshold
i001:

i002:

10-20

Threshold for function "Switch on only if setpoint is low“
The converter can be switched on only if a setpoint
|K0193| ≤ P091.001 is applied to the ramp-function generator
input. If the applied setpoint is higher, the converter dwells in
state o6 after "switch-on" until the absolute setpoint value is
≤ P091.001.
Threshold for function
"Automatic pulse disable if setpoint is low“ [SW 2.0 and later]
If |n-set| (|K0193|) and |n-act| (K0166) are less than P091.002,
the firing pulses are disabled and the drive goes into state o2.0.

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P092

Delay times for field reversal

(G200)

These times are used to control a reversing contactor for reversing the field
polarity on a 1-quadrant converter with field reversal.
i001:

0.0 to 10.0
[s]
0.1s

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=
i001: 3.0
i002: 0.2
i003: 0.1
i004: 3.0
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.0 to 120.0
[s]
0.1s

Ind: None
FS=0.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.0 to 6500.0
[s]
0.1s

Ind: None
FS=0.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.00 to 1.00
[s]
0.01s

Ind: None
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.0 to 60.0
[min]
0.1min

Ind: None
FS=4.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

Delay time for the field reduction before opening of the current
field contactor
When field polarity reversal is initiated, the delay time set in
P092.i001 elapsed after reaching Ifield (K0265) < Ifield min
(P394) before the current field contactor is opened.

i002:

Delay time before actuation of the new field contactor
[only SW 1.7 and later]
After opening the current field contactor the delay time set in
P092.i002 elapsed before the field contactor for the "new" field
direction is actuated (drop-out delay time of the contactor use is
usually longer then the pick-up delay time).

i003:

Delay time for enabling the field firing pulses
[only SW 1.7 and later]
After actuation of the field contactor for the "new" field direction,
the delay time acc. to P092.i003 elapses before the field firing
pulses are enabled. This time must be longer than the pick-up
delay time of the contactor used.

i004:

Delay time after the field build-up before armature enable
[only SW 1.7 and later]
After - directly following the field firing pulse enable - the actual
field current value Ifield in the "new" field direction has reached
the value Ifield (K0265) > Ifield set (K0268)*P398/100%, the
delay time acc. to P092.i004 elapses. Then the internal
(armature) "Operating enable of field reversal" is issued, i.e. the
Stopping of the drive in operating state ≥ o1.4 is canceled. This
delay time permits waiting of the end of overshooting of the
actual field current value and therefore overshooting of the EMF
of the DC machine straight after the field current has been built
up again, before the "armature operating enable" is issued. This
is intended to prevent armature overcurrents due to excessive
EMF during overshooting.

P093

Pick-up delay for line contactor
Pick-up of the line contactor is delayed in relation to "Switch on auxiliaries"
by the time delay set in this parameter.

P094

Switch-off delay for auxiliaries
Switch-off of the auxiliaries is delayed in relation to dropout of the line
contactor by the time delay set in this parameter.

P095

Pick-up time for a contactor in the DC circuit
If the DC output (terminals 1C1 and 1D1) is switched through to the motor
via a contactor, and if this contactor is controlled by the "Relay for line
contactor" (terminals 109 and 110), then the gating pulses may not be
enabled until the contactor has safely picked up. For this purpose, it may be
necessary to parameterize an additional delay time for the pick-up
operation. The timer set in P095 commences during a pick-up operation
when the converter reaches operating state o5. If the timer has still not run
down by the time the converter exits state o4, then the converter dwells in
state o3.2 until the timer has finished.
During the time period set in P095, the "Main contactor checkback" signal
must also switch to "1" if this function is activated (see P691). Otherwise the
converter dwells in state o3.3 until the timer has finished and fault message
F004 is then output with fault value 6.

P096

After-running time for the device fan

[SW 1.6 and later]

After the drive has been shut down (operating state ≥ 7.0 reached)
the device fan continues to run until the power section has cooled down.
With this parameter you can set the minimum duration for the after-running
time.
Note:
If the field current is not switched off after the drive is shut down (see P082),
the field current can prevent cooling of the power section. In this case, the
equipment blower is never switched off.

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

10-21

PNU

Description

P097
*
(G166)

Response of field current to fault messages

P098
*

Contactor in DC circuit

10.6
P100
*
FDS
(G165)
P101
*
FDS
(G165)

P102
*
FDS
(G165)
P103
*
FDS
(G165)
P104
*
FDS
(G161)
P105
*
FDS
(G161)
P106
*
FDS
(G161)
P107
*
FDS
(G161)

10-22

Value range
[Unit]
Steps
[SW 2.1 and later]

0

Field pulses are blocked when a fault message is activated

1

Field pulses are not blocked when a fault message is activated,
but the field current setpoint cannot be increased above its
current setting.
[SW 2.1 and later]

0

The DC circuit does not include a contactor

1

The DC circuit contains a contactor which is controlled by the
“relay for the line contactor" (terminals 109 and 110).
The values for the armature voltage Ua and for EMF (K0286,
K0287, K0291, K0292, r037, r038) are set to 0% whenever
B0124 = 0 (request main contactor not active). This is because
the motor terminals are separated in this case from output
terminals 1C and 1D of the SIMOREG DC Master and it is then
impossible to measure the armature voltage Ua (or the EMF).

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: None
FS=1
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 1
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.0 to 6553.0
[A]
0.1A

Ind: 4
FS=0.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

10 to 2800
[V]
1V

Ind: 4
FS=400
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0.00 to 600.00
[A]
0.01A

Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.00 to 100.00
[A]
0.01A

Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

1 to 10000
[rev/min]
1rev/min

Ind: 4
FS=5000
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0.1 to 6553.0
[A]
0.1A

Ind: 4
FS=0.1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

1 to 10000
[rev/min]
1rev/min

Ind: 4
FS=5000
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0.1 to 6553.0
[A]
0.1A

Ind: 4
FS=0.1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 1
1

Definition of motor
Rated motor armature current (acc. to motor rating plate)
0.0

Parameter not yet set

Rated motor armature voltage (acc. to motor rating plate)
Notes:
One of the functions of this parameter is to determine the point at which
field-weakening operation commences.
If possible, the rated motor armature voltage + the voltage drop in the motor
feeder cable (for a current setting acc. to P100) should be set in P101.
Rated motor field current (acc. to motor rating plate)
0.00

Parameter not yet set

Minimum motor field current
Note:
P103 must be set to <50% of P102 to execute the optimization run for field
weakening (P051=27).
Speed n1 (acc. to motor rating plate)
st

1 point (speed value) in speed-dependent current limitation.
This parameter is used together with P105, P106, P107 and P108 to define
the characteristic of the current limiting value as a function of actual speed.
Armature current I1 (acc. to motor rating plate)
st

1 point (current value) in speed-dependent current limitation.
This parameter is used together with P104, P106, P107 and P108 to define
the characteristic of the current limiting value as a function of actual speed.
Speed n2 (acc. to motor rating plate)
nd

2 point (speed value) in speed-dependent current limitation.
This parameter is used together with P104, P105, P107 and P108 to define
the characteristic of the current limiting value as a function of actual speed.
Armature current I2 (acc. to motor rating plate)
nd

2 point (current value) in speed-dependent current limitation.
This parameter is used together with P104, P105, P106 and P108 to define
the characteristic of the current limiting value as a function of actual speed.

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P108
*

Maximum operating speed n3

1 to 10000
[rev/min]
1rev/min

FDS
(G161)

When the speed-dependent current limitation is in use, the maximum speed
which is defined by the selection of the actual speed source as set in P083,
must be entered in this parameter:

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=5000
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

When P083=1 (analog tacho):
Speed at which a tacho voltage as set in P741 is reached
When P083=2 (pulse encoder):
Same value as maximum speed set in P143
When P083=3 (operation without tacho):
Speed at which EMF as set in P115 is reached
0 to 1
1

P109
*
FDS
(G161)

Control word for speed-dependent current limitation

P110
FDS
(G162)
(G165)
P111
FDS
(G162)
(G165)
P112

Armature circuit resistance

0.000 to 32.767
[Ω]
This parameter is set automatically during the optimization run for precontrol
0.001Ω
and current controller (armature and field) (P051=25).

Ind: 4
FS=0.000
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Armature circuit inductance

0.000 to 327.67
[mH]
This parameter is set automatically during the optimization run for precontrol 0.01mH
and current controller (armature and field) (P051=25).

Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.0 to 3276.7
[Ω]
This parameter is set automatically during the optimization run for precontrol
0.1Ω
and current controller (armature and field) (P051=25).

Ind: 4
FS=0.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.50 to 2.00
0.01

Ind: 4
FS=1.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0.0 to 80.0
[min]
0.1min

Ind: 4
FS=10.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

1.00 to 140.00
[% of P078.001]
0.01%

Ind: 4
FS=100.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 1
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 2800
[V]
1V

Ind: 4
FS=340
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FDS
(G166)
P113
*
FDS

0

Speed-dependent current limitation is deactivated

1

Speed-dependent current limitation is activated

Field circuit resistance

Continuous current factor torque control / current control
This parameter defines the current to be permitted as a continuous current
2
by the I t motor monitoring function without activation of alarm message
A037 or fault message F037.
This current is the product of calculation P113 * P100.

P114

Thermal time constant of motor
(see Section 9.15)

FDS

0.0

P115

EMF at maximum speed in operation without tachometer

FDS

This parameter is used to adjust the speed in cases where the internal
actual EMF value is applied as the actual speed value. P115 defines the
EMF which corresponds to maximum speed as a percentage of P078.001.

(G151)
P117
*
FDS

I2t monitoring deactivated

Control word for field characteristic
0

No valid field characteristic has yet been recorded

1

Valid field characteristic (P118 to P139 valid)

The parameter is set automatically during the field-weakening optimization
run (P051=27).
P118
FDS
(G165)

Rated EMF value
EMF that is reached with a full field (according to parameter P102) and a
speed as set in parameter P119.
The parameter is set automatically during the field-weakening optimization
run (P051=27) and specifies in this case the setpoint EMF in the fieldweakening range.
Note:
As regards the closed-loop field-weakening control, only the ratio between
P118 and P119 is relevant. The EMF setpoint in the field-weakening range
is determined by (P101 – P100 * P110). When the setting in P100, P101 or
P110 is changed subsequently, the field-weakening optimization run need
not be repeated. However, P118 then no longer defines the setpoint EMF in
the field-weakening range.
When the setting in parameter P102 is changed subsequently, the fieldweakening optimization run must be repeated, the same applies if the
maximum speed setting is subsequently re-adjusted.

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

10-23

PNU

Description

P119

Rated speed

FDS
(G165)

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

0.0 to 199.9
[%]
Speed at which an actual EMF value as set in parameter P118 is reached at 0.1%
full field (according to parameter P102).
This parameter is set automatically during the optimization run for field
weakening (P051=27) and specifies in this case the field-weakening
activation limit speed.

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=100.0
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Note:
As regards the closed-loop field-weakening control, only the ratio between
P118 and P119 is relevant. When the setting in P100, P101 or P110 is
changed subsequently, the field-weakening optimization run need not be
repeated. However, P119 then no longer defines the field-weakening
activation limit speed.
When the setting in parameter P102 is changed subsequently, the fieldweakening optimization run must be repeated, the same applies if the
maximum speed setting is subsequently re-adjusted.

Magnetization characteristic (field characteristic)
Parameters P120 to P139 determine the curve shape of the magnetization characteristic (field characteristic) in normalized representation
(see example field characteristic below for further details).
Note:
When the setting in parameter P102 is changed subsequently, the field-weakening optimization run must be repeated, because this alters
the degree of saturation and thus the shape of the magnetization characteristic. (When parameter P100, P101 or P110, or the maximum
speed adjustment, is subsequently altered, the settings in P120 to P139 remain the same, but the values in P118 and/or P119 are
changed).
0.0
Ind: 4
P052 = 3
r120
Field current for 0% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 0)
[% of P102]
Type: O2
FDS
0.1% of P102
(G165)
(G166)
0.0 to 100.0
Ind: 4
P052 = 3
P121
Field current for 5% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 1)
[%]
FS=3.7
P051 = 40
FDS
0.1% of P102
Type: O2
Offline
(G165)
(G166)
0.0 to 100.0
Ind: 4
P052 = 3
P122
Field current for 10% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 2)
[% of P102]
FS=7.3
P051 = 40
FDS
0.1% of P102
Type: O2
Offline
(G165)
(G166)
0.0 to 100.0
Ind: 4
P052 = 3
P123
Field current for 15% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 3)
[% of P102]
FS=11.0
P051 = 40
FDS
0.1% of P102
Type: O2
Offline
(G165)
(G166)
0.0 to 100.0
Ind: 4
P052 = 3
P124
Field current for 20% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 4)
[% of P102]
FS=14.7
P051 = 40
FDS
0.1% of P102
Type: O2
Offline
(G165)
(G166)
0.0 to 100.0
Ind: 4
P052 = 3
P125
Field current for 25% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 5)
[% of P102]
FS=18.4
P051 = 40
FDS
0.1% of P102
Type: O2
Offline
(G165)
(G166)
0.0 to 100.0
Ind: 4
P052 = 3
P126
Field current for 30% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 6)
[% of P102]
FS=22.0
P051 = 40
FDS
0.1% of P102
Type: O2
Offline
(G165)
(G166)
0.0 to 100.0
Ind: 4
P052 = 3
P127
Field current for 35% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 7)
[% of P102]
FS=25.7
P051 = 40
FDS
0.1% of P102
Type: O2
Offline
(G165)
(G166)
0.0 to 100.0
Ind: 4
P052 = 3
P128
Field current for 40% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 8)
[% of P102]
FS=29.4
P051 = 40
FDS
0.1% of P102
Type: O2
Offline
(G165)
(G166)
0.0 to 100.0
Ind: 4
P052 = 3
P129
Field current for 45% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 9)
[% of P102]
FS=33.1
P051 = 40
FDS
0.1% of P102
Type: O2
Offline
(G165)
(G166)
0.0 to 100.0
Ind: 4
P052 = 3
P130
Field current for 50% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 10)
[% of P102]
FS=36.8
P051 = 40
FDS
0.1% of P102
Type: O2
Offline
(G165)
(G166)

10-24

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps
0.0 to 100.0
[% of P102]
0.1% of P102

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=40.6
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

P131
FDS
(G165)
(G166)
P132
FDS
(G165)
(G166)
P133
FDS
(G165)
(G166)
P134
FDS
(G165)
(G166)
P135
FDS
(G165)
(G166)
P136
FDS
(G165)
(G166)
P137
FDS
(G165)
(G166)
P138
FDS
(G165)
(G166)
P139
FDS
(G165)
(G166)

Field current for 55% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 11)

Field current for 60% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 12)

0.0 to 100.0
[% of P102]
0.1% of P102

Ind: 4
FS=44.6
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Field current for 65% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 13)

0.0 to 100.0
[% of P102]
0.1% of P102

Ind: 4
FS=48.9
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Field current for 70% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 14)

0.0 to 100.0
[% of P102]
0.1% of P102

Ind: 4
FS=53.6
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Field current for 75% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 15)

0.0 to 100.0
[% of P102]
0.1% of P102

Ind: 4
FS=58.9
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Field current for 80% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 16)

0.0 to 100.0
[% of P102]
0.1% of P102

Ind: 4
FS=64.9
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Field current for 85% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 17)

0.0 to 100.0
[% of P102]
0.1% of P102

Ind: 4
FS=71.8
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Field current for 90% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 18)

0.0 to 100.0
[% of P102]
0.1% of P102

Ind: 4
FS=79.8
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Field current for 95% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 19)

0.0 to 100.0
[% of P102]
0.1% of P102

Ind: 4
FS=89.1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

10-25

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

Example of a field characteristic
The example characteristic exhibits a sharper curvature (i.e. a lower degree of saturation) than the field characteristic produced by the
factory setting.

Φ

Motor flux in % of ratet flux
1)

100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
50
45
40
35
30
25

20

15
10
5
0
P129

P124
P123
P122
P121
r120

P134

P128
P127
P126
P125

P139

P133
P132

P137

P131
P130

100,0%

If

P138

Field current in % of P102

P136
P135

1) For actual field currents If of > 100% of P102, the characteristic is extended linearly for internal calculation of the motor flux.

10-26

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

PNU

10.7

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

Definition of pulse encoder, speed sensing using pulse encoder

The following types of pulse encoder can be used (type selection in P140):
1.

Pulse encoder type 1
Encoder with two pulse tracks mutually displaced by 90° (with/without zero marker)
Track 1
X173 28, 29
Track 2
X173 30, 31
Zero marker
X173 32, 33

2.

Pulse encoder type 1a
Encoder with two pulse tracks mutually displaced by 90° (with/without zero marker). The zero marker is converted internally to a
signal
in the same way as on encoder type 1.
Track 1
X173 28, 29
Track 2
X173 30, 31
Zero marker
X173 32, 33

≤ 360°
225 ± 60°

internal zero marker

3.

Pulse encoder type 2
Encoder with one pulse track per direction of rotation (with/without zero marker).
CW rotation

CCW rotation

Track 1
X173 28, 29
Track 2
X173 30, 31
Zero marker
X173 32, 33

4.

Pulse encoder type 3
Encoder with one pulse track and one output for direction of rotation (with/without zero marker).
CW rotation
Track 1
X173 28, 29
Track 2
X173 30, 31
Zero marker
X173 32, 33

CCW rotation

Pulse output
Rot. direction

Zero marker

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

10-27

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

Notes on selecting a pulse encoder (number of pulses):
The lowest speed which can be measured by a pulse encoder is calculated with the following equation:

n min [ rev / min] =21973∗

1
X ∗P141

Formula applies with a nominal measuring time of 1 ms when P146=0 and P147=0

The following applies:
X = 1 for 1x evaluation of pulse encoder signals (P144=0)
2 for 2x evaluation of pulse encoder signals (P144=1)
4 for 4x evaluation of pulse encoder signals (P144=2)
see also ”Single/multiple evaluation of encoder pulses”
Lower speeds are interpreted as n=0.
The frequency of the pulse encoder signals at terminals 28 and 29 or 30 and 31 must not be higher than 300 kHz.
The highest speed which can be measured by a pulse encoder is calculated with the following equation:

n max [ rev / min] =

18000000
P141

When selecting a pulse encoder, therefore, it is important to ensure that the lowest possible speed ≠ 0 is significantly higher than nmin and
the highest possible speed does not exceed nmax.

IM >>
IM ≤

21973
X ∗n min [ rev / min]

Equations for selection of pulses per revolution IM of pulse encoder

18000000
n max [ rev / min]

Single/multiple evaluation of encoder pulses:
The setting for single/multiple evaluation of encoder pulses is applicable for both the speed and position sensing functions.
1x evaluation:

Only the rising edges of one pulse track are evaluated (applies to all encoder types).

2x evaluation:

The rising and falling edges of one pulse track are evaluated (can be set for encoder types 1, 1a and 2).

4x evaluation:

The rising and falling edges of both pulse tracks are evaluated (can be set for encoder types 1 and 1a)

See parameters P450 and P451 for position sensing function
P140

Selection of pulse encoder type

(G145)

See beginning of this Section (11.8) for pulse encoder types
0
1
2
3
4

Number of pulses of pulse encoder

(G145)
P142

Matching to pulse encoder signal voltage
0
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

1 to 32767
[pulses/rev]
1 pulse/rev
0 to 1
1

Ind: None
FS=500
Type: O2
Ind: None
FS=1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

No encoder/"Speed sensing with pulse encoder" function not
selected
Pulse encoder type 1
Pulse encoder type 1a
Pulse encoder type 2
Pulse encoder type 3

P141

(G145)

0 to 4
1

Pulse encoder outputs 5 V signals
Pulse encoder outputs 15V signals

Matching of internal operating points to signal voltage of incoming pulse
encoder signals.

CAUTION
Resetting parameter P142 to the alternative setting does not switch
over the supply voltage for the pulse encoder (terminals X173.26 and
27). Terminal X173.26 always supplies +15V. An external voltage
supply is must be provided for pulse encoders requiring a 5V supply.

10-28

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P143
FDS
(G145)

Setting the maximum speed for pulse encoder operation

1.0 to 6500.0
[rev/min]
0.1rev/min

The speed set in this parameter corresponds to an actual speed (K0040) of
100%.

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=500.0
Type: O4

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Control parameters for speed sensing with pulse encoder P144 to P147:
P144 and P147 determine the basic setting for actual speed sensing by means of pulse encoder (single or multiple evaluation of pulse
encoder signals and nominal measuring time) and thus also define the lowest possible measurable speed (minimum speed).
P145 and P146 can be used in special cases to extend the measurable speed range down to even lower speeds, on the basis of the
minimum speed defined by the settings in P144 and P147.
P144
*
FDS
(G145)

P145
*
FDS
(G145)

Multiple evaluation of encoder signals
0
1
2

1x evaluation of pulse encoder signals
2x evaluation of pulse encoder signals (for encoder types 1, 1a, 2)
4x evaluation of pulse encoder signals (for encoder types 1, 1a)

0 to 2
1

Ind: 4
FS=2
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 1
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 1
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Note:
In contrast to the 1x evaluation method, 2x or 4x evaluation reduces the
minimum measurable speed by a factor of 2 or 4 respectively, but may
produce an "unsteady" actual speed value on encoders with unequal
pulse/pause ratio or without an exact 90° displacement between encoder
signals.
Automatic measuring range switchover for measurement of low
speeds - switchover of multiple evaluation
0

Automatic switchover of multiple evaluation of pulse encoder
signals OFF (i.e. P144 is always active)

1

Automatic switchover of multiple evaluation of pulse encoder
signals ON (i.e. when P144 = 0, 2x evaluation is selected for low
speeds and 4x evaluation for very low speeds. When P144 = 1,
4x evaluation is selected for low speeds)
As opposed to P145 = 0, this setting reduces the minimum
measurable speed by up to a factor of 4.

Caution:
Switching over the multiple evaluation method for encoder pulses also
affects the position sensing function in the measuring channel. For this
reason, this setting may not be used in conjunction with positioning
operations. Connectors K0042 to K0044 are inoperative when P145 = 1.
P146
*
FDS
(G145)

Automatic measuring range switchover for measurement of low
speeds - switchover of measuring time
0

Automatic switchover of measuring time OFF
(i.e. P147 is always active)

1

Automatic switchover of measuring time ON
This setting extends the measuring time for low speeds (based
on the measuring time set in P147, i.e. when P147 = 0, the
nominal measuring time is switched over to 2 ms for low speeds
and to 4 ms for very low speeds. When P147 = 1, the nominal
measuring time is switched over to 4 ms for low speeds)

Caution:
When P146=1, the minimum measurable speed can be reduced by up to a
factor of 4 as opposed to a 0 setting. However, this setting results in a
longer actual speed sensing delay in the extended minimum speed range.

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

10-29

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P147
*

Nominal measuring time of pulse encoder signal evaluation

0 to 20
1

FDS
(G145)

0

Nominal measuring time 1 ms, gating-pulse-synchronized
measurement

1

Nominal measuring time 2 ms, gating-pulse-synchronized
measurement (produces "steadier" actual speed value than
setting 0)

2

Nominal measuring time 4 ms, gating-pulse-synchronized
measurement (for drives with high moment of inertia, produces
"steadier" actual speed value than setting 0)

12

Nominal measuring time 0.2 ms, asynchronous measurement

13
...
20

Nominal measuring time 0.3 ms, asynchronous measurement

Note:
12 to 20

P148
*
FDS
(G145)

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Ind: 4
FS=1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Nominal measuring time 1 ms, asynchronous measurement
Nominal measuring time 0.2 ms to 1 ms, asynchronous
measurement
for highly dynamic drives, reduces dead time in the actual speed
value channel, but "less steady" actual speed value than
achieved with setting 0 to 2 [can be set only in SW 1.9 and later]

Notice:
When P147=1 or 2 the minimum measurable speed can be reduced by a
factor of 2 or 4 respectively as opposed to 0 or 12 to 20. However, these
settings increase the actual speed sensing delay. For this reason, P200
should be parameterized to at least 5ms before the optimization run for the
speed controller is executed.
Pulse encoder monitoring function
0

Pulse encoder monitoring OFF (activation of F048 in response
to a defective pulse encoder is disabled)

1

Pulse encoder monitoring ON (hardware monitoring of pulse
encoder signals for implausible behaviour (i.e. frequent speed
changes, distance between edges too short, encoder cable
defect or short between two encoder cables) may cause
activation of F048)

0 to 1
1

10.8 Closed-loop armature current control,auto-reversing stage,armature gating
unit
P150

Alpha G limit (armature)

FDS

Rectifier stability limit for firing angle of armature converter.

0 to 165
[degrees]
1 degrees

(G163)
P151

Alpha W limit (armature)

FDS

Inverter stability limit for firing angle of armature converter.

120 to 165
[degrees]
1 degrees

(G163)
P152
*
FDS

See also parameter P192 (Control word for Alpha W limit)
Line frequency correction (armature)

1 to 20

(G163)

P153
*
FDS
(G162)

10-30

The internal line synchronization for the armature gating pulses derived from
the power terminals (armature mains infeed) is averaged over the number of
line periods set in this parameter. In operation on "weak" power supplies
with unstable frequencies, for example, on a diesel-driven generator
(isolated operation), this parameter must be set lower than for operation on
"constant V/Hz" systems in order to achieve a higher frequency correction
speed.
0 to 3
Control word for the armature precontrol
1
0
Armature precontrol disabled, output of the precontrol=165°
1

Armature precontrol active

2

Armature precontrol active but EMF influence only active on
change in torque direction

3

Armature precontrol active but without EMF influence., i.e. for
precontrol, the EMF is assumed to be 0.
(recommended setting for supplying large inductance from
armature terminals, e.g. solenoids, field supply)
[can only be set on SW 1.7 and later]

Ind: 4
FS=5 / 30
(for 1Q / 4Q
converters)
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=150
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Ind: 4
FS=20
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Ind: 4
FS=1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P154
*
FDS
(G162)

Set armature current controller I component to zero

0 to 1
1

P155

Armature current controller P gain

FDS

Proportional gain of armature current controller
This parameter is automatically set during the optimization run for precontrol
and current controller (armature and field) (P051=25).

(G162)

0
1

Set controller I component to zero (i.e. to obtain pure P
controller)
Controller I component is active

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=1
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Ind: 4
FS=0.10
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Ind: 4
FS=0,200
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 1
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0.000 to 1.000
[s]
0.001s

Ind: 4
FS=0.000
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.00 to 100.00
[%]
0.01% of n controller
output

Ind: 4
FS=0.01
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.000 to 2.000
[s]
0.001s

Ind: 4
FS=0.000
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 100
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 1
1

Ind: 4
FS=1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0.01 to 200.00
0.01

See also parameter P175
P156
FDS

0.001 to 10.000
[s]
This parameter is automatically set during the optimization run for precontrol 0.001s
and current controller (armature and field) (P051=25).
Armature current controller reset time

(G162)

See also parameter P176

P157
*

Control word for current setpoint integrator

FDS

0

Reduced gearbox stressing
The integrator is active only after a change in torque direction
(acts as ramp-function generator for armature current setpoint
only until the output reaches the setpoint at the integrator input
st
for the 1 time after a change in torque direction).

1

Current setpoint integrator
The integrator is always active (acts as ramp-function generator
for the armature current setpoint)

(G162)

P158
FDS
(G162)

Ramp-up time for current setpoint integrator (reduced gearbox
stressing)
Period of an acceleration ramp with a setpoint step change from 0% to
100% at r072.002.
For older DC machines (i.e. unsuitable for steep rates of current rise),
P157=1 and P158=0.040 must be set.

P159

Switchover threshold for auto-reversing stage (armature)

FDS

requested torque direction
0.05%

(G163)
I
0

Speed controller output

II
P159

P160

Additional torque-free interval

FDS
(G163)

Additional torque-free interval for torque direction change in 4Q operation.
It is particularly important to set this parameter to values of > 0 for converter
armatures which supply large inductances (e.g. lifting solenoids).

P161

Additional Alpha W pulses with disabled second pulses

FDS

Number of additional Alpha W pulses with disabled second pulses after
detection of I=0 message prior to a change in torque direction.
It is particularly important to set this parameter to values of > 0 for converter
armatures which supply large inductances (e.g. lifting solenoids).

(G163)

These pulses cause the current to decay prior to a change in torque
direction. When it drops below the thyristor holding current value, the
current is suddenly chopped by the unfired second thyristor and the residual
energy stored in the load inductor must be dissipated via a suppressor
circuit (e.g. a varistor) to prevent the load inductor from producing a surge
voltage. See also P179.
P162
*
FDS
(G162)

EMF calculation method for armature precontrol
0

The EMF derived from the measured armature voltage is
applied

1

The EMF derived from the calculated armature voltage is
applied
(the purpose of this setting is to prevent the occurrence of any
low-frequency (< 15 Hz) armature current fluctuations)

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

10-31

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P163
*

EMF filtering method for armature precontrol

0 to 3
1

FDS
(G162)

0

No filtering

1

Filtering element, filter time constant = approx. 10 ms
(for use by works engineers only)

2

Averaging over the last 2 EMF values
(for use by works engineers only )

3

Averaging over the last 3 EMF values

P164
*
FDS
(G162)

Set armature current controller P component to zero

P165
*

Select the binector to control the "Enable a torque direction for torque
direction change" function

0
1

Set controller P component to zero (i.e. to obtain pure I
controller)
Controller P component is active

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=3
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 1
1

Ind: 4
FS=1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All binector numbers
1

Ind: 2
FS=220
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 1
1

Ind: 4
FS=1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 1
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

BDS
(G163)

0 = Binector B0000
1 = Binector B0001
etc.
Binector status =
0 ... Enable for M0 or MII
1 ... Enable for M0 or MI

10.9
P169
*
FDS
(G160)
P170
*
FDS
(G160)

Current limitation, torque limitation
Select closed-loop torque / current control
See parameter P170
Select closed-loop torque / current control
P169

P170

0

0

Closed-loop current control and current limitation

0

1

Closed-loop torque control with torque limitation (the
torque setpoint is converted to a current setpoint: Current
setpoint = torque setpoint / motor flux)
Current limitation is active additionally

1

0

Closed-loop current control with torque limitation (the
specified torque limit is converted to a current limit:
Current limit = torque limit / motor flux)
Current limitation is active additionally

1

1

Do not set!

Note:
A valid field characteristic (P117=1) must be available when P169 or
P170=1. If one is not, the optimization run for field weakening (P051=27)
must be executed.
P263 determines the input quantity for the motor flux calculation.
P171
FDS
(G160)
(G161)
P172
FDS
(G160)
(G161)
P173
*

System current limit in torque direction I

0.0 to 300.0
[% of P100]
0.1% of P100

Ind: 4
FS=100.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

System current limit in torque direction II

-300.0 to 0.0
[% of P100]
0.1% of P100

Ind: 4
FS=-100.0
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Source for "Torque control / Current control" switchover
[SW 1.9 and later]

All binector numbers
1

BDS

The binector selected here has the same effect as parameter P170.
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 4
FS=1
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

(G160)
P175
*
FDS
(G162)

10-32

Source for variable P gain

[SW 1.8 and later]

The content of the selected connector acts as the P gain for the armature
current controller after multiplication with P155.

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

PNU

Description

P176
*
FDS
(G162)
P177
*

Source for variable Integration time

BDS

A low signal causes the armature firing pulses to be disabled immediately
without waiting for the I=0 signal or without outputting alpha-W pulses for
current reduction. The additional alpha-W pulses (acc. to parameter P161)
are not output either. As long as this command is pending, it is not possible
to fall below operating state o1.6.

(G163)

Value range
[Unit]
Steps
[SW 1.8 and later]

The content of the selected connector acts as the integration time for the
armature current controller after multiplication with P156.
Source for the command "no immediate pulse disable"
[SW 1.8 and later]

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=1
Type: L2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

All binector numbers
1

Ind: 2
FS=1
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

All binector numbers
1

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

0 to 100
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

All connector
numbers
1

This command can be used, for example, if it is not a motor that is supplied
by the SIMOREG DC Master but a field and the current is to be reduced via
an external parallel-connected de-excitation resistance.
P178
*

Source for the command "fire all thyristors simultaneously"
[SW 1.8 and later]

BDS

Setting this command (high signal) causes all six thyristors of the thyristor
bridge I to be fired continuously and simultaneously. Switchover to long
pulses is automatic. This command is only active if no line voltage is applied
to the armature power section .

(G163)

P179
FDS
(G163)

Additional Alpha W pulses with disabled second pulses
[SW 1.9 and later]
Number of additional Alpha W pulses with disabled second pulses after
detection of I=0 message prior to a change in torque direction.
It is particularly important to set this parameter to values of > 0 for converter
armatures which supply large inductances (e.g. lifting solenoids).
These pulses cause the current to decay before a change in torque
direction; the thyristors are fired in pairs to prevent sudden chopping, and
the generation of a surge voltage by the load inductor, when the current
drops below the thyristor holding current.
When a change in torque direction is required, the current in the existing
direction must be reduced.
This is achieved in the following ways:
If P179 > 0:
1) Alpha W pulses with enabled second pulses
until the I=0 signal arrives
2) Additional Alpha W pulses with enabled second pulses
(number as set in P179.F)
3) Additional Alpha W pulses with disabled second pulses
(number as set in P161.F)
4) Additional torque-free interval (period as set in P160.F)
If P179 = 0:
1) Alpha W pulses with disabled second pulses
until the I=0 signal arrives
2) Additional Alpha W pulses with disabled second pulses
(number as set in P161.F)
3) Additional torque-free interval (period as set in P160.F)

P180

Positive torque limit 1

-300.00 to 300.00
Ind: 4
[%]
FS=300.00
0.01%
Type: I2
of rated motor torque

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Negative torque limit 1

-300.00 to 300.00
Ind: 4
[%]
FS=-300.00
0.01%
Type: I2
of rated motor torque

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Positive torque limit 2

-300.00 to 300.00
Ind: 4
[%]
FS=300.00
0.01%
Type: I2
of rated motor torque

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

-300.00 to 300.00
Ind: 4
[%]
FS=-300.00
0.01%
Type: I2
of rated motor torque

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

FDS
(G160)
P181
FDS
(G160)
P182

(G160)

If "Torque limit switchover" is selected (state of binector selected in P694
=1) and the speed is higher than the threshold speed set in parameter
P184, then torque limit 2 is activated in place of torque limit 1.

P183

Negative torque limit 2

FDS

If "Torque limit switchover" is selected (state of binector selected in P694
=1) and the speed is higher than the threshold speed set in parameter
P184, then torque limit 2 is activated in place of torque limit 1.

FDS

(G160)

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

10-33

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P184

Threshold speed for torque limits

FDS

If "Torque limit switchover" is selected (state of binector selected in P694
=1) and the speed (K0166) is higher than the threshold speed set in
parameter P184, then torque limit 2 (P182, P183) is activated in place of
torque limit 1 (P180, P181).

0.00 to 120.00
[%]
0.01%
of maximum speed

(G160)

P190
FDS
(G162)

P191

Filter time for setpoint for armature current precontrol
[SW 1.9 and later]
Filtering of the armature current setpoint at the input of the precontrol for the
armature current controller.
The purpose of this filter is to decouple the armature current precontrol from
the armature current controller.
Filter time for setpoint for armature current controller
[SW 1.9 and later]

FDS
(G162)

Filtering of the armature current setpoint at the input of the armature current
controller.
The purpose of this filter is to decouple the armature current precontrol from
the armature current controller.

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

0 to 1
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

1 to 140
[Hz]
1Hz
0 to 3
1

Ind: 4
FS=1
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

1 to 140
[Hz]
1Hz
0 to 3
1

Ind: 4
FS=1
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 1000
[ms]
1ms
0 to 100
[ms]
1ms

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.0 to 10.0
[%]
0.1%

Ind: None
Type: O2

P052 = 3

10.10 Auto-reversing stage, armature gating unit
P192
*
FDS

Control word for the Alpha W limit (armature)

[as of SW 2.1]

0

Continuous current:
Inverter stability limit for the delay angle of the armature
converter (Alpha W) = value according to parameter P151
Intermittent current:
Alpha W = 165°

1

Inverter stability limit for the delay angle of the armature
converter (Alpha W) = value according to parameter P151

(G163)

10.11 Speed controller
further parameters for the speed controller P550 - P567
Setting values for speed controller - actual value/setpoint processing
P200

Filter time for actual speed controller value

FDS
(G152)

Filtering of the actual speed value by means of a PT1 element.
This filter setting is taken into account by the speed controller optimization
run (P051=26).

P201
FDS
(G152)
P202

Band-stop 1: Resonant frequency

FDS
(G152)
P203
FDS
(G152)
P204
FDS
(G152)

Band-stop 1: Quality
0
1
2
3

Quality = 0.5
Quality = 1
Quality = 2
Quality = 3

Band-stop 2: Resonant frequency

Band-stop 2: Quality
0
1
2
3

Quality = 0.5
Quality = 1
Quality = 2
Quality = 3

P205
FDS
(G152)
P206
FDS
(G152)

D element: Derivative-action time

r217

Indication of the active droop of the speed controller [SW 1.7 and later]

(G151)

10-34

D element: Filter time

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

r218
(G151)
(G152)
r219
(G151)
(G152)

Indication of the active integration time of the speed controller
[SW 1.7 and later]

0.010 to 10.000
[s]
0.001s
0.01 to 200.00
0.01

P221

Speed controller: Hysteresis for speed-dependent PI/P controller
switchover
[SW 1.9 and later]

FDS
(G152)
P222
FDS
(G152)

Display of effective P gain of speed controller

See P222 for further details.
Speed controller: Speed-dependent switchover threshold for PI / P
controller
0.00

Automatic switchover from PI to P controller deactivated.

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: None
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 4
FS=2.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 1
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 3
1

Ind: 4
FS=1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0.10 to 200.00
0.01

Ind: 4
FS=3.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.010 to 10.000
[s]
0.001s

Ind: 4
FS=0,650
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.00 to 100.00
[%]
0.01% of maximum
speed
0.00 to 10.00
[%]
0.01% of maximum
speed

> 0.00 Depending on the actual speed (K0166), the PI controller
switches over to a P controller if the speed drops below the
threshold set in parameter P222. The integrator is not switched
in again (with value of 0) until the actual speed is > P222 +
P221.
This function allows the drive to be stopped without overshoot
using a zero setpoint with the controllers enabled.
This function is active only if the binector selected in P698 is in
the log. "1" state.

Setting values for speed controller
P223
*
FDS
(G152)
P224
*
FDS
(G152)

Control word for speed controller precontrol
0
1

Speed controller precontrol disabled
Speed controller precontrol acts as torque setpoint (is added to
n controller output)

Control word for speed controller I component
0
1
2
3

Set controller I component to 0 (i.e. to achieve a pure P
controller)
Controller I component is active
The I component is stopped when a torque or current limit is
reached
Controller I component is active
The I component is stopped when a torque limit is reached
Controller I component is active
The I component is stopped only when ±199.99% is reached

P225

Speed controller P gain

FDS

See also setting values for "Speed controller adaptation" function (P550 to
P559).
This parameter is set automatically during the speed controller optimization
run (P051=26).

(G151)
P226
FDS
(G151)

Speed controller reset time
This parameter is set automatically during the speed controller optimization
run (P051=26).

Speed controller droop
Function: A parameterizable feedback loop can be connected in parallel to the I and P components of the speed controller (acts on
summation point of setpoint and actual value).
0.0 to 10.0
Ind: 4
P052 = 3
P227
Speed controller droop
[%]
FS=0.0
P051 = 40
A 10% speed droop setting causes a 10% deviation in the speed from the
0.1%
Type: O2
Online
FDS
setpoint at a 100% controller output (100% torque or armature current
setpoint)
("softening"
of
closed-loop
control).
(G151)
See also P562, P563, P630 and P684
P228

Filter time for speed setpoint

FDS

Filtering of setpoint by means of a PT1 element.
This parameter is automatically set to the same value as the speed
controller reset time during the speed controller optimization run (P051=26).
It may be useful to parameterize lower values when the ramp-function
generator is in use.

(G152)

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

10-35

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P229
*

Control of I component tracking for slave drive

0 to 1
1

0

FDS
(G152)

1

On a slave drive, the I component of the speed controller is
made to follow such that M(set, ncontr.) = M(set, limit),
the speed setpoint is set to the actual speed value
Tracking deactivated
[SW 1.9 and later]

P230

Setting period of speed controller integrator

FDS

After a positive edge at the binector set in P695, the integrator of the speed
controller is set to the instantaneous value of the connector set in P631.
If a time of > 0 is set on P230, this setting operation is not performed just
once, but the speed controller integrator is set continually to the setting
value for the parameterized time period.

(G152)

P234
*

Set speed controller P component to zero
0

FDS
(G152)

1

Set controller P component to zero (i.e. to obtain a pure I
controller)
Controller P component is active

P236
*

Specifying the dynamic response of the speed control loop
[SW 2.0 and later]

FDS

The parameter value is used as the optimization criterion for the speed
control loop.

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

0 to 1
1

Ind: 4
FS=1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

10 to 100
[%]
1

Ind: 4
FS=75
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
online

0 to 180
[degrees]
1 degree
0 to 180
[degrees]
1 degree
0 to 200
[ms]
1ms

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=180
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=200
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 1
1

Ind: 4
FS=1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 1
1

Ind: 4
FS=1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0.01 to 100.00
0.01

Ind: 4
FS=5.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Note:
Changes to this value do not take effect until the speed controller
optimization run (P051 = 26, see Section 7.5) has been executed.
Setting instructions:
For drives, for example, with gear backlash, optimization should be
started with low dynamic response values (from 10%).
For drives with top synchronism and dynamic response requirements,
values up to 100% should be used.

-

10.12 Closed-loop field current control, field gating unit
P250
FDS
(G166)
P251
FDS
(G166)
P252
*
FDS
(G166)

Alpha G limit (field)
Rectifier stability limit for firing angle of field converter
Alpha W limit (field)
Inverter stability limit for firing angle of field converter
Filtering of line frequency correction (field)
The internal line synchronization for the field gating pulses derived from the
field mains infeed terminals is filtered with this time constant. In operation
on "weak" power supplies with unstable frequencies, for example, on a
diesel-driven generator (isolated operation), the filter time constant must be
set lower than for operation on "constant V/Hz" systems in order to achieve
a higher frequency correction speed.
Using the units position, the line synchronization function can be altered
additionally as follows:
When the parameter is set to an uneven number, the measured line zero
crossings for line synchronization are subjected to an extra "filter", may
improve performance in the case of difficulties with brief mains interruptions
(e.g. power supply via sliding current collectors), but may only be set for
constant V/Hz power supplies (not for weak isolated supply systems).

P253
*
FDS
(G166)

Control word for field precontrol
0

Field precontrol disabled, precontrol output = 180°

1

Field precontrol active, output is dependent on field current
setpoint, field line voltage, P112

P254
*
FDS
(G166)

Set field current controller I component to zero

P255

Field current controller P gain

FDS
(G166)

This parameter is set automatically during the optimization run for precontrol
and current controller (armature and field) (P051=25).

10-36

0
1

Set controller I component to zero (i.e. to obtain pure P
controller)
Controller I component is active

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

PNU

Description

P256

Field current controller reset time

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=0,200
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.0 to 100.0
[%]
0.1% of P102

Ind: 4
FS=0.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.0 to 60.0
[s]
0.1s

Ind: 4
FS=10.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

0 to 2
1

Ind: 4
FS=1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 1
1

Ind: 4
FS=1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All binector numbers
1

Ind: 2
FS=1
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

FDS
(G166)

0.001 to 10.000
[s]
This parameter is set automatically during the optimization run for precontrol 0.001s
and current controller (armature and field) (P051=25).

P257

Standstill field

FDS
(G166)

Value to which the field current is reduced when "Automatic field current
reduction" function is parameterized (by means of P082=2) or with signaldriven selection of "Standstill excitation" function (selected in P692).

P258

Delay time with automatic field current reduction

FDS
(G166)

Delay after which the field current is reduced to the value set in parameter
P257 with automatic or signal-driven "Field current reduction" function when
the drive is stopped after operating state o7.0 or higher is reached.

P260

Filter time for setpoint for field current precontrol

FDS

Filtering of the field current setpoint at the input of the precontrol for the field
current controller.
The purpose of this filter is to decouple the field current precontrol from the
field current controller.
Filter time for setpoint for field current controller
[SW 1.9 and later]

(G166)
P261
FDS
(G166)
P263
*
FDS

[SW 1.9 and later]

Filtering of the field current setpoint at the input of the field current
controller.
The purpose of this filter is to decouple the field current precontrol from the
field current controller.
Input quantity for motor flux calculation
0

The input quantity for the motor flux calculation is the field
current controller actual value according to P612 (K0265), to be
used in connection with a fully compensated DC machine

1

The input quantity for the motor flux calculation is the precontrol
output for the EMF controller (K0293)
(exception: Field current controller setpoint (K0268) with active
standstill field or with disabled field pulses), to be used in
connection with an non-compensated DC machine. The EMF
controller must be active when this setting is selected (EMF
controller compensates the armature reaction).

2

The input quantity for the motor flux calculation is the field
current controller setpoint (K0268). Advantage: Quantities
derived from the setpoint are generally "steadier" than those
derived from actual values.

(G166)

P264
*
FDS
(G166)

Set field current controller P component to zero

P265
*

Source for selection of external field current monitoring signal
[SW 1.9 and later]

BDS

Selection of the binector to supply the field monitoring signal when an
external field device is used.
(status "1" = field current is o.k., If > If-min)

(G167)

0
1

Set controller P component to zero (i.e. to obtain pure I
controller)
Controller P component is active

The converter waits for this signal in state o5.0 as part of the power ON
routine. If the signal disappears during operation, the drive is shut down with
fault message F005, fault value 4.
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

10-37

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

0 to 1
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 1
1

Ind: 4
FS=1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 1
1

Ind: 4
FS=1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0.10 to 100.00
0.01

Ind: 4
FS=0.60
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.010 to 10.000
[s]
0.001s

Ind: 4
FS=0.200
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

EMF controller droop

0.0 to 10.0
[%]
0.1%

Ind: 4
FS=0.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Filter time for setpoint for EMF controller precontrol [SW 1.9 and later]

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

10.13 Closed-loop EMF control
P272
*

Operating mode of closed-loop EMF control
0

(G165)

Fault message F043 (”EMF too high for braking operation") is
active: If the EMF is too high when a torque direction change is
requested (i.e. if the calculated firing angle (K0101) for the
armature current in the new torque direction is > 165 degrees),
both torque directions are disabled. If, at the same time, the
absolute value of the armature current required in the new
torque direction is > 0.5% of rated converter DC current (P072),
fault message F043 is activated (see Section 10 for possible
fault causes).

1

P273
*
FDS
(G165)
P274
*
FDS
(G165)
P275
*
FDS
(G165)
P276
*
FDS
(G165)
P277
*
FDS
(G165)
P280

Alarm A043 and automatic field reduction if EMF is too high in
braking operation.
If the EMF is too high in braking operation (i.e. if the following
applies to the armature firing angle α before limitation (K0101):
α > (αW – 5 degrees)), alarm A043 is activated (αW is the
inverter stability limit according to P151 or 165 degrees with a
discontinuous armature current).
The field is reduced with activation of A043. This field reduction
is achieved by regulating the armature firing angle to (αW – 5
degrees) by means of a P controller, whose output reduces the
EMF controller setpoint. "Field weakening operation by internal
closed-loop EMF control" (P081=1) must therefore be
parameterized so that the field reduction can take effect.
When a torque direction change is requested, both torque
directions remain disabled until the field, and thus the EMF,
have been reduced accordingly (i.e. until the calculated firing
angle (K0101) for the armature current required in the new
torque direction is <165 degrees).
Control word for EMF controller precontrol
0

EMF controller precontrol disabled, precontrol output = rated
motor field current (P102)

1
EMF controller precontrol is active
Set EMF controller I component to zero
0

Set controller I component to zero (i.e. to obtain pure P
controller)
1
Controller I component is active
EMF controller P gain
This parameter is automatically set during the field weakening optimization
run (P051=27).
EMF controller reset time
This parameter is automatically set during the field weakening optimization
run (P051=27).

FDS
(G165)

Filtering of the EMF setpoint at the input of the EMF controller precontrol.
The purpose of this filter is to decouple the EMF controller precontrol from
the EMF controller.

P281

Filter time for setpoint for EMF controller

FDS
(G165)

Filtering of the EMF setpoint at the input of the EMF controller.
The purpose of this filter is to decouple the EMF controller precontrol from
the EMF controller.

P282

Filter time for actual value for EMF controller

FDS
(G165)
P283

Filtering of actual EMF value at the input of the EMF controller.

FDS
(G165)

10-38

[SW 1.9 and later]

[SW 1.9 and later]

Filter time for actual value for EMF controller precontrol
[SW 1.9 and later]
Filtering of actual speed value at the input of the EMF controller precontrol.
The purpose of this filter is to stabilize the EMF controller precontrol, even
when the actual speed signal is unsteady or distorted by harmonics.

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P284
*
FDS
(G165)

Set EMF controller P component to zero

0 to 1
1

0
1

Set controller P component to zero
(i.e. to obtain pure I controller)
Controller P component is active

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=1
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

0.00 to 650.00
[s]
0.01 s

Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

0.00 to 100.00
[s]
0.01s

Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

0.00 to 100.00
[s]
0.01s

Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

10.14 Ramp-function generator
(see also Section 8, Sheet G136 and Section 9 of Operating Instructions 6RX1700-0AD**)
See P639 and P640 for ramp-function generator setting parameters
P295
FDS

Mode for rounding the ramp-function generator
0

(G136)

[SW 1.9 and later]

If the setpoint is reversed during ramp-up (or ramp-down),
acceleration (deceleration) is aborted and initial rounding of the
deceleration (acceleration) process begins immediately. The
setpoint is not increased (decreased) any further, but the signal
at the ramp-function generator output has a breakpoint (i.e. a
step change in the acceleration rate).

0 to 1

Ramp generator
output
Ramp generator
input

1

If the setpoint is reversed during ramp-up or ramp-down,
acceleration/deceleration gradually changes to
deceleration/acceleration. The setpoint increases/decreases
further, but there is no breakpoint in the signal at the generator
output (i.e. there is no step change in the acceleration rate).

Ramp generator
output

Ramp generator
input

P296
FDS
(G136)

Ramp-down time of ramp generator with quick stop (OFF3)
[SW 1.9 and later]
When the "quick stop" command is issued, the drive must normally
brake down to 0 speed along the current limit. If the mechanical design of
the drive makes this option impermissible or undesirable, then a value of > 0
can be set here. In this case, the drive brakes along the deceleration ramp
programmed here when the "quick stop" command is issued.
see also parameter P330

P297
FDS
(G136)
P298
FDS
(G136)

Lower transition rounding of ramp generator with quick stop (OFF3)
[SW 1.9 and later]
see also parameter P330
Upper transition rounding of ramp generator with quick stop (OFF3)
[SW 1.9 and later]
see also parameter P330

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

10-39

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

Limitation at ramp-function generator output (setpoint limiting)
The effective limitations are:
Upper limit:
Minimum value of P300 and the four connectors selected with P632
Lower limit:
Maximum value of P301 and the four connectors selected with P633
Note:

P300
FDS
(G137)
P301
FDS
(G137)
P302
*
FDS
(G136)

The limiting values for both the positive and negative setpoint limits can have a positive or negative sign. The negative
setpoint limit, for example, can therefore be parameterized to a positive value and the positive setpoint limit to a negative
value.
-200.00 to 199.99
Ind: 4
P052 = 3
Positive limitation at ramp-function generator output
[%]
FS=100.00
P051 = 40
0.01%
Type: I2
Online
-200.00 to 199.99
Ind: 4
P052 = 3
Negative limitation at ramp-function generator output
[%]
FS=-100.00 P051 = 40
0.01%
Type: I2
Online
0 to 3
Ind: 4
P052 = 3
Select ramp-function generator / ramp-up integrator mode
1
FS=0
P051 = 40
0
Normal ramp-function generator operation:
Type: O2
Offline
Ramp-function generator setting 1 (P303 to P306) is applied.
When a binary selectable input parameterized as "Rampfunction generator setting 2" (P307 to P310)” (selected in P637)
or ”Ramp-function generator setting 3" (P311 to P314)”
(selected in P638), generator setting 2 or 3 is applied as
appropriate.
1

Ramp-up integrator operation:
When the setpoint is reached for the first time, ramp-function
generator setting 1 is switched over to a ramp-up/down
times = 0

2

Ramp-up integrator operation:
When the setpoint is reached for the first time, ramp-function
generator setting 1 is switched over to generator setting 2 (P307
to P310)

3

Ramp-up integrator operation:
When the setpoint is reached for the first time, ramp-function
generator setting 1 is switched over to generator setting 3 (P311
to P314)

Ramp-function generator parameter set 1 (see also parameter P330)
0.00 to 650.00
[s]
0.01s
0.00 to 650.00
[s]
0.01s
0.00 to 100.00
[s]
0.01s
0.00 to 100.00
[s]
0.01s

Ind: 4
FS=10.00
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=10.00
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Ramp-function generator parameter set 2 is selected via the binector parameterized in P637.
0.00 to 650.00
P307
Ramp-up time 2
[s]
FDS
0.01s
(G136)
0.00 to 650.00
P308
Ramp-down time 2
[s]
FDS
0.01s
(G136)
0.00 to 100.00
P309
Lower transition rounding 2
[s]
FDS
0.01s
(G136)
0.00 to 100.00
P310
Upper transition rounding 2
[s]
FDS
0.01s
(G136)

Ind: 4
FS=10.00
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=10.00
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Ind: 4
FS=10.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

P303
FDS
(G136)
P304
FDS
(G136)
P305
FDS
(G136)
P306
FDS
(G136)

Ramp-up time 1

Ramp-down time 1

Lower transition rounding 1

Upper transition rounding 1

Ramp-function generator parameter set 2 (see also parameter P330)

Ramp-function generator parameter set 3 (see also parameter P330)
Ramp-function generator parameter set 3 is selected via the binector parameterized in P638.
0.00 to 650.00
P311
Ramp-up time 3
[s]
FDS
0.01s
(G136)

10-40

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P312
FDS
(G136)
P313
FDS
(G136)
P314
FDS
(G136)

Ramp-down time 3

0.00 to 650.00
[s]
0.01s
0.00 to 100.00
[s]
0.01s
0.00 to 100.00
[s]
0.01s

Lower transition rounding 3

Upper transition rounding 3

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=10.00
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Ind: 4
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: V2

P052 = 3

0 to 1
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 2
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0.00 to 10.00
[s]
0.01s

Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

-300.00 to 300.00
[%]
0.01%

Ind: 4
FS=100.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Displays
r315
(G136)

r316

Display of effective times
i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:

Display of effective ramp-up time
Display of effective ramp-down time
Display of effective lower transition rounding
Display of effective upper transition rounding

0.00 to
650.00 / 10.00
[s]
0.01s

Display of ramp-function generator status
Mode of representation on operator panel (PMU):

(G136)
15
7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

Segment:
0
1
2
3
4
5
7
15
P317
*
FDS
(G136)
P318
*
FDS
(G136)

RFG enable
RFG start
Setpoint enable & /OFF1
Set RFG
RFG tracking
Bypass RFG
Ramp-down
Ramp-up

Ramp-function generator tracking
0
1

Ramp-function generator tracking is not active
Ramp-function generator tracking is active

Set ramp-function generator output
This parameter determines how the ramp-function generator output is set at
the commencement of a "Shutdown" process:
0

The ramp-function generator output is not set at the
commencement of a "Shutdown" process”

1

At the commencement of "Shutdown", the output is set to the
actual speed value K0167 (actual speed value K0167 is
"unfiltered")

2

At the commencement of "Shutdown", the output is set to the
actual speed value K0179 (value is filtered by PT1 in P200,
other filters may also be active)
(setting may not be used in conjunction with P205 > 0)

During a "Shutdown" process, the limitation at the ramp-function generator
output is not effective. P318 must be set to 1 or 2 to prevent any
(temporary) excess speed during "Shutdown" when the generator output is
limited.
P319
FDS
(G136)

Delay time for enabling ramp-function generator

[SW 1.5 and later]

10.15 Setpoint processing
P320

Multiplier for main setpoint

FDS
(G135)

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

10-41

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P321

Multiplier for additional setpoint

Source for multiplier for main setpoint

FDS
(G135)
P322
*
FDS
(G135)
P323
*
FDS
(G135)

0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.
Source for multiplier for additional setpoint
0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.

-300.00 to 300.00
[%]
0.01%

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=100.00
Type: I2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 4
FS=1
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 4
FS=1
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 bis 1
1

Ind: 4
WE=0
Typ: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

Ind: 4
FS=-20
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Ind: 4
FS=20
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Ind: 4
FS=40
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Ind: 4
FS=0,5
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Ind: 4
FS=10
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

10.16 Ramp-function generator
P330
*
FDS
(G136)

Factor for ramp-function generator times

[SW 2.1 and later]

Selection of a factor for the values set in parameters P296, P297, P298,
P303 to P314 and P542 (ramp-function generator times).
0
1

Factor = 1
Factor = 60
i.e. effective ramp-function generator times = values set in
[minutes] instead of in [seconds]

10.17 Setting values for monitoring functions and limits
Setting values for monitoring functions
P351
FDS

P352
FDS

-90 to 0
[%]
If the line voltage drops below a specific value (P078) and does not return to Armature:
the permissible tolerance range within the "Restart time" set in P086, fault
1% of P078.001
message F006 is activated. The drive dwells in operating state o4 or o5
Field:
while the line undervoltage persists.
1% of P078.002
0 to 99
Source for overvoltage trip
[%]
If the line voltage exceeds a specific value (P078) and does not return to the Armature:
permissible tolerance range within the "Restart time" set in P086, fault
1% of P078.001
message F007 is activated.
Field:
1% of P078.002
Threshold for undervoltage trip

P353

Response threshold for phase failure monitoring

FDS

If the line voltage drops below the permissible value in operating states of
≤ o4 and does not return to an "acceptable" value within the "Restart time"
set in P086, fault message F004 or F005 is activated.
The drive dwells in operating state o4 or o5 for the period that the line
voltage remains below the threshold and during the subsequent voltage
stabilization period set in P090.

10 to 100
[%]
Armature:
1% of P078.001
Field:
1% of P078.002

When a switch-on command is entered, the converter dwells in operating
states o4 and o5 for a maximum total delay period for both states set in
P089 until the voltages in all phases exceed the threshold set in this
parameter before fault message F004 or F005 is activated.
P355
FDS

0.0 to 600.0
[s]
F035 is activated if the conditions for the "Stall protection" fault message are 0.1s
fulfilled for longer than the period set in P355.
Stall protection time

When P355=0.0, the "Drive blocked" monitoring function (F035) is
deactivated and alarm A035 is likewise suppressed.
P357

Threshold for tachometer interruption monitoring

FDS

F042 is suppressed if the actual EMF value is lower than the value set in
P357.

10 to 70
[%]
1%

The setting is entered as a % of the ideal mean DC voltage value at α=0,
i.e. as a % of P078.001 * 1.35

10-42

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P360

Response delay for external faults and alarms

(G180)
(G181)

The fault message or alarm is not activated on the converter until the
appropriate input or corresponding control word bit (as selected in P675,
P686, P688 or P689) has been in the LOW state for at least the time period
set in this parameter (see also Section 8, Sheets G180 and G181).
i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 60000
[ms]
1ms

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

0 to 60000
[ms]
1ms

Ind: 4
FS=10000
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

23.0 to 60.0
[Hz]
0.1 Hz

Ind: 4
FS=45.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

50.0 to 110.0
[Hz]
0.1 Hz

Ind: 4
FS=65.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

0.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01% of maximum
speed

Ind: 4
FS=0,50
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01% of maximum
speed

Ind: 4
FS=0,50
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Delay for external fault 1
Delay for external fault 2
Delay for external alarm 1
Delay for external alarm 2
[SW 1.7 and later]

P361

Delay time for the undervoltage monitoring

FDS

Activation of the fault message F006 (line undervoltage) is delayed by the
time that can be set in this parameter. During this delay time firing pulses
are output!
Another time which is parameterized for automatic restarting (P086) only
begins after the time set here has elapsed.

P362

Delay time for the overvoltage monitoring

FDS

Activation of the fault message F007 (line overvoltage) is delayed by the
time that can be set in this parameter. During this delay time firing pulses
are output!

[SW 1.7 and later]

Another time which is parameterized for automatic restarting (P086) only
begins after the time set here has elapsed.
[SW 1.8 and later]

P363

Threshold for the minimum line frequency

FDS

If the line frequency falls below the value set here and does not rise above it
again within the "restart" time set in P086, the fault message F008 is
activated. As long as the line frequency is below the value set here, the
drive is kept in operating state o4 or o5.
[values < 45.0 Hz can be set in SW 1.9 and later]

CAUTION
Operation in the extended frequency range between 23 Hz and 110 Hz
is available on request.
[SW 1.8 and later]

P364

Threshold for the maximum line frequency

FDS

If the line frequency rises above the value set here and does not fall below it
again within the "restart" time set in P086, the fault message F009 is
activated. As long as the line frequency is above the value set here, the
drive is kept in operating state o4 or o5.

CAUTION
Operation in the extended frequency range between 23 Hz and 110 Hz
is available on request.

10.18 Setting values for limit-value monitors
(see also Section 8, Sheet G187 and G188 of Operating Instructions 6RX1700-0AD**)
n < nmin signal
P370

Speed threshold nmin

FDS

Speed threshold for n < nmin limit-value monitor.

(G187)

Note:
This threshold also affects the sequence of control operations for
"Shutdown", "Fast stop", cancellation of the "Inching" or "Crawling"
command, the "Braking with field reversal" function and the brake control
operation (see Section 9).

P371

Hysteresis for n < nmin signal

FDS
(G187)

This value is added to the response threshold if n < nmin is active.

n < ncomp. signal
SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

10-43

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P373

Speed threshold ncomp.

FDS
(G187)
P374

Speed threshold for n < ncomp. signal

FDS
(G187)
P375
FDS
(G187)

This value is added to the response threshold if n < ncomp. is active.

0.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01% of maximum
speed
0.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01% of maximum
speed
0.0 to 100.0
[s]
0.1s

Hysteresis for < ncomp. signal (n < ncomp. signal)

OFF delay for n < ncomp. signal

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=100.00
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Ind: 4
FS=3.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Ind: 4
FS=3.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01% of maximum
speed
0.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01% of maximum
speed

Ind: 4
FD=3.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

Ind: 4
FS=1.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

0.0 to 100.0
[s]
0.1s

Ind: 4
FS=3.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

0.0 to 199.9
[%]
0.1% of maximum
speed
-199.9 to 0.0
[%]
0.1% of maximum
speed

Ind: 4
FS=120.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Ind: 4
FS=-120.0
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01% of maximum
speed
0.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01% of maximum
speed
0.0 to 100.0
[s]
0.1s

Ind: 4
FS=3.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Ind: 4
FS=1.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Ind: 4
FS=3.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01% of converter
rated field DC
current (r073.i02)

Ind: 4
FS=3.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.00 to 100.00
[%]
0.01% of converter
rated field DC
current (r073.i02)

Ind: 4
FS=1.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Setpoint/actual value deviation 2
P376

Permissible setpoint/actual value deviation 2

FDS
(G187)
P377

Hysteresis for setpoint/actual value deviation 2 signal

[SW 1.9 and later]

[SW 1.9 and later]
FDS
(G187)
P378
FDS
(G187)

This value is added to the response threshold if a setpoint/actual value
deviation signal is active
Response delay for setpoint/actual value deviation signal 2
[SW 1.9 and later]

Overspeed
P380

Maximum speed in positive direction of rotation

FDS
(G188)
P381

Maximum speed in negative direction of rotation

FDS
(G188)
Setpoint/actual value deviation 1
P388

Permissible deviation between setpoint and actual value 1

FDS
(G187)
P389

Hysteresis for setpoint/actual value deviation signal 1

FDS
(G187)
P390
FDS
(G187)

This value is added to the response threshold if a setpoint/actual value
deviation signal is active
Response delay for setpoint/actual value deviation signal 1

If < If min signal
P394

Field current threshold If min

FDS

Field current threshold for If < If min limit-value monitor.

(G188)

Note:
This threshold affects the sequence of control operations for the "Direction
of rotation reversal using field reversal" and "Braking with field reversal"
functions (see Section 9).
The If < If min signal is connected to binector B0215, the actual value at
field current controller input K0265 is applied as If.
B0215 = 0 when K0265 > threshold set in P394
B0215 = 1 when K0265 < threshold set in P394 + hysteresis set in P395
0 → 1 transition takes place when K0265 < P394
1 → 0 transition takes place when K0265 > P394 + P395

P395

Hysteresis for If < If min signal

FDS

This value is added to the response threshold if If < If min is active.

(G188)

10-44

(see also P394)

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

Field current monitoring
Fault message F005 is activated if the actual field current (K0265) is lower than the percentage of the field current setpoint (K0268) set in
P396 for longer than the time set in parameter P397.
Note:
Fault message F005 is only activated, however, if the field current setpoint is > 2% of the converter rated DC current of the field (r073.i02)
ist.
Ind: 4
P052 = 3
P396
Threshold for field current monitoring
[SW 1.9 and later] 1 to 100
[%]
FS=50
P051 = 40
0.01% of setpoint at Type: O2
on-line
FDS
field current con(G167)
troller input (K0268)
Ind: 4
P052 = 3
P397
Field current monitoring time
[SW 1.9 and later] 0.02 to 60.00
[s]
FS=0.50
P051 = 40
FDS
0.01s
Type: O2
on-line
(G167)
If < If x signal
P398

Field current threshold If x

FDS

Setpoint-oriented field current threshold for If < If x limit-value monitor.

(G188)

Note:
This threshold affects the sequence of control operations for the "Direction
of rotation reversal using field reversal" and "Braking with field reversal"
functions (see Section 9).

0.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01% of setpoint at
field current
controller input
(K0268)

Ind: 4
FS=80.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.00 to 100.00
[%]
0.01% of converter
rated field DC
current (r073.i02)

Ind: 4
FS=1.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

-199.99 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-199.99 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-199.99 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-199.99 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-199.99 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-199.99 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-199.99 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-199.99 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-199.99 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-199.99 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%

Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: I2
Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: I2
Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: I2
Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: I2
Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: I2
Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: I2
Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: I2
Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: I2
Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: I2
Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

The If < If x signal is connected to binector B0216, the actual value at field
current controller input K0265 is applied as If.
B0216 = 0 when K0265 > threshold set in P398
B0216 = 1 when K0265 < threshold set in P398 + hysteresis set in P399
0 → 1 transition takes place when K0265 < P398
1 → 0 transition takes place when K0265 > P398 + P399
P399

Hysteresis for If < If x signal

FDS

This value is added to the response threshold if If < If x is active.
(see also P398)

(G188)

10.19 Settable fixed values
Function:
P401
FDS
(G120)
P402
FDS
(G120)
P403
FDS
(G120)
P404
FDS
(G120)
P405
FDS
(G120)
P406
FDS
(G120)
P407
FDS
(G120)
P408
FDS
(G120)
P409
FDS
(G120)
P410
FDS
(G120)

The value set in the parameter is applied to the specified connector
K401 fixed value
is applied to connector K0401
K402 fixed value
is applied to connector K0402
K403 fixed value
is applied to connector K0403
K404 fixed value
is applied to connector K0404
K405 fixed value
is applied to connector K0405
K406 fixed value
is applied to connector K0406
K407 fixed value
is applied to connector K0407
K408 fixed value
is applied to connector K0408
K409 fixed value
is applied to connector K0409
K410 fixed value
is applied to connector K0410

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

10-45

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P411
FDS
(G120)
P412
FDS
(G120)
P413
FDS
(G120)
P414
FDS
(G120)
P415
FDS
(G120)
P416
FDS
(G120)

K411 fixed value

-199.99 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-32768 to 32767
1

is applied to connector K0411
K412 fixed value
is applied to connector K0412

-32768 to 32767
1

K413 fixed value
is applied to connector K0413

-32768 to 32767
1

K414 fixed value
is applied to connector K0414

-32768 to 32767
1

K415 fixed value
is applied to connector K0415

-32768 to 32767
1

K416 fixed value
is applied to connector K0416

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: I2
Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: I2
Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: I2
Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: I2
Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: I2
Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: I2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

10.20 Fixed control bits
Function:
P421
FDS
(G120)
P422
FDS
(G120)
P423
FDS
(G120)
P424
FDS
(G120)
P425
FDS
(G120)
P426
FDS
(G120)
P427
FDS
(G120)
P428
FDS
(G120)

The value set in the parameter is applied to the specified binector
B421 fixed bit
is applied to binector B0421
B422 fixed bit
is applied to binector B0422
B423 fixed bit
is applied to binector B0423
B424 fixed bit
is applied to binector B0424
B425 fixed bit
is applied to binector B0425
B426 fixed bit
is applied to binector B0426
B427 fixed bit
is applied to binector B0427
B428 fixed bit
is applied to binector B0428

0 to 1
1
0 to 1
1
0 to 1
1
0 to 1
1
0 to 1
1
0 to 1
1
0 to 1
1
0 to 1
1

10.21 Digital setpoint input (fixed setpoint, inching and crawling setpoints)
(see also Section 8, Sheets G127, G129 and G130 of Operating Instructions 6RX1700-0AD**)
Fixed setpoint
Function: Up to 8 connectors can be selected in P431 indices .01 to .08. These can be applied as an additional fixed setpoint (K0204,
K0209) via the binectors selected in P430, indices .01 to .08 (setpoint is applied when binector switches to log. "1" state). P432
indices .01 to .08 can be set to define for each setpoint individually whether the ramp-function generator must be bypassed on
setpoint injection.
If fixed setpoint injection is not selected, the connector set in P433 is applied to K0209.
P430
*
(G127)

Source for fixed-setpoint injection
Selection of binector to control injection of the fixed setpoint
("1" state = fixed setpoint injected).

All binector numbers
1

Ind: 8
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

10-46

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P431
*

Source for fixed setpoint

All connector
numbers
1

(G127)

P432
*
(G127)

P433
*
FDS
(G127)

Selection of connector to be injected as the fixed setpoint

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 8
FS=0
Type: L2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 1
1

Ind: 8
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 4
FS=11
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Source for selection of ramp-function generator bypass
Selection as to whether or not ramp-function generator must be bypassed
when the fixed setpoint is injected.
The ramp-function generator is bypassed if the AND operation between the
binector selected via an index of P430 and the setting in the same index of
P432 produces a log. "1"
Source for standard setpoint
Selection of the connector to be applied if fixed-setpoint injection is not
selected
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

Inching setpoint
Function: Up to 8 connectors can be selected in P436 indices .01 to .08. These can be applied as an inching setpoint (K0202, K0207) via
the binectors selected in P435, indices .01 to .08 (setpoint is applied when binector switches to log. "1" state). P437 indices .01
to .08 can be set to define for each setpoint individually whether the ramp-function generator must be bypassed on setpoint
injection. If more than one inching setpoint is injected, an output value corresponding to inching setpoint = 0% is applied.

P435
*
(G129)

If inching setpoint injection is not selected, the connector set in P438 is applied to K0207.
All binector numbers
Source for injection of inching setpoint
1
Selection of binector to control injection of the inching setpoint
("1" state = inching setpoint injected).

Ind: 8
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 8
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 1
1

Ind: 8
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 4
FS=208
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
P436
*
(G129)

P437
*
(G129)

P438
*
FDS
(G129)

Source for inching setpoint
Selection of connector to be injected as the inching setpoint
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Source for selection of ramp-function generator bypass
Selection as to whether or not ramp-function generator must be bypassed
when the inching setpoint is injected.
The ramp-function generator is bypassed if the AND operation between the
binector selected via an index of P435 and the setting in the same index of
P437 produces a log. "1".
Source for standard setpoint
Selection of the connector to be applied if inching-setpoint injection is not
selected
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

Crawling setpoint
Function: Up to 8 connectors can be selected in P441 indices .01 to .08. These can be applied as an additional crawling setpoint (K0201,
K0206) via the binectors selected in P440, indices .01 to .08. P445 can be set to define whether the setpoint must be applied
when the selected binectors have reached the log. "1" state (when P445=0) or in response to a 0 → 1 transition (when
P445=1). When setpoint injection in response to a 0 → 1 transition is selected, the setpoint injection function is reset when the
binector selected in P444 switches to the log. "0" state. P442 indices .01 to .08 can be set to define for each setpoint
individually whether the ramp-function generator must be bypassed on setpoint injection.

P440
*
(G130)

If crawling setpoint injection is not selected, the connector set in P443 is applied to K0206.
All binector numbers
Source for injection of crawling setpoint
1
Selection of binector to control injection of the crawling setpoint.

Ind: 8
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

10-47

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P441
*

Source for crawling setpoint

All connector
numbers
1

(G130)

P442
*
(G130)

P443
*
FDS
(G130)

P444
*
BDS
(G130)

P445
*
(G130)

Selection of connector to be injected as the crawling setpoint

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 8
FS=0
Type: L2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 1
1

Ind: 8
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 4
FS=207
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All binector numbers
1

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 1
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 3
1

Ind: 4
FS=1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 1
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All binector numbers
1

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Source for selection of ramp-function generator bypass
Selection as to whether or not ramp-function generator must be bypassed
when the crawling setpoint is injected.
The ramp-function generator is bypassed if the AND operation between the
binector selected via an index of P440 and the setting in the same index of
P442 produces a log. "1".
Source for standard setpoint
Selection of the connector to be applied if crawling-setpoint injection is not
selected
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Source for standstill command
Selection of the binector to control the standstill operation (OFF1) or
resetting of crawling setpoint injection when P445=1 (log. "0" state = reset).
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
Selection of level/edge for switch-on/crawling
Selection to define whether ON command must be input via terminal 37 and
the crawling setpoint injected in response to a log. "1" level or to a 0 → 1
transition
0

1

ON with log. "1" state at terminal 37 and
injection of crawling setpoint with binectors selected in P440 in
log. "1" state
ON in response to 0 → 1 transition at terminal 37 and
injection of crawling setpoint in response to 0 → 1 transition of
binectors selected in P440
With this setting, the ON command or injection command for the
crawling setpoint is stored. The memory is reset when the
binector selected in P444 switches to the log. "0" state.

10.22 Position sensing with pulse encoder
See parameters P140 to P148 for pulse encoder definition and monitoring
P450
Resetting of position counter
*
0
Reset position counter OFF
FDS
1
Reset position counter with zero marker
(G145)

2

Reset position counter with zero marker when LOW signal is
applied to terminal 39

3

Reset position counter when LOW signal is applied to terminal
39

Note: Counter resetting with P450 = 2 and 3 is executed in the hardware
and is not affected by how the binectors controlled by terminal 39 are
interconnected
P451
*
FDS
(G145)
P452
*
BDS
(G145)

10-48

Position counter hysteresis
0

Hysteresis for rotational direction reversal OFF

1

Hysteresis for rotational direction reversal ON (the first pulse
encoder input pulse after a change in rotational direction is not
counted)

Source for "Reset position counter" command

[SW 1.9 and later]

Selection of binector to control resetting of the position counter.
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

PNU

Description

P453
*

Source for "Enable zero marker counter" command

BDS
(G145)

Value range
[Unit]
Steps
[SW 1.9 and later]

Selection of binector to control enabling of the zero marker counter

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 2
FS=1
Type: L2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

Ind: 3
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

Ind: 3
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

All binector numbers
1

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

0 to 1
1

Ind: 4
FS=1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0.01 to 300.00
[s]
0.01s
0.01 to 300.00
[s]
0.01s

Ind: 4
FS=10.00
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=10.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

All binector numbers
1

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

10.23 Connector selector switches
(see also Section 8, Function Diagram Sheet G124 of Operating Instructions 6RX1700-0AD**)
P455
Source for inputs of connector selector switch 1
[SW 1.9 and later] All connector
numbers
*
Selection of connectors for the input signals for connector selector switch 1. 1
(G124)
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P456
*
(G124)

P457
*
(G124)

P458
*
(G124)

Source for control of connector selector switch 1

[SW 1.9 and later]

Selection of binectors to control connector selector switch 1.

All binector numbers
1

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
Source for inputs of connector selector switch 2

[SW 1.9 and later] All connector
numbers
1

Selection of connectors for the input signals for connector selector switch 2.
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Source for control of connector selector switch 2

[SW 1.9 and later]

Selection of binectors to control connector selector switch 2.
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

10.24 Motorized potentiometer
(see also Section 8, Sheet G126 of Operating Instructions 6RX1700-0AD**)
P460
Control word for motorized potentiometer ramp-function generator
*
0
The motorized potentiometer ramp generator is bypassed in
FDS
Automatic mode (same effect as for P462 and P463 = 0.01, i.e.
the generator output is made to follow the automatic setpoint
(G126)
without delay)
1
P461
*
FDS
(G126)

P462
FDS
(G126)
P463
FDS
(G126)

Motorized potentiometer ramp generator is active in Manual and
Automatic modes

Source for setpoint in Automatic mode
Selection of the connector to be applied as the Automatic setpoint to the
ramp-function generator in the motorized potentiometer
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Ramp-up time for motorized potentiometer

Ramp-down time for motorized potentiometer

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

10-49

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P464

Time difference for dy/dt

FDS

Setting of dt for the output of dy/dt at a connector,
i.e. on K0241 the change in the output quantity (K0240) is output within the
time set in P464, multiplied by the factor set in P465
(unit of time setting is [s] if P465=0 or [min] if P465=1)

0.01 to 300.00
[s]
0.01s

(G126)

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=10.00
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 1
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

-199.9 to 199.9
[%]
0.1%
-199.99 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%

Ind: 4
FS=0.0
Type: I2
Ind: 4
FS=100.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

-199.99 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%

Ind: 4
FS=-100.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

All binector numbers
1

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All binector numbers
1

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All binector numbers
1

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 1
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Example: - The ramp-function generator is currently ramping up with a
ramp-up time of P462=5s, i.e. a ramp-up operation from y=0%
to y=100% takes 5s.
- A time difference dt of P464=2s is set.
- ⇒ A dy/dt of 40% appears at connector K0241 since the dy
within the set dt of 2 s equals (2s/5s)*100%.
P465
*
FDS
(G126)

P466
*
FDS
(G126)

Factor of expansion for motorized potentiometer
The effective ramp-up time, ramp-down time or time difference for dy/dt is
the product of the time setting in parameter P462, P463 and P464
respectively, multiplied by the factor set in this parameter.
0
1

Parameters P462, P463 and P464 are multiplied by a factor of 1
Parameters P462, P463 and P464 are multiplied by a factor of 60

Source for motorized potentiometer setting value
Selection of the connector to be injected as the motorized potentiometer
setting value
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

P467
FDS
(G126)
P468
FDS
(G126)

Motorized potentiometer starting value

P469
FDS
(G126)

Setpoint for "Lower motorized potentiometer ”

P470
*
BDS
(G126)

Starting value of motorized potentiometer after ON when P473 = 0
Setpoint for "Raise motorized potentiometer”
Motorized potentiometer manual operation: Setpoint for "Raise motorized
potentiometer"
Motorized potentiometer manual operation: Setpoint for "Lower motorized
potentiometer"
Source for clockwise/counter-clockwise switchover
Selection of binector to control "Clockwise/counter-clockwise
switchover"
("0" state = clockwise).
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

P471
*
BDS
(G126)

P472
*
BDS
(G126)

P473
*
FDS

Source for manual/automatic switchover
Selection of binector to control "Manual/automatic switchover"
("0" state = manual).
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
Source for set motorized potentiometer
Selection of binector to control "Set motorized potentiometer"
("0" to "1" transition = set motorized potentiometer).
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
Storage of output value
0

No storage of output value:
The output is set to 0 in all operating states of >o5.
The starting point after ON is determined by P467 (MOP starting
value).

1

Non-volatile storage of output value:
The output value remains stored in all operating states and after
voltage disconnection or failure. The last value stored is output
again after voltage recovery/reconnection.

(G126)

10-50

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

10.25 Oscillation
Function:
Parameters P480 to P483 define the waveshape of a rectangular signal (oscillation setpoint K0203). The value set in P480 determines the
signal level for the time period set in P481 and the value set in P482 the signal level for the time period set in P483.
Oscillation: Selected in P485. The free-running rectangular signal is switched through to the output K0208.
-199.9 to 199.9
P480
Oscillation setpoint 1
[%]
0.1% of maximum
FDS
speed
(G128)
0.1 to 300.0
P481
Oscillation time 1
[s]
FDS
0.1s
(G128)
-199.9 to 199.9
P482
Oscillation setpoint 2
[%]
0.1% of maximum
FDS
speed
(G128)
0.1 to 300.0
P483
Oscillation time 2
[s]
FDS
0.1s
(G128)
All connector
P484
Source for standard setpoint
numbers
*
Selection of connector to be injected as the output value when the
1
FDS
"Oscillation" function is not selected
(G128)
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P485
*
BDS
(G128)

Source for oscillation selection
Selection of binector to control activation of the "Oscillation" function
(log. "1" state = oscillation active)

All binector numbers
1

Ind: 4
FS=0,5
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Ind: 4
FS=0.1
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=-0,4
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Ind: 4
FS=0.1
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=209
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

10.26 Definition of "Motor interface"
(see also Section 8, Sheets G185 and G186 of Operating Instructions 6RX1700-0AD**)

CAUTION!
The encoders for measurement and monitoring of the brush length, bearing condition, air flow and motor temperature must be
safely isolated from the power circuit.
P490
*
(G185)

Selection of temperature sensor for analog monitoring of motor
temperature
i001:
i002:

0 to 5
1

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 200
[°C]
1°C

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Temperature sensor at terminals 22 / 23:
Temperature sensor at terminals 204 / 205:

Settings:
0
1
2
3
4
5

No temperature sensor
KTY84
PTC thermistor with R=600Ω
PTC thermistor with R=1200Ω
PTC thermistor with R=1330Ω
PTC thermistor with R=2660Ω

1)
1)
1)
1)

1) PTC thermistor according to DIN 44081 / 44082 with specified R at rated
response temperature, 1330Ω on Siemens motors (setting 4 must be
selected). When a PTC thermistor is selected as the temperature
sensor, it is not necessary to set parameters P491 and P492 (alarm and
trip temperatures). These two temperatures are predetermined by the
type of PTC thermistor installed. Whether an alarm or fault is output
when the operating point of the PTC thermistor is reached depends on
how the relevant input is parameterized (P493.F or P494.F).
P491
FDS
(G185)

Analog monitoring of motor temperature: Alarm temperature
Operative only when P490.x=1.

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

10-51

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P492
FDS
(G185)

Analog monitoring of motor temperature: Trip temperature
Operative only when P490.x=1.

0 to 200
[°C]
1°C

P493
*

Motor temperature analog 1 (temperature sensor at terminals 22 / 23):
Tripping of alarm or fault message

FDS

Motor temperature grasped with KTY84

(G185)

0

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 3
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 3
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 2
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 2
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 2
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 2
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Monitoring deactivated

1

Alarm (A029) at temperature > P491

2

Fault message (F029) at temperature > P492

3

Alarm (A029) at temperature > P491 and
fault message (F029) at temperature > P492

Motor temperature grasped with PTC thermistor
0

Monitoring deactivated

1

Alarm message (A029) when operating point of PTC thermistor
is reached

2

Fault message (F029) when operating point of PTC thermistor is
reached

3

Illegal setting

P494
*

Motor temperature analog 2 (temperature sensor at terminals 204 /
205): Tripping of alarm or fault message

FDS

Motor temperature grasped with KTY84

(G185)

0

Monitoring deactivated

1

Alarm (A029) at temperature > P491

2

Fault message (F029) at temperature > P492

3

Alarm (A029) at temperature > P491 and
fault message (F029) at temperature > P492

Motor temperature grasped with PTC thermistor

P495
*
FDS
(G186)
P496
*
FDS
(G186)
P497
*
FDS
(G186)
P498
*
FDS
(G186)

10-52

0

Monitoring deactivated

1

Alarm message (A029) when operating point of PTC thermistor
is reached

2

Fault message (F029) when operating point of PTC thermistor is
reached

3

Illegal setting

Brush length sensing: Tripping of alarm or fault message
0

No brush length sensing (terminal 211 is not scanned)

1

Binary brush length sensing (terminal 211 is scanned)
Alarm (A025) in response to 0 signal

2

Binary brush length sensing (terminal 211 is scanned)
Fault message (F025) in response to 0 signal

Bearing condition: Tripping of alarm or fault message
0

No bearing condition sensing (terminal 212 is not scanned)

1

Bearing condition sensing (terminal 212 is scanned)
Alarm (A026) in response to 1 signal

2

Bearing condition sensing (terminal 212 is scanned)
Fault message (F026) in response to 1 signal

Air flow: Tripping of alarm or fault message
0

No air flow monitoring (terminal 213 is not scanned)

1

Air flow monitoring (terminal 213 is scanned)
Alarm (A027) in response to 0 signal

2

Air flow monitoring (terminal 213 is scanned)
Fault message (F027) in response to 0 signal

Temperature switch: Tripping of alarm or fault message
0

No temperature switch connected (terminal 214 is not scanned)

1

Temperature switch connected (terminal 214 is scanned)
Alarm (A028) in response to 0 signal

2

Temperature switch connected (terminal 214 is scanned)
Fault message (F028) in response to 0 signal

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 2
FS=170
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

-300.00 to 300.00
[%]
0.01%

Ind: 4
FS=100.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

10.27 Configuring of torque shell input
P500
*
BDS
(G160)

P501
*
BDS
(G160)

P502
*
(G152)

Source for torque setpoint for slave drive
Selection of the connector to be injected as the torque setpoint for a slave
drive
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Source for additional torque setpoint
Selection of connector to be injected as the additional torque setpoint
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Source for value to be added to speed controller output
Selection of connector to be injected as the value to be added to the speed
controller output (in addition to friction and moment of inertia compensation)
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

P503
FDS
(G160)

Multiplier for torque setpoint in slave mode

10.28 Speed limiting controller
(see also Section 8, Sheet G160 of Operating Instructions 6RX1700-0AD**)
The output of the speed limiting controller comprises a positive (K0136) and a negative (K0137) torque limit. These limits are applied to
the torque limitation
All connector
Ind: None
P052 = 3
P509
Source for input quantity (n-act) of speed limiting controller
numbers
FS=167
P051 = 40
*
0 = connector K0000
1
Type: L2
Offline
(G160)
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P510
*
(G160)

Source for pos. torque limit of speed limiting controller
Selection of the connector to be injected as the limit value for torque
limitation 1

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=2
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=4
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0.0 to 199.9
[%]
0.1% of rated speed
-199.9 to 0.0
[%]
0.1% of rated speed
0.10 to 200.00
0.01

Ind: 4
FS=105.0
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=-105.0
Type: I2
Ind: 4
FS=3.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P511
*
(G160)

P512
FDS
(G160)
P513
FDS
(G160)
P515
FDS
(G160)

Source for neg. torque limit of speed limiting controller
Selection of the connector to be injected as the limit value for torque
limitation 2
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Maximum speed in positive direction of rotation

Maximum speed in negative direction of rotation

P gain of speed limiting controller

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

10-53

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

10.29 Friction compensation
(see also Section 8, Sheet G153 of Operating Instructions 6RX1700-0AD**)
Parameters P520 to P530 are the armature current and torque setpoint required for a stationary input signal (factory setting: speed
controller actual value K0179) of 0%, 10% to 100% of the maximum value (in steps of 10%).
These parameters are intermediate points along the friction curve. Depending on P170 (0 or 1) they are either an armature current or a
torque setpoint and are set automatically when the friction and moment of inertia compensation (P051=28) are optimized. P520 is then set
to 0.0%.
The intermediate points are interpolated linearly during which the output of the friction compensation assumes the sign of the input signal.
P530 is specified by the friction compensation even for input signals >100% of the maximum signal.
During operation in both directions we recommend leaving P520 at 0.0% in order to avoid armature current vibration at 0% of the input
signal.
P519
*
(G153)

Source for input signal of the friction compensation

[SW 2.0 and later]

Selection of the input signals that are added and led to the input of the
friction compensation.
i001

Input signal, with sign

i002

Input signal with absolute value generator

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 2
FS=
i001: 179
i002: 0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
offline

0.0 to 100.0
[%]
0.1%

Ind: 4
FS=0.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.0 to 100.0
[%]
0.1%

Ind: 4
FS=0.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.0 to 100.0
[%]
0.1%

Ind: 4
FS=0.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.0 to 100.0
[%]
0.1%

Ind: 4
FS=0.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.0 to 100.0
[%]
0.1%

Ind: 4
FS=0.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.0 to 100.0
[%]
0.1%

Ind: 4
FS=0.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.0 to 100.0
[%]
0.1%

Ind: 4
FS=0.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.0 to 100.0
[%]
0.1%

Ind: 4
FS=0.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.0 to 100.0
[%]
0.1%

Ind: 4
FS=0.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.0 to 100.0
[%]
0.1%

Ind: 4
FS=0.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.0 to 100.0
[%]
0.1%

Ind: 4
FS=0.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Settings:
0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.
P520

Friction at 0% speed

FDS
(G153)
P521

Setting as % of converter rated DC current or rated torque

FDS
(G153)
P522

Setting as % of converter rated DC current or rated torque

FDS
(G153)
P523

Setting as % of converter rated DC current or rated torque

FDS
(G153)
P524

Setting as % of converter rated DC current or rated torque

FDS
(G153)
P525

Setting as % of converter rated DC current or rated torque

FDS
(G153)
P526

Setting as % of converter rated DC current or rated torque

FDS
(G153)
P527

Setting as % of converter rated DC current or rated torque

FDS
(G153)
P528

Setting as % of converter rated DC current or rated torque

FDS
(G153)
P529

Setting as % of converter rated DC current or rated torque

FDS
(G153)
P530

Setting as % of converter rated DC current or rated torque

FDS
(G153)

Setting as % of converter rated DC current or rated torque

10-54

Friction at 10% speed

Friction at 20% speed

Friction at 30% speed

Friction at 40% speed

Friction at 50% speed

Friction at 60% speed

Friction at 70% speed

Friction at 80% speed

Friction at 90% speed

Friction at 100% speed and higher

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

0.00 to 650.00
[s]
0.01s

Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.00 to 650.00
0.01

Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.01 to 300.00
[s]
0.01s

Ind: 4
FS=0.01
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.00 to 100.00
[%]
0.01% of maximum
speed

Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

10.30 Compensation of moment of inertia (dv/dt injection)
(see also Section 8, Sheet G153 of Operating Instructions 6RX1700-0AD**)
P540
Acceleration time

(G153)

The acceleration time is the time that would be needed to accelerate the
drive from 0% to 100% of maximum speed (with no friction) at 100%
converter rated DC current (armature) and 100% rated motor field current
(i.e. 100% flux). It is a measure of the moment of inertia on the motor shaft.
This parameter is set automatically during the optimization run for friction
and moment of inertia compensation (P051=28).

P541

P gain of acceleration

FDS
(G153)

Proportional gain for "SAD-dependent acceleration" function (see also
parameter P543)

P542

Time difference for dy/dt of ramp-function generator

FDS

Ramp-function generator:
Setting of dt for the output of dy/dt at a connector, i.e. at K0191, the change
in the output quantity of the ramp-function generator (K0190) is output within
the period set in P542

FDS

(G136)

Example: - The ramp-function generator is currently ramping up with a
ramp-up time of P311=5s, i.e. a ramp-up operation from y=0%
to y=100% takes 5s.
- A time difference dt of P542=2s is set.
- ⇒ A dy/dt of 40% appears at connector K0191 since the dy
within the set dt of 2 s equals (2s/5s)*100%..
(see also parameter P330)
P543

Threshold for SAD-dependent acceleration

FDS

With respect to the SAD-dependent acceleration function, only the
component of the speed controller setpoint/actual value difference which
has an absolute value in excess of the threshold set in this parameter is
switched through (see also parameter P541).

(G153)

Output (value to be multiplied by P541)
199.99%

-200.00%

negative
threshold
(-P543)

Input (setp./act. val. diff.)
positive
threshold
(P543)

199.99%

-200.00%

P546
FDS
(G153)

Filter time for compensation of moment of inertia

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

10-55

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

10.31 Speed controller
(see also Section 8, Sheet G151 of Operating Instructions 6RX1700-0AD**)
further parameters for the speed controller P200 - P236
Speed controller adaptation
The parameters of the speed controller (Kp, Tn, droop) can be altered as a function of any connector to adapt the speed controller
optimally to a changing controlled system.
The diagrams below show the active P gain, the active Integration time and the active droop depending on the value of the set connector.
Adaptation of the P gain:

KP
P550

P225

Threshold 1 Threshold 2 Input
P556

P559

selected in P553

Adaptation of the integration time:

Tn
P551

P226

Threshold 1 Threshold 2 Input
P557

P560

selected in P554

Adaptation of the droop:

St
P552

P227

Threshold 1 Threshold 2 Input
P558

P561

selected in P555

For parameter pairs P225/P550, P226/P551 and P227/P552 all values can be set completely mutually independently, e.g., P550 does not
have to be greater than P225. The above diagrams show only the effect of the individual parameters.
Threshold 1 must always be set smaller than threshold 2, otherwise the fault message F058 is activated.
0.10 to 200.00
Ind: 4
P052 = 3
P550
P gain in the adaptation range
0.01
FS=3.00
P051 = 40
FDS
Value of Kp, if Influencing quantity ≤ Threshold 1
Type: O2
on-line
(G151)
Ind: 4
P052 = 3
P551
Integration time in the adaptation range
[SW 1.7 and later] 0.010 to 10.000
[s]
FS=0.650
P051 = 40
FDS
≤
Threshold
1
Value
of
Tn,
if
Influencing
quantity
0.001s
Type: O2
on-line
(G151)
Ind: 4
P052 = 3
P552
Droop in the adaptation range
[SW 1.7 and later] 0.0 to 10.0
[%]
FS=0.0
P051 = 40
FDS
Value of droop, if Influencing quantity ≤ Threshold 1
0.1%
Type: O2
on-line
(G151)
All connector
Ind: 4
P052 = 3
P553
Source for the Influencing quantity of the Kp adaptation
numbers
FS=0
P051 = 40
*
Selection of which connector is connected at the influencing quantity for
1
Type: L2
off-line
FDS
adaptation of the n controllers P gain
(G151)

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

P554
*

Source for the Influencing quantity of the Tn-adaptation
[SW 1.7 and later]

FDS

Selection of which connector is connected at the influencing quantity for
adaptation of the n controllers integration time

(G151)

10-56

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P555
*

Source for the Influencing quantity of the droop adaptation
[SW 1.7 and later]

FDS

Selection of which connector is connected at the influencing quantity for
adaptation of the n controllers droop

(G151)

P556
FDS
(G151)
P557
FDS
(G151)
P558
FDS
(G151)
P559
FDS
(G151)
P560
FDS
(G151)
P561
FDS
(G151)

All connector
numbers
1

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: L2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

0.00 to 100.00
[%]
0.01%
0.00 to 100.00
[%]
0.01%
0.00 to 100.00
[%]
0.01%
0.00 to 100.00
[%]
0.01%
0.00 to 100.00
[%]
0.01%
0.00 to 100.00
[%]
0.01%

Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

0.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-199.99 to 0.00
[%]
0.01%

Ind: 4
FS=100.00
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=-100.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.
Adaptation n controller P gain: Threshold 1
Adaptation n controller integration time: Threshold 1 [SW 1.7 and later]

Adaptation n controller droop: Threshold 1

[SW 1.7 and later]

Adaptation n controller P gain: Threshold 2
Adaptation n controller integration time: Threshold 2 [SW 1.7 and later]

Adaptation n controller droop: Threshold 2

[SW 1.7 and later]

Drehzahlregler - Begrenzung der Statik
P562
FDS
(G151)
P563
FDS
(G151)

Positive speed droop limitation

Negative speed droop limitation

Speed controller optimization for drives with oscillating mechanical system
On drives with oscillating mechanical components, it can be useful to optimize the speed controller using optimization run P051=29. The
frequency response of the controlled system for frequencies from 1 Hz to 100 Hz is recorded during optimization.
The drive is first accelerated up to a base speed (P565, FS=20%). A sinusoidal speed setpoint with low amplitude (P566, FS=1%) is then
injected. The frequency of this supplementary setpoint is incremented in 1 Hz steps from 1 Hz up to 100 Hz. An average per frequency is
calculated over a parameterizable number of current peaks (P567, FS=300).
P565

Base speed for frequency response recording

[SW 1.9 and later]

P566

Amplitude for frequency response recording

[SW 1.9 and later]

P567

Number of current peaks for frequency response recording
[SW 1.9 and later]
While the frequency response is being recorded, an average over the
number of current peaks set here is calculated for each measuring
frequency. High values improve the result, but extend the measuring time.
When P567 = 1000, the frequency response recording takes about 9
minutes.

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

1.0 to 30.0
[%]
0.1%
0.01 to 5.00
[%]
0.01%
100 to 1000
1

Ind: None
FS=20.0
Type: O2
Ind: None
FS=1.00
Type: O2
Ind: None
FS=300
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

10-57

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

All binector numbers
1

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All binector numbers
1

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=167
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=174
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=167
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

10.32 Field reversal
(see also Section 9 of Operating Instructions 6RX1700-0AD**)
P580
Source for selection of "Direction of rotation reversal using field
*
reversal”
BDS
(G200)

Selection of binector to control the "Direction of rotation reversal using field
reversal" function
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
Signal 0: Positive field direction is selected (B0260 = 1, B0261 = 0),
actual speed value is not inverted
Signal 1: Negative field direction is selected (B0260 = 0, B0261 = 1),
actual speed value is inverted

P581
*
BDS
(G200)

P582
*
BDS
(G200)

Source for selection of "Braking with field reversal”
Selection of binector to control the ”Braking with field reversal" function
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

Signal change 0→1: Reversal of field direction (causes braking);
When n 9])
P691 = 1: Bit 31 of control word 2 is inoperative.
(This setting of P691 is active only when control word 2 is input
in bit mode, i.e. when P649 <> 9)

10.36 Further configuring measures
P692
*

Source for selection of injection of standstill field

BDS

Selection of binector to control injection of the standstill field ("0" state =
inject standstill field)

(G166)

Note:

The delay time set in P258 is not effective when this function is
active.

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
P693
*
BDS
(G165)

Source for selection of enabling command for EMF controller
Selection of binector which is to control enabling of the EMF controller
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

P694
*

Source for selection of enabling command for "Torque limit
switchover”

BDS

Selection of binector which is to control enabling of the "Torque limit
switchover" function (1=enable, see also Sheet G160 in Section 8 of
Operating Instructions 6RX1700-0AD** and P180 to P183)

(G160)

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
P695
*
BDS
(G152)

Source for selection of "Set speed controller I component" function
Selection of binector to control the "Set I component" function
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
When the binector selected in P695 switches from log. "0" to log. "1", the I
component of the speed controller is set to the value of the connector
selected in P631.
With this function it is possible, for example, to use the same signal
(binector) to control controller enabling commands and setting of the I
component.

10-70

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P696
*

Source for selection of "Stop speed controller I component" function

All binector numbers
1

BDS
(G152)

Selection of binector to control the "Stop I component" function

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All binector numbers
1

Ind: 2
FS=1
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All binector numbers
1

Ind: 2
FS=1
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
When the binector selected in P696 changes to the log. "1" state, the I
component of the speed controller is stopped.

P697
*
BDS
(G153)

Source for selection of enabling of dv/dt injection
Selection of binector to control enabling of dv/dt injection (state "1" =
enable)
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

P698
*

Source for selection of enabling command for speed-dependent speed
controller PI / P function switchover

BDS

Selection of binector to control enabling of the speed-dependent PI / P
controller switchover function (see also P222)

(G152)

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

10.37 Analog inputs (main actual value, main setpoint, selectable inputs)
(see also Section 8, Sheets G113 and G114 of Operating Instructions 6RX1700-0AD**)
Analog input terminals 4 / 5 (main setpoint)
P700
*
(G113)

Signal type of "Main setpoint" analog input
0 = Voltage input 0 to ±10 V
1 = Current input 0 to ±20 mA
2 = Current input 4 to 20 mA

P701

Normalization of "Main setpoint" analog input

FDS

This parameter specifies the percentage value which is generated for an
input voltage of 10V (or an input current of 20mA) at the analog input.

(G113)

The following generally applies:
For voltage input:
Y
P701 [%] = 10 V ∗
X .. Input voltage in volts
X
Y .. % value which is generated for input
voltage X
With current input:
Y
P701 [%] = 20 mA ∗
X .. Input current in mA
X
Y .. % value which is generated for input
current X

P702

Offset for "Main setpoint" analog input

(G113)
P703
*

Mode of signal injection at "Main setpoint" analog input

(G113)

P704
*
(G113)

0=
1=
2=
3=

Injection of signal with sign
Injection of absolute value of signal
Injection of signal with sign, inverted
Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted

Source for selection of sign reversal at "Main setpoint" analog input
Selection of binector to control sign reversal at the analog input ("1" state
= reverse sign)

0 to 2
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

-1000.0 to 1000.0
[%]
0.1%

Ind: 4
FS=100.0
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

-200.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
0 to 3
1

Ind: None
FS=0.00
Type: I2
Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All binector numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
P705

Filtering time for "Main setpoint" analog input

(G113)

Note: Hardware filtering of approximately 1 ms is applied as standard.

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

10-71

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P706
*

Source for enabling of "Main setpoint" analog input

All binector numbers
1

(G113)

Selection of binector to control enabling of the analog input ("1" state =
enabled)

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: None
FS=1
Type: L2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Ind: None
FS=12
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 2
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

-1000.0 to 1000.0
[%]
0.1%

Ind: 4
FS=100.0
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

-200.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
0 to 3
1

Ind: None
FS=0.00
Type: I2
Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
P707
*
(G113)

11 to 14
[Bit]
The voltage applied to the analog input is converted to a digital value (A/D
1 bit
conversion) for further processing. The method used calculates an average
value of the input voltage over a specific measuring time.
The A/D conversion process produces a scale for the voltage range of 0 to ±
10V, the number of steps (divisions) along this scale can be set in P707 (i.e.
the smallest possible differentiable change in the input voltage
(quantization) can be set in this parameter). The number of scale steps or
intervals is referred to as "Resolution".
Resolution of "Main setpoint" analog input

The resolution is normally specified in bits:
± 11 bits means 2 * 2048 scale divisions
± 12 bits means 2 * 4096 scale divisions
± 13 bits means 2 * 8192 scale divisions
± 14 bits means 2 * 16384 scale divisions
The following applies:
The higher the resolution, the longer the averaging time and thus also the
delay period between the application of an analog step change and the
earliest possible moment of availability of the digital value for further
processing.
For this reason, it is important to find a compromise between the resolution
and delay period.
Param.
value

Resolution
better than

Quantization

Delay period

11
12
13
14

± 11 bits
± 12 bits
± 13 bits
± 14 bits

4.4 mV
2.2 mV
1.1 mV
0.56 mV

0.53 ms
0.95 ms
1.81 ms
3.51 ms

If the analog input is operating as a current input (0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA),
the above applies analogously.
Analog input terminals 6 / 7 (analog selectable input 1)
P710
*
(G113)

Signal type of "Analog selectable input 1"
0 = Voltage input 0 to ±10 V
1 = Current input 0 to ±20 mA
2 = Current input 4 to 20 mA

P711

Normalization of "Analog selectable input 1"

FDS

This parameter specifies the percentage value which is generated for an
input voltage of 10V (or an input current of 20mA) at the analog input.

(G113)

The following generally applies:
For voltage input:
Y
P711 [%] = 10 V ∗
X .. Input voltage in volts
X
Y .. % value which is generated for input
voltage X
With current input:
Y
P711 [%] = 20 mA ∗
X .. Input current in mA
X
Y .. % value which is generated for input
current X

P712

Offset for "Analog selectable input 1"

(G113)
P713
*

Mode of signal injection at "Analog selectable input 1"

(G113)

10-72

0=
1=
2=
3=

Injection of signal with sign
Injection of absolute value of signal
Injection of signal with sign, inverted
Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P714
*

Source for selection of sign reversal at "Analog selectable input 1"

All binector numbers
1

(G113)

Selection of binector to control sign reversal at the analog input ("1" state
= reverse sign)

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms
All binector numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2
Ind: None
FS=1
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

10 to 14
[Bit]
1 bit

Ind: None
FS=12
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

-1000.0 to 1000.0
[%]
0.1%

Ind: 4
FS=100.0
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

-200.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
0 to 3
1

Ind: None
FS=0.00
Type: I2
Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All binector numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms
All binector numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2
Ind: None
FS=1
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
P715

Filtering time for "Analog selectable input 1"

(G113)
P716
*

Source for enabling of "Analog selectable input 1"

(G113)

Note: Hardware filtering of approximately 1 ms is applied as standard.
Selection of binector to control enabling of the analog input ("1" state =
enabled)
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

P717
*
(G113)

Resolution of "Analog selectable input 1"
See P707

Analog input terminals 8 / 9 (analog selectable input 2)
P721

Normalization of "Analog selectable input 2"

FDS

This parameter specifies the percentage value which is generated for an
input voltage of 10V (or an input current of 20mA) at the analog input.

(G114)

The following generally applies:
For voltage input:
Y
P721 [%] = 10 V ∗
X .. Input voltage in volts
X
Y .. % value which is generated for input
voltage X
With current input:
Y
P721 [%] = 20 mA ∗
X .. Input current in mA
X
Y .. % value which is generated for input
current X

P722

Offset for "Analog selectable input 2"

(G114)
P723
*

Mode of signal injection at "Analog selectable input 2"

(G114)

P724
*
(G114)

0=
1=
2=
3=

Injection of signal with sign
Injection of absolute value of signal
Injection of signal with sign, inverted
Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted

Source for selection of sign reversal at "Analog selectable input 2"
Selection of binector to control sign reversal at the analog input ("1" state
= reverse sign)
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

P725

Filtering time for "Analog selectable input 2"

(G114)
P726
*

Source for enabling of "Analog selectable input 2"

(G114)

Note: Hardware filtering of approximately 1 ms is applied as standard.
Selection of binector to control enabling of the analog input ("1" state =
enabled)
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

10-73

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

-1000.0 to 1000.0
[%]
0.1%

Ind: 4
FS=100.0
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

-200.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
0 to 3
1

Ind: None
FS=0.00
Type: I2
Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All binector numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms
All binector numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2
Ind: None
FS=1
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

-270.00 to 270.00
[V]
0.01V

Ind: 4
FS=60.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

-200.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
0 to 3
1

Ind: None
FS=0.00
Type: I2
Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All binector numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Analog input terminals 10 / 11 (analog selectable input 3)
P731

Normalization of "Analog selectable input 3"

FDS

This parameter specifies the percentage value which is generated for an
input voltage of 10V (or an input current of 20mA) at the analog input.

(G114)

The following generally applies:
For voltage input:
Y
P731 [%] = 10 V ∗
X .. Input voltage in volts
X
Y .. % value which is generated for input
voltage X
With current input:
Y
P731 [%] = 20 mA ∗
X .. Input current in mA
X
Y .. % value which is generated for input
current X

P732

Offset for "Analog selectable input 3"

(G114)
P733
*

Mode of signal injection at "Analog selectable input 3"

(G114)

P734
*
(G114)

0=
1=
2=
3=

Injection of signal with sign
Injection of absolute value of signal
Injection of signal with sign, inverted
Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted

Source for selection of sign reversal at "Analog selectable input 3"
Selection of binector to control sign reversal at the analog input ("1" state
= reverse sign)
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

P735

Filtering time for "Analog selectable input 3"

(G114)
P736
*

Source for enabling of "Analog selectable input 3"

(G114)

Note: Hardware filtering of approximately 1 ms is applied as standard.
Selection of binector to control enabling of the analog input ("1" state =
enabled)
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

Analog input terminals 103 / 104 (main actual value)
P741

Normalization for "Main actual value”

FDS
(G113)

Rated value of input voltage at nmax (=tachometer voltage at maximum
speed)
This parameter defines the maximum speed when P083=1.

P742

Offset for "Main actual value" analog input

(G113)
P743
*

Mode of signal injection at "Main actual value" analog input

(G113)

0=
1=
2=
3=

Injection of signal with sign
Injection of absolute value of signal
Injection of signal with sign, inverted
Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted

P744
*

Source for selection of sign reversal at "Main actual value" analog
input

(G113)

Selection of binector to control sign reversal at the analog input ("1" state
= reverse sign)
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

P745

Filtering time for "Main actual value" analog input

(G113)

Note: Hardware filtering of approximately 1 ms is applied as standard.

10-74

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P746
*

Source for enabling of "Main actual value" analog input

All binector numbers
1

(G113)

Selection of binector to control enabling of the analog input ("1" state =
enabled)

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: None
FS=1
Type: L2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 3
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 3
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms
-200.00 to 199.99
[V]
0.01V

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2
Ind: None
FS=10.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

-10.00 to 10.00
[V]
0.01V

Ind: None
FS=0.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 3
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

10.38 Analog outputs
(see also Section 8, Sheets G115 and G116 of Operating Instructions 6RX1700-0AD**)
Analog output terminals 12 / 13 (actual current display)
P749
*

Control word for terminal 12 (actual current display)
0

Output with correct sign
(positive voltage: Current in torque direction MI)
(negative voltage: Current in torque direction MII)

1

Output of absolute value (positive voltage only)

2

Output with sign, inverted
(positive voltage: Current in torque direction MII)
(negative voltage: Current in torque direction MI)

3

Output of absolute value, inverted (negative voltage only)

(G115)

Analog output terminals 14 / 15
P750
*
(G115)

P751
*
(G115)

Source for output value at analog output 1
Selection of connector whose value is to applied to the analog output
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Mode of signal injection at analog output 1
0=
1=
2=
3=

Injection of signal with correct sign
Injection of absolute value of signal
Injection of signal with sign, inverted
Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted

P752

Filtering time for analog output 1

(G115)
P753

Normalization of analog output 1

(G115)

y [V ] = x ∗

P753
100 %

x = Normalization input (corresponds to filtering output)
y = Normalization output (corresponds to output voltage at analog output
with offset = 0)
P754

Offset for analog output 1

(G115)
Analog output terminals 16 / 17
P755
*
(G115)

P756
*
(G115)

P757

Source for output value at analog output 2
Selection of connector whose value is to applied to the analog output
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Mode of signal injection at analog output 2
0=
1=
2=
3=

Injection of signal with correct sign
Injection of absolute value of signal
Injection of signal with sign, inverted
Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted

Filtering time for analog output 2

(G115)
SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

10-75

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P758

Normalization of analog output 2

(G115)

y [V ] = x ∗

P758
100 %

-200.00 to 199.99
[V]
0.01V

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: None
FS=10.00
Type: I2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

-10.00 to 10.00
[V]
0.01V

Ind: None
FS=0.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 3
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms
-200.00 to 199.99
[V]
0.01V

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2
Ind: None
FS=10.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

-10.00 to 10.00
[V]
0.01V

Ind: None
FS=0.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 3
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms
-200.00 to 199.99
[V]
0.01V

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2
Ind: None
FS=10.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

-10.00 to 10.00
[V]
0.01V

Ind: None
FS=0.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

x = Normalization input (corresponds to filtering output)
y = Normalization output (corresponds to output voltage at analog output
with offset = 0)
P759

Offset for analog output 2

(G115)
Analog output terminals 18 / 19
P760
*
(G116)

P761
*
(G116)

Source for output value at analog output 3
Selection of connector whose value is to applied to the analog output
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Mode of signal injection at analog output 3
0=
1=
2=
3=

Injection of signal with correct sign
Injection of absolute value of signal
Injection of signal with sign, inverted
Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted

P762

Filtering time for analog output 3

(G116)
P763

Normalization of analog output 3

(G116)

y [V ] = x ∗

P763
100 %

x = Normalization input (corresponds to filtering output)
y = Normalization output (corresponds to output voltage at analog output
with offset = 0)
P764

Offset for analog output 3

(G116)
Analog output terminals 20 / 21
P765
*
(G116)

P766
*
(G116)

Source for output value at analog output 4
Selection of connector whose value is to applied to the analog output
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Mode of signal injection at analog output 4
0=
1=
2=
3=

Injection of signal with correct sign
Injection of absolute value of signal
Injection of signal with sign, inverted
Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted

P767

Filtering time for analog output 4

(G116)
P768

Normalization of analog output 4

(G116)

y [V ] = x ∗

P768
100 %

x = Normalization input (corresponds to filtering output)
y = Normalization output (corresponds to output voltage at analog output
with offset = 0)
P769
(G116)

10-76

Offset for analog output 4

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

0 to 1
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

All binector numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

All binector numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

All binector numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

All binector numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

10.39 Binary outputs
(see also Section 8, Sheet G112 of Operating Instructions 6RX1700-0AD**)
P770
Control word for binary selectable outputs
*
i001: 0 Binary selectable output at terminal 46 is not inverted
1 Binary selectable output at terminal 46 is inverted
(G112)
i002:
0 Binary selectable output at terminal 48 is not inverted
(G200)
1 Binary selectable output at terminal 48 is inverted

P771
*
(G112)
(G200)
P772
*
(G112)
(G200)
P773
*
(G112)

P774
*
(G112)

i003: 0
1

Binary selectable output at terminal 50 is not inverted
Binary selectable output at terminal 50 is inverted

i004: 0
1

Binary selectable output at terminal 52 is not inverted
Binary selectable output at terminal 52 is inverted

Source for output value at binary output 1
Selection of binector to be injected at binary selectable output, terminal 46
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
Source for output value at binary output 2
Selection of binector to be injected at binary selectable output, terminal 48
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
Source for output value at binary output 3
Selection of binector to be injected at binary selectable output, terminal 50
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
Source for output value at binary output 4
Selection of binector to be injected at binary selectable output, terminal 52
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

P775

Delay for output value at binary output 1

(G112)
(G200)

The logic level at the binary selectable output changes only if the internal
signal level remains constant for the set delay period (internal signal level
changes which do not last as long as this delay period are not switched
through to the output)

P776

Delay for output value at binary output 2

(G112)
(G200)

The logic level at the binary selectable output changes only if the internal
signal level remains constant for the set delay period (internal signal level
changes which do not last as long as this delay period are not switched
through to the output)

P777

Delay for output value at binary output 3

(G112)

P778
(G112)

The logic level at the binary selectable output changes only if the internal
signal level remains constant for the set delay period (internal signal level
changes which do not last as long as this delay period are not switched
through to the output)
Delay for output value at binary output 4
The logic level at the binary selectable output changes only if the internal
signal level remains constant for the set delay period (internal signal level
changes which do not last as long as this delay period are not switched
through to the output)

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

10-77

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

10.40 Configuration of serial interfaces on basic converter
G-SST 1 (RS485 / RS232 on X300) (see also Section 8, Sheet G170 and Section 9 of Operating Instructions 6RX1700-0AD**)
P780
*
(G170)

Selection of protocol for G-SST1 basic converter interface

P781
*
(G170)

Number of process data for G-SST1

0
2
8
9

Setting has no function
USS protocol
for factory purposes
For internal factory test purposes

When P780 = 0 or 9 is selected: Parameter is irrelevant

0, 2, 8, 9
1

Ind: None
FS=2
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 16
1

Ind: None
FS=2
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0, 3, 4, 127
1

Ind: None
FS=127
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

1 to 13
1

Ind: None
FS=6
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 16
FS=
i001: 32
i002: 167
i003: 0
i004: 33
i005-i016: 0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 1
1

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

When USS protocol (P780=2) is selected: Number of PZD elements

P782
*
(G170)

0

No process data are expected or sent in the USS protocol

1...16

Number of process data words in USS protocol (same number
applies to transmission and receipt)
The received PZD elements (1 to max. 16) are available at
connectors (K2001 to K2016) and, in some cases, bit-serially at
binectors for "internal wiring" purposes.
The PZD elements to be transmitted (1 to max. 16) are selected
in parameters P784.01 to P784.16.

Length of parameter jobs for G-SST1
This parameter is effective only when P780=2 (USS protocol).
0
3, 4
127

No PKW data are expected or sent in the USS protocol.
3 or 4 PKW data words are expected in the USS protocol and 3
or 4 PKW data words are also sent (for transmission of
parameter values).
Number of PKWs is determined by the telegram length

P783
*
(G170)

Baud rate for G-SST1

P784
*
(G170)

Source for transmit data for G-SST1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11
13

300 baud
600 baud
1200 baud
2400 baud
4800 baud
9600 baud
19200 baud
38400 baud
56700 baud
93750 baud
187500 baud

Selection of connectors to be transferred as transmit data to the USS
master via USS interface 1.
i001:
i002:
...
i016:

Selection for word 1
Selection for word 2
Selection for word 16

Applicable settings:
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P785

Options for G-SST1
i001:

(G170)
i002:

10-78

0 = Bus terminator OFF
1 = Bus terminator ON
st
0 = Bit 10 of the 1 receive word does not function as "Control
by PLC".
st
1 = Bit 10 of the 1 receive word does function as "Control by
st
PLC“, i.e. when bit 10 = 0, all other bits of the 1 receive word,
as well as receive words 2 to 16, are not written to connectors
K2001 to K2016, or to binectors B2100 to B2915. All these
connectors and binectors retain their old values.

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P786
*
(G170)

USS bus address for G-SST1

0 to 30
1

P787

Telegram failure time for G-SST1

(G170)

The failure time set in this parameter is valid when setting P780=2 (USS
protocol) is selected.

This parameter is functional only when P780=2 (USS protocol). Address via
which the unit can be addressed in USS bus operation.

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0.000 to 65.000
[s]
0.001s

Ind: None
FS=0.000
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

2030, 2031

Ind: None
FS=2030
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Ind: 10
Type: O2

P052 = 3

0.000
No time monitoring
0.001...65.000 Time which may elapse between the receipt of two
telegrams addressed to the unit before a fault message
is activated.
Fault message F011 is activated if no valid telegram is received within this
time period.
Note:
The telegram monitoring function is active
• from the receipt of the first error-free telegram after connection of the
electronics power supply
• from the receipt of the first error-free telegram after the telegram monitor
has responded (i.e. monitoring timeout).
P788
*
(G170)

Source for activation of F011
Selection of binector which will activate fault message F011 when it
switches to log. "1"
2030 = binector B2030
2031 = binector B2031

r789

Diagnostic information for G-SST1
Free-running counter, overflow at 65535

(G170)
i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:
i005:
i006:

i007:
i008:
i009:

i010:

Number of error-free telegrams
Number of errored telegrams:
Byte frame, parity, overrun or BCC error
Number of byte frame errors
Number of overrun errors
Parity error
STX error:
Start interval before STX not observed,
telegram residual transfer time not observed,
delay time of LGE character too long,
erroneous STX, i.e. ≠ 02
Violation of telegram residual transfer time
Block check error
Incorrect telegram length:
With P782=3 or 4 only:
The length of the received telegram is ≠ P781 + P782
(Note: If the received values are correct, they will be processed
even when this error has been detected)
Timeout error:
No valid telegram has been received for a period exceeding the
setting in P787. After the occurrence of a timeout error, this
counter is not activated again until the next valid telegram is
received.

G-SST 2 (RS485 on X172) (see also Section 8, Sheets G171 and G173 and Section 9 of Operating Instructions 6RX1700-0AD**)
P790
*
(G171)
(G173)

Selection of protocol for G-SST2 basic converter interface
0
2
5
9

Setting has no function
USS protocol
”Peer-to-peer” communication
For internal factory test purposes

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

0, 2, 5, 9
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

10-79

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P791
*
(G171)
(G173)

Number of process data for G-SST2

0 to 16
1

When P790 = 0 or 9 is selected: Parameter is irrelevant

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: None
FS=2
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0, 3, 4, 127
1

Ind: None
FS=127
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

1 to 13
1

Ind: None
FS=6
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 16
FS=
i001: 32
i002: 167
i003: 0
i004: 33
i005-i016: 0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

When USS protocol (P790=2) is selected: Number of PZD elements
0
1...16

No process data are expected or sent in the USS protocol
Number of process data words in USS protocol (same number
applies to transmission and receipt)
The received PZD elements (1 to max. 16) are available at
connectors (K6001 to K6016) and, in some cases, bit-serially at
binectors for "internal wiring" purposes.
The PZD elements to be transmitted (1 to max. 16) are selected
in parameters P794.01 to P794.16.

When peer-to-peer (P790= 5) is selected: Number of transferred words
0

P792
*
(G171)

Illegal setting

1...5

Number of transferred words

6...16

Illegal setting

Length of parameter jobs for G-SST2
This parameter is effective only when P790=2 (USS protocol).
0
3, 4
127

No PKW data are expected or sent in the USS protocol.
3 or 4 PKW data words are expected in the USS protocol and 3
or 4 PKW data words are also sent (for transmission of
parameter values).
Number of PKWs is determined by the telegram length

P793
*
(G171)
(G173)

Baud rate for G-SST2

P794
*
(G171)
(G173)

Source for transmit data for G-SST2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11
13

300 baud
600 baud
1200 baud
2400 baud
4800 baud
9600 baud
19200 baud
38400 baud
56700 baud
93750 baud
187500 baud

Selection of connectors to be transferred as transmit data via basic
converter interface 2
When USS protocol (P790=2) is selected:
i001:
i002:
...
i016:

Selection for word 1
Selection for word 2
Selection for word 16

When peer-to-peer (P790=5) is selected:
i001:
i002:
...
i005:

Selection for word 1
Selection for word 2

i006:
...
i016:

Not used

Selection for word 5

Not used

Applicable settings:
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

10-80

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P795

Options for G-SST2

0 to 1
1

(G171)
(G173)

i001:
i002:

0 = Bus terminator OFF
1 = Bus terminator ON
st
0 = Bit 10 of the 1 receive word does not function as "Control
by PLC".
st
1 = Bit 10 of the 1 receive word does function as "Control by
st
PLC“, i.e. when bit 10 = 0, all other bits of the 1 receive word,
as well as receive words 2 to 16, are not written to connectors
K6001 to K6016, or to binectors B6100 to B6915. All these
connectors and binectors retain their old values.

P796
*
(G171)

USS bus address for G-SST2

P797

Telegram failure time for G-SST2

(G171)
(G173)

The failure time set in this parameter is valid when setting P790=2 (USS
protocol) or P790=5 (peer-to-peer) is selected.

This parameter is functional only when P790=2 (USS protocol). Address via
which the unit can be addressed in USS bus operation.

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 30
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0.000 to 65.000
[s]
0.001s

Ind: None
FS=0.000
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

6030, 6031

Ind: None
FS=6030
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0.000
No time monitoring
0.001...65.000 Time which may elapse between the receipt of two
telegrams addressed to the unit before a fault message
is activated.
Fault message F012 is activated if no valid telegram is received within this
time period.
Note:
The telegram monitoring function is active
• from the receipt of the first error-free telegram after connection of the
electronics power supply
• from the receipt of the first error-free telegram after the telegram monitor
has responded (i.e. monitoring timeout).
Since the telegram transfer time is dependent on the set baud rate, the
following minimum setting values for P797 are recommended:
Baud rate as set in P793:
300
600
1200
2400
≥ 4800

baud
baud
baud
baud
baud

Recommended minimum value for P797:
0.520s
0.260s
0.140s
0.080s
0.040s

Note:
If the "Automatic restart" function is selected (P086>0) on the peer-to-peer
communication partner, then only a parameter setting of P797>P086 (on the
communication partner) is meaningful.
P798
*
(G171)
(G173)

Source for activation of F012
Selection of binector which will activate fault message F012 when it
switches to log. "1"
6030 = binector B6030
6031 = binector B6031

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

10-81

PNU

Description

r799

Diagnostic information for G-SST2

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

Free-running counter, overflow at 65535
(G171)
(G173)

i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:
i005:
i006:

i007:
i008:
i009:

i010:

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 10
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3

Number of error-free telegrams
Number of errored telegrams:
Byte frame, parity, overrun or BCC error
Number of byte frame errors
Number of overrun errors
Parity error
STX error:
Start interval before STX not observed,
telegram residual transfer time not observed,
delay time of LGE character too long,
erroneous STX, i.e. ≠ 02
Violation of telegram residual transfer time (USS prot. only)
Block check error
Incorrect telegram length:
With P792=3 or 4 only:
The length of the received telegram is ≠ P791 + P792
(Note: If the received values are correct, they will be processed
even when this error has been detected)
Timeout error:
No valid telegram has been received for a period exceeding the
setting in P797. After the occurrence of a timeout error, this
counter is not activated again until the next valid telegram is
received.

G-SST 3 (RS485 on X162) (see also Section 8, Sheets G172 and G174 and Section 9 of Operating Instructions 6RX1700-0AD**)
P800
*
(G172)
(G174)

Selection of protocol for G-SST3 basic converter interface

P801
*
(G172)
(G174)

Number of process data for G-SST3

0
2
5
9

Setting has no function
USS protocol
”Peer-to-peer” communication
For internal factory test purposes

When P800 = 0 or 9 is selected: Parameter is irrelevant

0, 2, 5, 9
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 16
1

Ind: None
FS=2
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0, 3, 4, 127
1

Ind: None
FS=127
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

When USS protocol (P800=2) is selected: Number of PZD elements
0
1...16

No process data are expected or sent in the USS protocol
Number of process data words in USS protocol (same number
applies to transmission and receipt)
The received PZD elements (1 to max. 16) are available at
connectors (K6001 to K6016) and, in some cases, bit-serially at
binectors for "internal wiring" purposes.
The PZD elements to be transmitted (1 to max. 16) are selected
in parameters P804.01 to P804.16.

When peer-to-peer (P800= 5) is selected: Number of transferred words
0

P802
*
(G172)

Number of transferred words

6...16

Illegal setting

Length of parameter jobs for G-SST3
This parameter is effective only when P800=2 (USS protocol).
0
3, 4
127

10-82

Illegal setting

1...5

No PKW data are expected or sent in the USS protocol.
3 or 4 PKW data words are expected in the USS protocol and 3
or 4 PKW data words are also sent (for transmission of
parameter values).
Number of PKWs is determined by the telegram length

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P803
*
(G172)
(G174)

Baud rate for G-SST3

1 to 13
1

P804
*
(G172)
(G174)

Source for transmit data for G-SST3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11
13

300 baud
600 baud
1200 baud
2400 baud
4800 baud
9600 baud
19200 baud
38400 baud
56700 baud
93750 baud
187500 baud

Selection of connectors to be transferred as transmit data via basic
converter interface 3

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: None
FS=13
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 16
FS=
i001: 32
i002: 167
i003: 0
i004: 33
i005-i016: 0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 1
1

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 30
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

When USS protocol (P800=2) is selected:
i001:
i002:
...
i016:

Selection for word 1
Selection for word 2
Selection for word 16

When peer-to-peer (P800=5) is selected:
i001:
i002:
...
i005:

Selection for word 1
Selection for word 2

i006:
...
i016:

Not used

Selection for word 5

Not used

Applicable settings:
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P805

Options for G-SST3
i001:

(G172)
(G174)

P806
*
(G172)

i002:

0 = Bus terminator OFF
1 = Bus terminator ON
st
0 = Bit 10 of the 1 receive word does not function as "Control
by PLC".
st
1 = Bit 10 of the 1 receive word does function as "Control by
st
PLC“, i.e. when bit 10 = 0, all other bits of the 1 receive word,
as well as receive words 2 to 16, are not written to connectors
K9001 to K9016, or to binectors B9100 to B9915. All these
connectors and binectors retain their old values.

USS bus address for G-SST3
This parameter is functional only when P800=2 (USS protocol). Address via
which the unit can be addressed in USS bus operation.

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

10-83

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P807

Telegram failure time for G-SST3

0.000 to 65.000
[s]
0.001s

(G172)
(G174)

The failure time set in this parameter is valid when setting P800=2 (USS
protocol) or P800=5 (peer-to-peer) is selected.

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: None
FS=0.000
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Ind: None
FS=9030
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Ind: 10
Type: O2

P052 = 3

0.000
No time monitoring
0.001...65.000 Time which may elapse between the receipt of two
telegrams addressed to the unit before a fault message
is activated.
Fault message F013 is activated if no valid telegram is received within this
time period.
Note:
The telegram monitoring function is active
• from the receipt of the first error-free telegram after connection of the
electronics power supply
• from the receipt of the first error-free telegram after the telegram monitor
has responded (i.e. monitoring timeout).
Since the telegram transfer time is dependent on the set baud rate, the
following minimum setting values for P807 are recommended:
Baud rate as set in P803:
300
600
1200
2400
≥ 4800

baud
baud
baud
baud
baud

Recommended minimum value for P807:
0.520s
0.260s
0.140s
0.080s
0.040s

Note:
If the "Automatic restart" function is selected (P086>0) on the peer-to-peer
communication partner, then only a parameter setting of P807>P086 (on the
communication partner) is meaningful.
P808
*
(G172)
(G174)

9030, 9031

Source for activation of F013
Selection of binector which will activate fault message F013 when it
switches to log. "1"
9030 = binector B9030
9031 = binector B9031

r809

Diagnostic information for G-SST3
Free-running counter, overflow at 65535

(G172)
(G174)

i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:
i005:
i006:

i007:
i008:
i009:

i010:

10-84

Number of error-free telegrams
Number of errored telegrams:
Byte frame, parity, overrun or BCC error
Number of byte frame errors
Number of overrun errors
Parity error
STX error:
Start interval before STX not observed,
telegram residual transfer time not observed,
delay time of LGE character too long,
erroneous STX, i.e. ≠ 02
Violation of telegram residual transfer time (USS prot. only)
Block check error
Incorrect telegram length:
With PP802=3 or 4 only:
The length of the received telegram is ≠ P801 + P802
(Note: If the received values are correct, they will be processed
even when this error has been detected)
Timeout error:
No valid telegram has been received for a period exceeding the
setting in P807. After the occurrence of a timeout error, this
counter is not activated again until the next valid telegram is
received.

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

PNU

Description

r810

Receive data on G-SST1
Display of data received via USS interface 1

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 20
Type: L2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3

Ind: 20
Type: L2

P052 = 3

Ind: 20
Type: L2

P052 = 3

Ind: 20
Type: L2

P052 = 3

(G170)
i001:
...
i016
i017:
...
i020:
r811

Display process data word 1
Display process data word 16
Display parameter data word 1
Display parameter data word 4

Transmit data on G-SST1
Display of the data to be transmitted via USS interface 1

(G170)
i001:
...
i016
i017:
...
i020:

Display process data word 1
Display process data word 16
Display parameter data word 1
Display parameter data word 4

r812

Receive data on G-SST2

(G171)
(G173)

Display of data received via USS interface 2

When USS protocol (P790=2) is selected:

i001:
...
i016
i017:
...
i020:

Display process data word 1
Display process data word 16
Display parameter data word 1
Display parameter data word 4

When peer-to-peer (P790=5) is selected:
Display of data received via peer-to-peer interface 2
i001:
...
i005
i006:
...
i020
r813

Receive data word 1
Receive data word 5
Not used
Not used

Transmit data on G-SST2
When USS protocol (P790=2) is selected:

(G171)
(G173)

Display of the data to be transmitted via USS interface 2
i001:
...
i016
i017:
...
i020:

Display process data word 1
Display process data word 16
Display parameter data word 1
Display parameter data word 4

When peer-to-peer (P790=5) is selected:
Display of the data to be transmitted via peer-to-peer interface 2
i001:
...
i005
i006:
...
i020

Transmit data word 1
Transmit data word 5
Not used
Not used

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

10-85

PNU

Description

r814

Receive data on G-SST3

(G172)
(G174)

Display of data received via USS interface 3

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

When USS protocol (P800=2) is selected:

i001:
...
i016
i017:
...
i020:

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 20
Type: L2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3

Ind: 20
Type: L2

P052 = 3

Display process data word 1
Display process data word 16
Display parameter data word 1
Display parameter data word 4

When peer-to-peer (P800=5) is selected:
Display of data received via peer-to-peer interface 3
i001:
...
i005
i006:
...
i020

Receive data word 1
Receive data word 5
Not used
Not used

r815

Transmit data on G-SST3

(G172)
(G174)

Display of the data to be transmitted via USS interface 3

When USS protocol (P800=2) is selected:

i001:
...
i016
i017:
...
i020:

Display process data word 1
Display process data word 16
Display parameter data word 1
Display parameter data word 4

When peer-to-peer (P800=5) is selected:
Display of the data to be transmitted via peer-to-peer interface 3
i001:
...
i005
i006:
...
i020

Transmit data word 1
Transmit data word 5
Not used
Not used

Peer-to-peer interfaces: Enable transmission and receipt of telegrams:
If transmission on a peer-to-peer interface is disabled, the associated output drivers are connected to high impedance. If reception is
disabled on a peer-to-peer interface, then the telegram failure monitoring function is deactivated.
All binector numbers Ind: None
P052 = 3
P816
Peer-to-peer 2: Source for data reception enabling command
1
FS=1
P051 = 40
0
=
binector
B0000
Type: L2
Offline
(G173)
1 = binector B0001
etc.
P817
(G173)
P818
(G174)

P819
(G174)

10-86

Peer-to-peer 2: Source for data transmission enabling command
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
Peer-to-peer 3: Source for data reception enabling command
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
Peer-to-peer 3: Source for data transmission enabling command
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

All binector numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=1
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All binector numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=1
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All binector numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=1
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

10.41 Deactivation of monitoring functions

WARNING
If monitoring functions are deactivated, there may be a risk to the safety of operating personnel or of
substantial property damage if a fault or error actually occurs!
P820
*

Deactivation of fault messages
The numbers of all fault messages to be deactivated must be entered in this
parameter. Fault numbers can be entered in any order. 0 must be entered
for any unused indices of the parameter.

0 to 147
1

Ind: 99
FS=
see column
on left
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 147
1

Ind: 99
FS= 0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 65535
1

Ind: 10
Type: O2

P052 = 3

13000 to 25000
1

Ind: 3
FS=19139
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

-100 to 100 * 1.333
[µs]
1.333µs

Ind: 6
FS=0
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 65535
1

Ind: 3
Type: O2

P052 = 3

0 to 65535
1

Ind: 16
Type: O2

P052 = 3

0 to 65535
1

Ind: 68
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Factory setting:
i001 = 7
(overvoltage)
i002 = 18
(short circuit at binary outputs)
i003 = 31
(monitoring of speed controller)
i004 = 35
(drive blocked)
i005 = 36
(armature current cannot flow)
i006 = 37
(I2t motor monitoring function has responded)
i007 to i099 = 0
P821
*

Deactivation of alarms
The numbers of all alarm messages to be deactivated must be entered in
this parameter. Alarm numbers can be entered in any order. 0 must be
entered for any unused indices of the parameter.

10.42 Compensation values
r824

A7006 compensation values
These data contain compensation values for the analog section of
electronics board A7006

P825

Offset compensation for actual field current channel
These data contain compensation values for the actual field current sensing
function. They are automatically set during "Restore factory settings"
(P051=21) and during the automatic offset compensation run (P051=22).

P826

Correction of natural commutation timing

(G163)

If there is a variation in the armature current peak value (in spite of a
constant firing angle), it can be corrected by offsetting the firing angle
reference time of the appropriate line phase in parameter P826. One line
phase (UV, UW, VW, VU, WU, WV) is assigned to each parameter index
(i001 to i006).
Increasing the parameter setting by a value of 1 corresponds to an increase
of 1.333 µs in the firing angle (0.024 degrees at 50Hz line frequency),
consequently reducing the armature current peak in the appropriate line
phase.
P826 is automatically set during the optimization run for precontrol and
current controller (armature and field) (P051=25) (only when U800=0; when
U800=1 or 2, parameters P826.001 to 006 are set to 0).
Caution:
Even an asymmetrical system causes variations in the magnitude of
armature current peaks. However, the system asymmetry may also change.

r827

Internal diagnosis
i001:
i002:
i003:

r828

Number of write access operations to EEPROM
Number of Page-Write access operations to EEPROM
Counter for DUAL-PORT RAM timeouts

MLFB data
These data contain details about the power section design (model)

r829

A7001 compensation values
These data contain compensation values for the analog section of
electronics board A7001

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

10-87

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

0 to 3
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

10.43 Thyristor diagnosis
P830
*

Control word for thyristor diagnosis
0
1
2
3

Thyristor check function deactivated
Thyristors are checked on initial SWITCH-ON or INCHING
command after connection of the electronics supply voltage.
Thyristors are checked on every SWITCH-ON or INCHING
command.
Thyristors will be checked on the next SWITCH-ON or INCHING
command. Parameter P830 is set to 0 if no fault is detected.

Note:
The thyristor check function may not be activated (setting P830=0 must be
selected)
− when the ”Enable a torque direction for torque direction change by
parallel drive” function is in use (see also parameter P165) or
− when the converter is used to supply large inductances (e.g. field supply
from armature terminals, supply of lifting solenoids, etc.).

10.44 Parameters for DriveMonitor and OP1S
P831
to
r849

Parameters for the Trace function of DriveMonitor

r850
to
P899

Parameters for the OP1S

P052 = 3

These parameters are settings for the data exchange between DriveMonitor
and the SIMOREG converter. They must not be changed!
P052 = 3

These parameters are settings for the data exchange between OP1S and
the SIMOREG converter. They must not be changed!

10.45 Profile parameters
P918

CB bus address
Protocol-dependent bus address for communication boards

(Z110)
(Z111)

P927
*
(G170)
(G171)
(G172)
(Z110)
(Z111)

0 to 200
1

Ind: 2
FS=3
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 127
1

Ind: None
FS=6
Type: V2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Note:
The validity of the bus address is monitored by the communication board.
(Bus addresses 0 to 2 are reserved for Master stations on PROFIBUS
boards and must not therefore be set for other purposes). If the value is not
accepted by the COM BOARD, fault F080 is displayed with fault value 5
Parameterization enable
Enabling of interfaces for parameterization. A parameter value can only be
altered via an enabled interface.
0:
1:
2:
4:
8:
16:
32:
64:

None
Communications board (CB)
Parameterizing unit (PMU)
G-SST1 serial interface and OP1S
Reserved
Technology board (TB)
G-SST2 serial interface
G-SST3 serial interface

Setting information:
Every interface has a numeric code.
The number for one specific interface, or the sum of various numbers
assigned to several interfaces, must be entered in this parameter in order to
enable the relevant interface(s) for use as a parameterization interface.
Example:
Factory setting value 6 (=4+2) means that the PMU and G-SST1 interfaces
are enabled for parameterization purposes.

10-88

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

Ind: 64
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 64
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2
Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3

10.46 Fault memory
r947
(G189)

Fault memory
Display of fault messages generated in response to recent faults. A fault
value and fault time is assigned to each fault number (see Section 10 for
details of fault numbers and fault values).The interrelationship between the
associated parameters is shown in the diagram below.
The fault numbers of the last (maximum 8) fault events are stored under the
indices of parameter P947. r947.001 displays the fault number of the current
(still not acknowledged) fault, index 9 displays the number of the most
recent acknowledged fault, index 17 the fault number of the second most
recent acknowledged fault, etc. An entry of "0" means that no "earlier" fault
has occurred. Since only one fault message can be stored with respect to
any fault event on the SIMOREG 6RA70, only indices 1, 9, 17, 25, 33, 41,
49 and 57 are relevant.
A fault value is assigned to each fault number in the corresponding index of
parameter r949. This provides further information about the nature of the
fault.
In addition, the fault time (the current reading of the hours run counter as
the fault occurred (r048)), is stored for each fault in r049. The data for the
current (not yet acknowledged) fault are stored as the "Hours run counter
reading" in index 1. The data for earlier, already acknowledged faults are
stored under the following indices.
r947
Fault number

r949
Fault value

Current

Current

Current

Index 1

0

0

1st acknowl.

Index 2

0

0

2nd acknowl.

Index 3

0

0

3rd acknowl.

Index 4

0

0

4th acknowl.

Index 5

0

0

5th acknowl.

Index 6

0

0

6th acknowl.

Index 7

0

0

7th acknowl.

Index 8

1st acknowl.

1st acknowl.

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Index 1

Index 9

Index 17

0

0

2nd acknowl.

2nd acknowl.

...

...

r049
Fault time [h]

Plaintext information about the fault numbers is available under the
corresponding index of parameter r951.
r949
(G189)

Fault value
Fault value of faults, allows more detailed diagnosis for a variety of
parameters.
The fault values are stored in the same indices as the associated fault
numbers (r947) - see parameter r947.

r951

Fault text

P952

Number of faults
Settings:
0

Deletes the entire fault memory (r947, r949 and r049) by
resetting to 0
Note:
P952 cannot be reset while a fault is pending

>0

Display of the faults stored in the fault memory (r947, r949 and
r049)

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

0 to 65535
1
0 to 65535
1

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

10-89

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

Ind: None
Type: V2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: V2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: V2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: V2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: V2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: V2

P052 = 3

10.47 Visualization parameters: Alarms
r953

Alarm parameter 1
Display of active alarms in bit-coded form (A001 to A016).
If one of the alarms between 1 and 16 is generated, the corresponding
segment in the display lights up.
16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

See Section 10.2 for meaning of individual alarms.
r954

Alarm parameter 2
Display of active alarms in bit-coded form (A017 to A032).
If one of the alarms between 17 and 32 is generated, the corresponding
segment in the display lights up.
32

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

See Section 10.2 for meaning of individual alarms
r955

Alarm parameter 3
Parameter alarms 3
If one of the alarms between 33 and 48 is generated, the corresponding
segment in the display lights up.

r956

48

47

46

45

44

43

42

41

40

39

38

37

36

35

34

33

Alarm parameter 4
Parameter alarms 4
If one of the alarms between 49 and 64 is generated, the corresponding
segment in the display lights up.

r957

64

63

62

61

60

59

58

57

56

55

54

53

52

51

50

49

Alarm parameter 5
Parameter alarms 5
If one of the alarms between 65 and 80 is generated, the corresponding
segment in the display lights up..

r958

80

79

78

77

76

75

74

73

72

71

70

69

68

67

66

65

Alarm parameter 6
Parameter alarms 6 (CB alarms)
If one of the alarms between 81 and 96 is generated, the corresponding
segment in the display lights up.

10-90

96

95

94

93

92

91

90

89

88

87

86

85

84

83

82

81

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

PNU

Description

r959

Alarm parameter 7

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

Parameter alarms 7 (TB alarms 1)
If one of the alarms between 97 and 112 is generated, the corresponding
segment in the display lights up.

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: None
Type: V2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: V2

P052 = 3

Ind: 6
Type: O2

P052 = 1

Ind: None
Type: V2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: V2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
FS=1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105
104 103 102 101 100 99

r960

98

97

Alarm parameter 8
Parameter alarms 8 (TB alarms 2)
If one of the alarms between 113 and 128 is generated, the corresponding
segment in the display lights up.
128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121
120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113

10.48 Device identification
r964

Parameters for device identification on the PROFIBUS
[SW 2.0 and later]

0 to 65535
1

Display parameters to support overview and diagnosis of all nodes on the
PROFIBUS-DP during and after commissioning
(coding according to PROFIBUS profile V3)
i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:
i005:
i006:

Display of the manufacturer of the
SIMOREG DC Master 6RA70 : SIEMENS = 42
Display of device type: SIMOREG DC Master 6RA70 = 4110
Display of the software version of the SIMOREG DC Master
6RA70
(see r060.001)
Display of year of generation of the software of the SIMOREG
DC Master 6RA70: y y y y
(see r061.001)
Display of the month and day of generation of the software of
the SIMOREG DC Master 6RA70: d d m m
(see r061.003 and r061.002)
Display of the controlled axes of the SIMOREG DC Master
6RA70: 1

10.49 Visualization parameters: Control and status word
r967

Display of control word 1
Visualization parameter for control word 1 (bits 0-15)
Identical to r650 (control word 1)

r968

Display of status word 1
Visualization parameter for status word 1 (bits 0 - 15)
Identical to r652 (status word 1)

10.50 Resetting and storing parameters,
list of existing and modified P and r parameters
P970
*

Restore factory setting
Reset parameters to factory setting (default)
0:
1:

0 to 1
1

Parameter reset: All parameters are reset to their original values
(factory setting). This parameter is then automatically reset to 1.
No parameter reset

Note: Function can also be selected by setting P051=21.

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

10-91

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P971
*

EEPROM transfer

0 to 1
1

r980

List of existing parameter numbers, start

Transfer of parameter values from RAM to EERPROM on switchover from 0
to 1.
It takes approximately 15s to process all values. The PMU remains in value
mode for this period.
Visualization parameter for displaying the first 100 parameter numbers in
the P or r parameter range (0 to 999). The parameter numbers are listed in
ascending sequence.
Repetition of a number over several indices means that there are no further
parameter numbers in the 0 to 999 range.
The list is continued at the parameter whose number is displayed under
index 101.

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

See also r989
r981

List of existing parameter numbers, continuation

r982

List of existing parameter numbers, continuation

r983

List of existing parameter numbers, continuation

See r980.
See r980.
See r980.
r984

List of existing parameter numbers, continuation

r985

List of existing parameter numbers, continuation

See r980.
See r980.
r986

List of existing parameter numbers, continuation

r987

List of existing parameter numbers, continuation

r988

List of existing parameter numbers, continuation

See r980.
See r980.
See r980.
r989

List of existing parameter numbers, continuation
Continuation of the list can be found under index 101. Please note:
860
= r860 (TECH BOARD installed)
2980 = n980
See also r980.

r990

List of modified parameter numbers, start
Visualization parameter for displaying the first 100 modified parameters in
the P or r parameter range (0 to 999). The parameter numbers are listed in
ascending sequence.
Repetition of a number over several indices means that there are no further
modified parameters in the 0 to 999 range.
The list is continued at the parameter whose number is displayed under
index 101.
See also r999.

r991

List of modified parameter numbers, continuation

r992

List of modified parameter numbers, continuation

r993

List of modified parameter numbers, continuation

See r990.
See r990.
See r990.
r994

List of modified parameter numbers, continuation

r995

List of modified parameter numbers, continuation

See r990.
See r990.
r996

List of modified parameter numbers, continuation
See r990.

10-92

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

PNU

Description

r997

List of modified parameter numbers, continuation

r998

List of modified parameter numbers, continuation

r999

List of modified parameter numbers, continuation

See r990.
See r990.
Continuation of the list can be found under index 101. Please note:
2990 = n990

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 101
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

See also r990.

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

10-93

NOTES:

10-94

SIEMENS Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

11 Simplified block diagrams
Basic functions
Page
Sheet 1
Sheet 2
Sheet 3
Sheet 4
Sheet 5
Sheet 6
Sheet 7
Sheet 8
Sheet 9
Sheet 10
Sheet 11
Sheet 12
Sheet 13
Sheet 14

Legend ............................................................................................................................ 11-2
Speed Setpoint System ................................................................................................... 11-3
Speed Control & Current Limit......................................................................................... 11-4
Armature Current Control ................................................................................................ 11-5
EMF & Field Current Control ........................................................................................... 11-6
USS Interface 1 ( X300 ) ................................................................................................. 11-7
USS Interface 2 ( X172 ) ................................................................................................. 11-8
Peer to Peer Interface ( X172 )........................................................................................ 11-9
Data Exchange CB / TB to Base (PZD) ........................................................................ 11-10
Control Word 1............................................................................................................... 11-11
Control Word 2............................................................................................................... 11-12
Status Word 1 ................................................................................................................ 11-13
Status Word 2 ................................................................................................................ 11-14
Signals .......................................................................................................................... 11-15

NOTE
The simplified block diagrams do not show all details or functions. Please refer to
Operating Instructions 6RX1700-0AD76 if additional detail or functions are required
including S00 functions and accessory boards.

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

11-1

11-2

PARAMETER NUMBER

BASIC DISPLAY PARAMETER (r or n)
TECH BOARD (d or c)

FACTORY DEFAULT VALUE
PARAMETER NUMBER

BASIC SETTING PARAMETER (P or U)
TECH BOARD (H or L)

2

PARAMETER NUMBER

INDEX NUMBER

BINECTOR NUMBER

BINECTOR (LOGIC VALUE)

CONNECTOR NUMBER

CONNECTOR (SIGNAL VALUE)

B0000 = L0GIC "0"
B0001 = LOGIC "1"

K0000 = 0%
K0001 = 100%
K0002 = 200%
K0003 = -100%
K0004 = -200%
K0005 = 50%
K0006 = 150%
K0007 = -50%
K0008 = -150%
IN

IN

IN

A%

+

FILTER

B%

MULTIPLIER

+

MAX
Pxxx

ABSOLUTE VALUE

MIN
Pxxx

LIMITER

FILTER TIME
Pxxx (0)

A%

B%

ADDER

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUTPUT =
100%

A% x B%

OUTPUT = A% + B%

VALUE FUNCTIONS

CONNECTOR
SELECTOR
Pxxx (0)
K

5

6RA70 DC MASTER
SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM
LEGEND

4

SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM DOES NOT SHOW ALL DETAILS
REFER TO OPERATING MANUAL 6RX1700-0AD76 FOR COMPLETE BLOCK DIAGRAM

PRE-ASSIGNED CONNECTORS AND BINECTORS

Bxxx

Kxxx

3

PART OF FUNCTION OR BINARY PARAMETER SET

CONNECTORS AND BINECTORS

Pxxx.01 F/B

INDEX parameters are used to both display and change
several parameter values which are all assigned to
the same parameter number

r xxx

Pxxx (0)

PARAMETERS

1

Bxxx

TIME
Pxxx (0)

RATE LIMITER

1

0

[ 4.6 ]

≥1

OR

&

AND

Bxxx

OUTPUT
BINECTOR

Bxxx

OUTPUT
BINECTOR

OUT

PAGE COLUMN NUMBER
PAGE NUMBER

PAGE REFERENCE

Pxxx (0)
B

Pxxx (0)
B

BINECTOR
SELECTORS

Pxxx (0)
B

Pxxx (0)
B

BINECTOR
SELECTORS

8

1

OUTPUT = A% IF BINECTOR VALUE = 0
OUTPUT = B% IF BINECTOR VALUE = 1

7

BINARY LOGIC FUNCTIONS

IN

B%

A%

SWITCH

VALUE FUNCTIONS

6

Sheet 1
Legend

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

7

6

5

4

-

+

-

+

P661 (1)
B

P654 (1)
B

P710

P700

&

&

0

1

K0011

0

P716 (1)
B

1

0

0%

r003

Index .01 - .08

P0440 (0)
B

1

-1

8

8

8

8

8

ON / OFF
Cntrl
Word 1
>1
Bit 0

P323.F (1)
K

ADDITIONAL SETPOINT
SCALING

P645.F (0)
K

ADDITIONAL SETPOINT
BEFORE RAMP

P321.F (100.00)

SCALING

K198

r029

SCALING
P320.F (100.00)

K206

CRAWL
SETPOINT

P322.F (1)
K

6

0

K190

Hold

K194 1 Run

RAMP
OPERATE

SPEED SETPOINT SYSTEM

SETPOINT SCALING

K207

INCH
SETPOINT

ON / OFF
Cntrl
Word 1
>1
Bit 0

K209

FIXED
SETPOINT

K0015

8

CRAWL COMMAND

Index .01 - .08

P0435 (0)
B

INCH COMMAND

Index .01 - .08

P0430 (0)
B

FIXED COMMAND

P0433.F (11)
K

SPEED SETPOINT
SOURCE

Index .01 - .08

K

P0431 (0)

FIXED SETPOINT
SOURCE

Index .01 - .08

K

P0436 (0)

INCH SETPOINT
SOURCE

Index .01 - .08

ON / OFF

FILTER TIME
P715 (0)

r001

ENABLE
Cntrl Word 1
Bit 3 [ 10.3 ]

Cntrl Word 1
Bit 0 [ 10.1 ]

ON / OFF

P0441 (0)
K

5

6RA70 DC MASTER
SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM

4

(ALL AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS ARE NOT SHOWN ON SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM)
CRAWL SETPOINT
SOURCE

3

REVERSE
POLARITY

P714 (0)
B

P711.F (100.00)

SCALING

ANALOG 1 (CUD1)

SELECTABLE

-1

REVERSE
POLARITY

P704 (0)
B

MAIN
P701.F (100.00)
SETPOINT

B0014

2

ASSIGNABLE
BINARY INPUTS

SCALING

B0010

B0016

BINARY
INPUTS
(CUD1)

B0012

P24

M

1

ANALOG INPUT

X174

35

38

37

36

39

34

X171

0

0%

Stop

1 Run

.02

RAMP

K190

r027

[ 10.7 ]

Control Word 1 Bit 5 [ 10.7 ]

K

P755 (0)

K

P750 (0)

ARMATURE
CURRENT

MIN
P301

M

M

K170 SPEED

M

M

M

17

16

15

14

13

12

X175

SETPOINT
TO SPEED
CONTROLLER
[ 3.1 ]

BINARY
OUTPUTS
(CUD1)

MAX
P300

54

48

47

46

X171

8

2

ANALOG
OUTPUTS
(CUD1)

Control Word 1 Bit 4
Control Word 1 Bit 0 [ 10.7 ]
AND
Control Word 1 Bit 6 [ 10.7 ]

ENABLE

DOWN
RATE
P304.F

P305.F P306.F
START END
RND
RND

K192

STOP r028

UP
RATE
P303.F

K

P634 (0)

ADDITIONAL SETPOINT
AFTER RAMP

P772 (0)
B

P771 (0)
B

7

Sheet 2
Speed Setpoint System

11-3

11-4

0%

K170

[ 10.7 ]

FAST STOP

1

0

2

K174

r026

[ 14.2 ] [ 14.4 ]

SETPOINT
FILTER TIME
P228.F(0)

<1> 100% CORRESPONDS TO THE RATED MOTOR CURRENT (P100)

SPEED CONTROL & CURRENT LIMIT

[ 2.8 ] [ 14.2 ]

SPEED
SETPOINT
FROM RAMP
GENERATOR

1

5

6RA70 DC MASTER
SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM

4

P115 (100%)
MAX SPEED

[ 5.3 ]

MOTOR EMF

K287

K167

ENABLE
[ 11.6 ]

ACTUAL SPEED
FILTER TIME
P200.F (0)

K165

r037

P115

135.05

EMF

3
4

ENCODER

ANALOG
TACH

]

2

1

0

P083.F

P609 (0)
K

r025

K

P502 (0)

ADDITIONAL
TORQUE

K160

K162

P225.F (3.0) P226.F (0.65)

0

1

CONTROL WORD 2
BIT 24 [ 11.6

DROOP ENABLE

SPEED
CONTROLLER
KP
TN

P563.F (-100)
NEGATIVE
DROOP LIMIT

P227.F (0.0)

DROOP
SCALING

<1>

K040

r024

r002

P140

PULSE
ENCODER
SCALING

PPR

P141

TYPE

P143.F

K

P601 (0)

MAX
RPM

ANALOG
TACHOMETER
SCALING

P741.F

r021

<1>

6

0

1

P170 (0)

27 (COMMON)

31 (SIGNAL NOT B)

30 (SIGNAL B)

29 (SIGNAL NOT A)

28 (SIGNAL A)

PULSE ENCODER

.04

7

ANALOG TACHOMETER

K

P601 (0)

ADDITIONAL
CURRENT

CURRENT

K140

O TORQUE

1

MOTOR FLUX
K290

[ 5.7 ]

26 (+15 VOLTS)

X173

104-

103 +

XT

.02

ADDITIONAL
TORQUE

K141

VOLTAGE AT
TOP SPEED

<1>

NEGATIVE
TORQUE LIMIT

P181 (-300%)

K013

K145

r022

POSITIVE
TORQUE LIMIT
P180 (300%)

<1>

(ALL AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS ARE NOT SHOWN ON SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM)

POSITIVE
DROOP LIMIT
P562.F (100)

3

K133

<1>

<1>

P172 (-100%)
NEGATIVE
CURRENT LIMIT

K120

POSITIVE
CURRENT LIMIT
P171 (100%)

8

3

[ 4.2 ]

CURRENT
SETPOINT
TO CURRENT
CONTROL

Sheet 3
Speed Controller and Current Limit

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

[ 3.8 ]

CURRENT
SETPOINT
FROM SPEED
CONTROL

2

K120

K119

3

0 = ACTIVE ONLY DURING
TORQUE DIRECTION
CHANGE
1 = ALWAYS ACTIVE

P157.F (0)
MODE

P158.F (0)

di/dt
TIME

<1> 100% CORRESPONDS TO THE RATED MOTOR CURRENT (P100)

ARMATURE CURRENT CONTROL

1

5

CALCULATED EMF

MEASURED EMF

K118

K124 1

K123 0

ARMATURE CURRENT = 0

P153.F (1)
CONTROL

K121

P111.F (0)
FEED FORWARD

P110.F (0)

ARMATURE
ARMATURE
RESISTANCE INDUCTANCE

CURRENT
CONTROLLER

6

K102

REVERSING
LOGIC

REVERSING
DEAD BAND
P160.F (0)

P151.F (1500 )
RETARD
LIMIT

K100

ADVANCE
LIMIT
0
P150.F (30 )
r018

ARMATURE CURRENT ACTUAL VALUE

K110

TN
KP
P155.F (.1) P156.F (.2)

K113

K305

P162 (1)

LINE VOLTAGE

r020

<1>

K117

r019

<1>

(ALL AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS ARE NOT SHOWN ON SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM)

6RA70 DC MASTER
SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM

4

TACH

REVERSE

FORWARD

CURRENT
RECTIFICATION

7

M

MOTOR

CT'S

AC LINE
VOLTAGE

8

4

Sheet 4
Armature Current Control

11-5

11-6

-

EMF
SETPOINT
r039

K166

K288

[ 3.3 ]

K286
EMF

K293

K278

1

0
K277

Index .02 - .04

K

P611 (0)

ADDITIONAL
FIELD CURRENT
SETPOINTS

100%

FIELD
WEAKENING
ACTIVE
P081 (0)

EMF

ACTUAL EMF
r037

P120.F
to
P139.F
FIELD
CHARACTERISTICS

n

P118.F (340) P119.F (100)
RATED
BASE
EMF
SPEED

FIELD
SETPOINT

K280

ENABLE
P273 (1)

EMF
CONTROLLER

TN
P276.F (.2)

DROOP
P277.F (0)

5

6RA70 DC MASTER
SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM

4

r038

K0275

P082=2

B0124

&

LINE CONTACTOR
CLOSED

t

≥1

P258.F (10s)
Delay time

P692.B (0)
B

1

0

FIELD
ECONOMY

<1>

K268

ACTUAL VALUE

P120.F - P139.F

P253.F (1)
ENABLE

FEED FORWARD

FIELD
RESISTANCE
P112.F (0)

K271

K260

TN
P256.F (.2)

CURRENT
CONTROLLER

KP
P255.F (5)

K263

K304
FIELD
LINE VOLTAGE

K290

FLUX

K266

7

[ 3.6 ]

K251

K250

RETARD
LIMIT

P251.F (1800 )

ADVANCE
LIMIT
0
P250.F (0 )

FIELD
LINE VOLTAGE

8

5

MOTOR
FIELD

r034

INTERNAL
FIELD ACTUAL
CURRENT

FIELD CURRENT CONTROLLER

K265

P612 (266)
K

CURRENT SETPOINT IS SET
TO ZERO WHEN FIELD GATE
PULSES ARE DISABLED

FIELD
CURRENT
SETPOINT
r036

ARMATURE TERMINAL
VOLTAGE

P103.F (0 A ) P257.F (0 %)
MINIMUM FIELD STANDSTILL
FIELD
CURRENT

K276

P102.F (0 A)

RATED MOTOR
FIELD CURRENT

di a x L
a
dt

iax R a

<1>

6

ACTUAL FIELD
CURRENT
FIELD
r035

(ALL AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS ARE NOT SHOWN ON SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM)

K0287

3

EMF CONTROLLER
KP
P275.F (.6)

K283

K285

P616 (286)
K

EMF
ACTUAL VALUE

2

<1> 100% CORRESPONDS TO THE RATED MOTOR FIELDCURRENT (P102)

SPEED
ABSOLUTE
VALUE n

Index .02 - .04

K

P615 (0)

ADDITIONAL EMF
SETPOINT

P101.F

P100.F X P110.F

1

Sheet 5
EMF and Field Current Control

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

2

+5V

Submin D

5 M
9 M

8 Rx-/Tx-

3 Rx+/Tx+

2 RxD

7 TxD

6
1
4

X300:
G-SST1

+

Parameter

K2004

Word 4

K
K
K

K2007
K2008
K2009
K2010

Word 7
Word 8
Word 9
Word 10

B2800
B2900

Length of process data

Length of parameter data

USS diagnostic parameter

Enable parameterization

P782 (127)

r789

P927

B

P788 (2030)

1 = "Fault F011"

Fault message trigger

B2915

B2815

B2715

B2615
B2700

P781 (2)

B2031

Baud rate

B2600

P783 (6)

B2515

B2500

Slave address

B2415

B2400

P786 (0)

B2315

B2300

USS On/Off
B2030

K2016

Word 16

B2215

K2015

Word 15

B2115

K2014

Word 14

B2200

K2013

Word 13

Bit 0
B2100

K

K2012

K

K

K

K

K
K2011

Word 11
Word 12

K

K

K2006

Word 6

K

K

K2005

Word 5

Telegram monitoring time
1s

Bit 15

K2003

Word 3

...

K2002
K

K

K2001

every 16 bits

Word 1
Word 2

r810.01 to .16

processing

P784
K

Process data
from USS interface

Word 4: Param.Value
High Word

Word 3: Param.Value
Low Word

Word 2: Param.Index

r811.01 to .16

B

U116 (0)

B

U116 (0)

WE .01
32
.02
167
.03
0
.04
33
.05
0
.06
0
.07
0
.08
0
.09
0
.10
0
.11
0
.12
0
.13
0
.14
0
.15
0
.16
0

.16

.01

15
0
Binector / Connector
Converter

Word 16

Word 15

Word 14

Word 12
Word 13

Word 11

Word 9
Word 10

Word 8

Word 7

Word 6

Word 5

Word 4

Word 2
Word 3

Word 1

Process Data
to USS interface

Word 4: Param.Value
High Word

Word 3: Param.Value
Low Word

Word 2: Param.Index

Word 1: Param.-ID
(PKE)

Transmit data
USS parameter data

r811.17 r811.18 r811.19 r811.20

7

Word 1: Param.-ID
(PKE)

r810.17 r810.18 r810.19 r810.20

6

USS parameter data

Receive data

(ALL AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS ARE NOT SHOWN ON SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM)

1 = "Telegram
monitoring
timeout"

≥1

5

6RA70 DC MASTER
SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM

4

P787 (0,000s)

Bus terminator

P785 (0)

RS485

RS232

1

3

P780 (2)

M

0 1 0 1

USS interface 1

Parameters for USS interface

1

8

6

K2020

1

Sheet 6
USS Interface 1 ( X300 )

11-7

11-8
2

Rx+/Tx+

Rx-/Tx-

58

59

+

P795 (0)

RS485

USS On/Off

Telegram monitoring time

Slave address

Baud rate

Length of process data

Length of parameter data

USS diagnostic parameter

Enable parameterization

P797 (0,000s)

P796 (0)

P793 (6)

P791 (2)

P792 (127)

r799

P927

Bus terminator

P790 (0)

M

0 1 0 1

Parameters for USS interface

M

Tx-

57

60

Tx+

56

G-SST2

USS interface 2

X172

1

1

5

6RA70 DC MASTER
SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM

4

Parameter

P798 (6030)
B

1s

...

Bit 15

K

K6010

1 = "Fault F012"

Fault message trigger

B6031

B6030

Word 16

Word 15

B6515
B6615

B6500
B6600

B6900

B6800

B6915

B6815

B6715

B6415
B6400

B6700

B6315

B6215
B6200
B6300

B6115
B6100

Bit 0

K6016

K6015

K
K

K

K
K6013
K6014

K6012

Word 12
Word 13
Word 14

K

K6011

K

K

K

K6009

K6008

K

K

K

Word 11

Word 9
Word 10

Word 8

K6007

K6005

K

K

K6003
K6004

K

P794
K

K6002

K6001

Word 7

every 16 bits

K6006

r812.01 to .16

processing

Word 6

Word 5

Word 4

Word 2
Word 3

Word 1

Process data
from USS interface

Word 4: Param.Value
High Word

Word 3: Param.Value
Low Word

Word 2: Param.Index

r813.01 to .16

U117 (0)
B

U117 (0)
B

WE
.01
32
.02
167
.03
0
.04
33
.05
0
.06
0
.07
0
.08
0
.09
0
.10
0
.11
0
.12
0
.13
0
.14
0
.15
0
.16
0

.16

.01

15
0
Binector / Connector
Converter

Word 16

Word 15

Word 14

Word 13

Word 11
Word 12

Word 10

Word 9

Word 8

Word 7

Word 6

Word 5

Word 4

Word 3

Word 2

Word 1

Process data
to USS interface

Word 4: Param.Value
High Word

Word 3: Param.Value
Low Word

Word 2: Param.Index

Word 1: Param.-ID
(PKE)

Transmit data

Word 1: Param.-ID
(PKE)

r813.17 r813.18 r813.19 r813.20

7

USS parameter data

r812.17 r812.18 r812.19 r812.20

6

USS parameter data

Receive data

(ALL AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS ARE NOT SHOWN ON SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM)

1 = "Telegram
monitoring
timeout"

3

8

7

K6020

1

Sheet 7
USS Interface 2 ( X172 )

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

1

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

Rx+/Tx+

Rx-/Tx-

58

59

+
M

0 1 0 1

0

1

Enable data receive

P816 (1)
B

P817 (1)
B

<2>

0

1

<1>

Peer-to-peer On/Off
Telegram monitoring time
Baud rate
No. of words (1...5)
Peer-to-peer diagnostic parameter

P797 (0,000s)

P793 (6)

P791 (2)

r799

1s

1 = "Telegram
monitoring
timeout"

B6031

B6030

B6515
B6500

1 = "Fault F012"

Fault signal trip

B6415
B6400

B6215
B6315

Bit 15
B6115
B6300

...

6

B6200

B6100

Bit 0

K6005

Word 5
From preceding
drive

K6004

Word 4

K6003

K6001

Word 3

every 16Bits
K6002

P798 (6030)
B

r812.01 to .05

Word 1
Word 2

Receive data

<2> Binector = 0:
Telegram sign-of-life-monitorig is not active

P790 (0)

5

6RA70 DC MASTER
SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM

4

(ALL AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS ARE NOT SHOWN ON SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM)

Enable data send

3

<1> Binector = 0:
Output drivers are high resistance

Bus terminator

P795 (0)

RS485

Parametes for peer-to-peer interface :

M

Tx-

57

60

Tx+

G-SST2

56

X172

Peer-to-peer interface 2

2

K

K

K

K

.05

.04

.03

.02

.01

U117 (0)
B

U117 (0)
B

P794 (0)
K

.16

.01

r813.01 to .05

7

15
0
Binector / Connector
Converter

To following
drive

Word 5

Word 4

Word 2
Word 3

Word 1

Transmit data

8

8

K6020

Sheet 8
Peer to Peer Interface ( X172 )

11-9

11-10
3

5

(ALL AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS ARE NOT SHOWN ON SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM)

6RA70 DC MASTER
SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM

4

6

From supplementary board

K3005
K3006
K3007
K3008
K3009
K3010
K3011
K3012
K3013
K3014
K3015
K3016

Word 5
Word 6
Word 7
Word 8
Word 9
Word 10
Word 11
Word 12
Word 13
Word 14
Word 15
Word 16

Initialize link to supplementary boards

CB parameter 11

Telegram receive monitoring time

CB or TB diagnosis

Display parameter job (PKW) from CB

Display parameter job (PKW) from TB

Display parameter response (PKW) to CB

Display parameter response (PKW) to TB

Bus address

Enable parameterization

U721 Index.01-.05

U722.1 (0 ms)

n732 Index.01-.32

n738 Index.01-.04

n738 Index.09-.12

n739 Index.01-.04

n739 Index.09-.12

P918 Index.01

P927

U711-U720 Index.01 CB parameters 1 to 10

U710 Index.01

K3004

B3215
B3315
B3415
B3515
B3615
B3715
B3815
B3915

B3200
B3300
B3400
B3500
B3600
B3700
B3800
B3900

1 = "Fault F082"
(fault value = 10)

Fault message trigger

B3031

B3030

1 = "Telegram monitoring timeout"
1s

Bit 15
B3115

...

B3100

Bit 0

K3003

Word 4

K3001

Word 3

every 16 bits
K3002

n733.01 to .16

Word 1
Word 2

Receive data
U734 (0)
.01
K
.02
K
.03
K
.04
K
.05
K
.06
K
.07
K
.08
K
.09
K
.10
K
.11
K
.12
K
.13
K
.14
K
.15
K
.16
K

n735.01 to .16

Process data exchange with a communications board (CB) or technology board (TB)

2

Parameters for the first CB board

1

Word 16

Word 15

Word 14

Word 13

Word 11
Word 12

Word 9
Word 10

Word 8

Word 7

Word 6

Word 5

Word 4

Word 3

Word 1
Word 2

Transmit data

7

9

To supplementary board

8

Sheet 9
Data Exchange CB / TB to Base (PZD)

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions
≥1

FAULT ACK

&

FAST STOP

&

Note:
Bit 10 must be set in the first PZD word
of the telegram received via the serial
interfaces to ensure that the process data
will be accepted as valid (cf. USS,
Profibus, etc.).

<1>

P667.B (0)
B

P666.B (0)
B

P665.B (0)
B

P660.B (1)
B

P659.B (1)
B

P658.B (1)
B

P657.B (1)
B

P656.B (1)
B

≥1

COAST STOP

Pulse generator

CRAWL ON / OFF

INCHING ON / OFF

[ 2.2 ] TERMINAL 37 ON / OFF

P655.B (1)
B

2

NORMAL START / STOP

Control word 1

1

5

to sequencing control

1=Enable, enable pulses
0=Pulse disable

Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15

P673.B (0)
B
P674.B (0)
B
P675.B (1)
B

<1>

0=External fault 1
1=No external fault

1=Decrease motorized potentiometer

1=Increase motorized potentiometer

1=Enable negative direction of rotation
0=Negative direction of rotation disabled

1=Enable positive direction of rotation
0=Positive direction of rotation disabled

Bit 10

P672.B (1)
B

1=Control requested
0=No control requested

Bit 9

P671.B (1)
B

1=Inching 2

Bit 8

P669.B (0)
B

1=Inching 1

0 =>1 edge Acknowledge

1=Enable setpoint
0=Disable setpoint

1=Ramp-function generator start
0=Ramp-function generator stop

"Inching setpoint 2" [ 2.3 ]

"Inching setpoint 1" [ 2.3 ]

to sequencing control

7

15
6

14
5

13

4

12

3

11

[ 2.7 ]

[ 2.7 ]

[ 2.7 ]

1

B0160
B0161

P360.01 (0ms)
(0...10000ms)

OR'd WITH P435.02

8

2

10

1

9

Bit0

Bit8

10

1 = "Fault F021"

External fault 1

Display of control word 1 (r650)
on 7-segment display

7

OR'd WITH P435.01

to "Ramp-function generator"

to "Ramp-function generator"

to "Ramp-function generator"

to sequencing control,
to brake control
[ 3.2 ]

0=OFF3, fast stop
1=operating condition

1=Enable ramp-function generator
0=Set ramp-function generator to 0

to sequencing control

0=OFF2, pulse disable, motor coasts to standstill
1=operating condition

K0030

Control word 1

to sequencing control, [ 2.7 ]
to brake control

6

0=OFF1, shutdown via ramp-function generator followed by
pulse disable
1=ON, operating condition (edge-controlled)

Meaning

P668.B (0)
B

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

P664.B (1)
B

Bit 4

P663.B (1)
B

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Bit No.

P662.B (1)
B

[ 2.2 ] ENABLE

K

P648.B (9)

Terminals 37 and 38 are always active. They are ANDed to get bit 0 or bit 3.

r650

(ALL AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS ARE NOT SHOWN ON SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM)

6RA70 DC MASTER
SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM

4

When P648 = 9, bit-serial input of control bits (P654 to P675 are effective)
When P648 <> 9, word-serial input of control bits (P654 to P675 are not effective)

3

Sheet 10 Control Word 1

11-11

1

11-12
3

Bit 24
Bit 25
Bit 26
Bit 27
Bit 28
Bit 29
Bit 30
Bit 31

P685.B (1)
B

P686.B (1)
B

P687.B (0)
B

P688.B (1)
B

P689.B (1)
B

P690 (0)
B

P691.B (1)
B

Main contactor check-back signal

0=Select Bico data set 1
1=Select Bico data set 2

0=External alarm 2
1=No external alarm 2

0=External alarm 1
1=No external alarm 1

0=Master drive (speed control)
1=Slave drive (torque control)

0=External fault 2
1=No external fault 2

1=Enable speed controller
0=Speed controller disabled

1=Enable speed controller droop
0=Speed controller droop disabled

Spare

P684.B (1)
B

Bit 23

Select fixed setpoint 2

Spare

Bit 21

Select fixed setpoint 1

Bit 22

Bit 20

Spare

Bit 19

P681.B (0)
B

Spare

Bit 18

P680.B (0)
B

Select function data set bit 1

Bit 17

P677.B (0)
B

Select function data set bit 0

Meaning

Bit 16

Bit No.
K0031

Control word 2

6

[ 3.4 ]

[ 3.4 ]

to sheet "Speed controller"

to sheet "Speed controller"

to sheet "Fixed setpoint" [ 2.3 ]

to sheet "Fixed setpoint" [ 2.3 ]

r651

(ALL AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS ARE NOT SHOWN ON SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM)

P676.B (0)
B

P649.B (9)
K

5

6RA70 DC MASTER
SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM

4

When P649 = 9, bit-serial input of control bits (P676 to P691 are effective)
When P649 <> 9, word-serial input of control bits (P676 to P691 are not effective)

Control word 2

2

22

30
21

29
20

28
19

27
18

26

P360.04 (0ms)
(0...10000ms)

P360.03 (0ms)
(0...10000ms)

P360.02 (0ms)
(0...10000ms)

OR'd WITH P430.02

OR'd WITH P430.01

17

25

1 = "Alarm A022"

External alarm 2

1 = "Alarm A021"

External alarm 1

1 = "Fault F022"

External fault 2

Display of control word 2 (r651)
on 7-segment display

23

31

7

Bit16

Bit24

8

11

Sheet 11 Control Word 2

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

2

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

5

B0102
B0104
B0106
B0108
B0110
B0112
B0114
B0116

B0120

1 = Ready to switch on
0 = Not ready to switch on
1 = Ready to operate (pulses disabled)
0 = Not ready to operate
1 = Run (output terminals energized)
0 = Pulses disabled
1 = Fault is active (pulses disabled)
0 = No fault is active
0 = OFF2 applied
1 = No OFF2 applied
0 = OFF3 applied
1 = No OFF3 applied
1 = Switch-on inhibit
0 = No switch-on inhibit (converter can be switched on)
1 = Alarm is active
0 = No alarm is active
0 = Setpoint/actual value deviation detected
1 = No setpoint/actual value deviation detected
1 = PZD control requests (always 1)
1 = Comparison setpoint reached
0 = Comparison setpoint not reached

Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5

Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10

B0122
B0124
B0126
B0128

1 = Undervoltage fault
0 = No undervoltage fault is active
1 = Request to energize main contactor
0 = Request not to energize main contactor
1 = Ramp-function generator active
0 = Ramp-function generator not active
1 = Positive speed setpoint
0 = Negative speed setpoint
Spare

Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15

from sequencing control

from setpoint processing
(part 2)

from sheet "Signals"

Bit 6

B0100

Meaning

r652

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

K0032

Status word 1

(ALL AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS ARE NOT SHOWN ON SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM)

6RA70 DC MASTER
SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM

4

Bit No.

3

from fault processing

from sheet "Signals"

from sequencing control

from sheet "Signals"

from alarm processing

from sequencing control

from sequencing control

rom sequencing control

from fault processing

from sequencing control

from sequencing control

from sequencing control

Status word 1

1

6

B0129

B0127

B0125

B0123

B0121

B0117

B0115

B0113

B0111

B0109

B0107

B0105

B0103

B0101

5

6

7

4

12
3

11

2

10

Display of status word 1 (r652)
on 7-segment display

13

14

15

7

1

9

Bit0

Bit8

8

12

Sheet 12 Status Word 1

11-13

11-14
B0140
B0142
B0144
B0146
B0148
B0150
B0152

1 = External fault 2 acrive
0 = No external fault 2 active
1 = External alarm active
0 = No external alarm active
1 = Power section overload alarm active
0 = No overload alarm active
1 = Power section overtemperature fault active
0 = No overtemperature faultactive
1 = Power section overtemperature alarm active
0 = No overtemperature alarm active
1 = Motor overtemperature alarm active
0 = No motor overtemperature alarm active
1 = Motor overtemperature fault active
0 = No motor overtemperature fault active
spare
1 = Motor locked fault active
0 = No motor locked fault active
spare
spare
spare

Bit 20
Bit 21
Bit 22
Bit 23
Bit 24
Bit 25
Bit 26
Bit 27
Bit 28
Bit 29
Bit 30
Bit 31

from sequencing control

from sequencing control

from alarm processing

from fault processing

from alarm processing

from alarm processing

from alarm processing

B0156

B0138

1 = External fault 1 active
0 = No extern fault 1 active

Bit 19

from sequencing control

from fault processing

B0136

0 = Overspeed
1 = No overspeed

Bit 18

from sheet "Signals"

r653

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

K0033

Status word 2

(ALL AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS ARE NOT SHOWN ON SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM)

Spare

Meaning

5

6RA70 DC MASTER
SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM

4

Bit 17

Bit No.

3

Spare

2

Bit 16

Status word 2

1

6

B0157

B0153

B0151

B0149

B0147

B0145

B0143

B0141

B0139

B0137

22

30
21

29
20

28
19

27
18

26

Display of status word 2 (r653)
on 7-segment display

23

31

7

17

25

Bit16

Bit24

8

13

Sheet 13 Status Word 2

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

[ 3.1 ]

n(act)

Positive speed setpoint
to status word 1, bit14

[ 3.3 ]

T

T

P381.F (-120.0)
(-199.9...0.0%)
n(max. neg. rot.)

OFF1 or OFF3 from
sequencing control

OFF delay

0

P375.F (3.0)
(0.0...100.0 s)
Comparison (time)

OFF delay

0

P390.F (3.0)
(0.0...100.0 s)
Setp./act.val. dev. (time)

P371.F (0.50)
(0.00...199.99%)
OFF shutdown speed (hyst.)

0

1

P370.F (0.50)
(0.00...199.99%)
OFF shutdown speed

P374.F (3.00)
(0.00...199.99%)
n(comp.hyst.)

0

1

P373.F (100.00)
(0.00...199.99%)
n(comp.)

P389.F (3.00)
(0.00...199.99%)
Setp./act.val. hyst.

0

1

P388.F (3.00)
(0.00...199.99%)
Setp./act.val. dev. (perm.)

&

6

T

0

1

P380.F (120.0)
(0.0...199.9%)
n(max. pos. rot.)

OFF delay

0

P088.F (3.0)
(0.0...100.0 s)
Comparison (time)

Comparison setpoint reached
to status word 1, bit 10

1 = "Alarm A031"

1 = "Fault F031"

Firing pulse disable

7

Overspeed to
status word 2, bit 18

1 = "Alarm A038"

1 = "Fault F038"

Setpoint/act. value deviation
to status word 1, bit 8

(ALL AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS ARE NOT SHOWN ON SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM)

P595 (167)
K

0

1

5

6RA70 DC MASTER
SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM

4

P594 (170)
K

P593 (167)
K

n(act)

P592 (167)
K

n(act)

P591 (167)
K

3

n(act)

[ 3.3 ]

[ 3.3 ]

[ 3.3 ]

[ 3.1 ]

n(set)
P590 (170)
K

2

n(set)

Signals

1

8

14

Sheet 14 Signals

11-15

11-16

Bico data set
from control word 2

Note:
The applicable parameters
are identified by the code ".B"

Function data set bit 1
from control word 2

Function data set bit 0
from control word 2

Note:
The applicable parameters
are identified by the code ".F"

1

3

Source data set (1...4)

Target data set (1...4)

Index 2

Source data set (1/2)

Target data set (1/2)

Index 1

P057 (012)
011...222
Copy Bico data set

xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
...

Parameter
number

Switchover between binector
and connector parameters

P055. (012)
(011...244)
Copy function data set

xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
...

Parameter
number Index 1 Index 2 Index 3 Index 4

Switchover between function parameters

Data sets

2

r058
active Bico data set

r056
active function data set

4

K0405

K0404

K0403

K0402

K0401

K

K
K
K

P044 (0)
K
K
K

P416.F (0)

P415.F (0)

P414.F (0)

P413.F (0)

.01
.02
.03
.04
.05
.06
.07

r043.07
r041.06

r043.05
r043.04

r043.03
r043.02

r043.01

K0416

K0415

K0414

K0413

K0412

setting range
-32768 to +32767

5 Fixed Values

6

P412.F (0)

7 Connector Displays

ALSO SEE P406 TO P411

P405.F (0,00)

P404.F (0,00)

P403.F (0,00)

P402.F (0,00)

P401.F (0,00)

setting range
-199.99 to +199.99%

5 Fixed Values

5

8

B0425

B0424

B0423

B0422

B0421

.01
.02
.03
.04

15

r045.04

r045.03
r045.02

r045.01

4 Binector Displays

ALSO SEE P426 TO P428

P425.F (0)

P424.F (0)

P423.F (0)

P422.F (0)

P421.F (0)

5 Fixed Control Bits

P046 (0)
B
B
B
B

7

Sheet 15 Miscellaneous

Siemens Energy & Automation
SIMOREG DC Master Base Drive Panel Operating Instructions

SIMOREG DC Master
6RA70 Series Base Drive Instructions
Microprocessor-based converters from 15A to 1680A
for variable speed DC drives
Rev 5.0
6RA70 Base Drives

dc drives
dc drives instructions • 2004

Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
3333 Old Milton Parkway
Alpharetta, GA 30005
1-800-964-4114
seainfo@sea.siemens.com
www.sea.siemens.com/drives
© 2004 Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
The Siemens logo and SIMOREG are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. Product names mentioned may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Order Number DCOM-80011-1500-0804SSS Printed in USA.

Global network of innovation



---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.5
Linearized                      : No
XMP Toolkit                     : 3.1-701
About                           : uuid:a0662309-cc9b-441b-99bf-7178c7268689
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 6.0.1 (Windows)
Creator Tool                    : PScript5.dll Version 5.2
Modify Date                     : 2006:09:06 09:46:34-04:00
Create Date                     : 2004:12:14 04:04:36-05:00
Metadata Date                   : 2006:09:06 09:46:34-04:00
Document ID                     : uuid:82cc73fb-6f89-4f8d-84b5-75732d84b9b6
Instance ID                     : uuid:a043002c-c637-4885-a3a2-adddf77c1a7e
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : Microsoft Word - Ch 0 Cover-Contentswopix.doc
Creator                         : Francy DeBartola
Has XFA                         : No
Page Count                      : 232
Author                          : Francy DeBartola

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools